JP6798823B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, as a game machine, there is a game machine provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of a game ball and a large number of game nails on the surface of the game board. In this type of game machine, the passing rate of the winning opening and the passing gate varies depending on the adjustment of the game nails provided on the game board. Further, as another example of the game machine, the player operates the start lever after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game medium such as a medal, a coin, or a game ball similar to a pachinko game machine. There is a slot machine capable of starting variable display of a display symbol by a variable display device and imparting a predetermined game value based on the derived display result.

Among such game machines, a game machine that emits light from a plurality of light emitters is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). This game machine includes a red LED, a green LED, and a blue LED, and among these LEDs, a common digit is used for a different LED, for example, a green LED and a blue LED.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-226721

In the game machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, from the viewpoint of standardization of members, a signal is transmitted to each LED by standardizing the digits by programs inside and outside the area allocated to the substrate. At this time, there is a risk that the display of each LED may have a problem depending on the execution order of the programs inside and outside the area allocated to the board.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a display defect of a light emitting body.

The gaming machine of the means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of a special symbol and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is a plurality of light emitters (for example, a slot machine). , 1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, 7 segments such as ordinary symbol display 20, etc.) 1st light emitting means (for example, 1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special) It is composed of a symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display 20 and the like) and a plurality of light emitters (for example, the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D and the like composed of seven segments in the display monitor 29), and the first light emission. A second light emitting means (for example, a display monitor 29) different from the means is provided, and each of the plurality of light emitting bodies constituting the first light emitting means emits light in which a display result of a special symbol relating to the progress of the game is defined. In each of the first program (for example, a special symbol display output program or the like) for emitting light by a pattern (for example, a light emitting pattern for displaying a special figure or a normal figure) and the plurality of light emitting bodies constituting the second light emitting means . , A second program (for example, a combination combination ratio display output program) for emitting light by a light emission pattern (for example, a light emission pattern for displaying a combination or a combination ratio) determined for a number of game values different from the progress of the game. Etc.), the second program is configured to be executed after the execution of the first program, and the first program is executed by the time the second program is executed after the first program . A specific program that is at least one of a program that determines a light emitting pattern that causes the first light emitting means to emit light and a program that determines a light emitting pattern that causes the second light emitting means to emit light in the second program (for example, It is a gaming machine characterized in that a game control program, a combination combination ratio calculation program, etc.) is not executed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a display defect of the light emitting means.

The game machine of means A2
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.).
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second starting winning slot, a special variable winning ball device 7 serving as a large winning slot, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning slot, and a general winning area. It is a gaming machine in which a game value (for example, a game ball, a medal, etc.) is paid out by winning a prize in the general winning openings 50A to 50D, displaying a predetermined symbol combination on an effective line, etc., and controls the game. An information display means (for example, a display monitor) provided on a main board (for example, a main board 11, a main board of a slot machine, etc.) and capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, a combination, a combination ratio, etc.) regarding the game value to be paid out. 29, a slot machine display monitor), the information display means mainly from a gap between the game machine frame 3 and the outer frame when the game machine frame 3 shown in FIG. 69 is opened. It is characterized in that it is arranged so as to be easily visible from the direction (direction facing the substrate 11).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made by displaying the information on the game value to be paid out. In addition, the predetermined information can be easily visually recognized.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A2 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.).
The arrangement so that it can be easily seen from the oblique direction is such that the door frame (for example, the game machine frame 3, the slot machine door frame, etc.) to which the main board (for example, the main board 11, the slot machine main board, etc.) is attached is arranged. ) Is opened, the information display device (for example, display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.) is connected to the open portion of the door frame (for example, the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame 3A shown in FIG. 69 ) . It is arranged so that it faces the front side when viewed from the opening part between the doors and the opening part between the door frame and the outer frame of the slot machine.
According to the above configuration, the information displayed on the information display device can be easily confirmed.

The game machine of means A4
A gaming machine of means A2 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.).
The arrangement that makes it easy to see from the diagonal direction is such that the main board (for example, the main board 11, the main board of the slot machine, etc.) provided on the door frame (for example, the frame 3 for the game machine, the door frame of the slot machine, etc.) ) (For example, the base member 129B erected on the main board 11 shown in FIG. 70 (A) , the base member erected on the main board of the slot machine, etc.) of the door frame. Arrangement in which the surface on the opening portion (for example, the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame, the opening portion between the door frame and the outer frame of the slot machine, etc.) faces the opening portion of the door frame. Is.
According to the above configuration, the information displayed on the information display device can be easily confirmed.

The game machine of means A5
A gaming machine of means A2 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.).
The display device is configured to include a plurality of display units (for example, first display monitors 130D1 to fourth display monitors 130D4 shown in FIG. 71A, first base member to fourth base member of a slot machine). The arrangement is such that when the door frame is opened, each of the plurality of display units is provided with the open portion of the door frame (for example, the game machine frame 3 and the outer frame). It is arranged so that it faces the front when viewed from the opening part between the doors and the opening part between the door frame and the outer frame of the slot machine.
According to the above configuration, the information displayed on the information display device can be easily confirmed.

The game machine of means A6
Any gaming machine selected from means A2 to A5 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.).
The information display device (for example, a display monitor 29, a slot machine display monitor, etc.) can adjust the installation angle of the door frame with respect to the open portion when the door frame is opened (for example, the game machine frame 3 and the outside). It is said to be an adjustment means that makes it possible to adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the frame and the frame.
According to the above configuration, it can be adjusted according to the playground to be installed.

The game machine of means A7
Any gaming machine selected from means A2 to A6 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.).
After canceling the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65 ), a predetermined time (for example, the measurement time t measured by the measurement timer in the display restriction confirmation process of FIG. 63 , etc.) ) Has elapsed, and then the predetermined information (for example, combination, combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The game machine of means A8
Any gaming machine selected from means A2 to A7 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.) switches a plurality of the predetermined information (for example, combination, combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.) at predetermined periods (for example, 30 seconds). It can be displayed.
According to the above configuration, the increase of members can be suppressed.

The game machine of means A9
Any gaming machine selected from means A2 to A8 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.) has a predetermined unit (for example, 60,000 prize balls) as the predetermined information (for example, combination, combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.). Display information for each.
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The game machine of means A10
Any gaming machine selected from means A2 to A9 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.) provides information for each predetermined unit (for example, short-term combination, etc.) as the predetermined information (for example, combination, combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.). Short-term role ratio) and cumulative information (for example, cumulative role ream, cumulative role ratio) are switched and displayed.
According to the above configuration, the information for each predetermined unit and the cumulative information can be compared.

The game machine of means A11
Any gaming machine selected from means A2 to A10 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.) is provided with the main board (for example, main board 11, slot machine main board, etc.) and crimped board case (for example, board case). It is housed in 201,202).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B1 to means B9 shown below.

The game machine of means B1
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
During a specific period (1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning) after the game medium enters the general winning area, the predetermined conditions (effective starting winning and reach to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). It is provided with an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (pre-reading notice effect), specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect)) when the state is established. It is a characteristic gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 47th production form to the 49th production form).
According to this, it is possible to make an interest in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and the specific effect is performed after the game medium enters the general winning area. It can enhance the interest until it is executed.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
Execution of notification effect for executing notification effect (any of characters A to C appears immediately after winning a prize in the general winning opening) so as to be able to identify the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area. It is a gaming machine characterized by further providing means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as a notification effect for notifying that the state after the game medium has entered, the player determines whether or not a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. It includes both an effect that is difficult to grasp and an effect that allows the player to easily grasp whether or not a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect of outputting a sound effect for a relatively short period (for example, about 0.5 to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general prize area, and as the latter effect, there is a general prize area. There is an effect that the character is continuously displayed on the image display device from immediately after the game medium enters until a predetermined specific period (for example, 1 minute) elapses.

The game machine of means B3
It is a game machine of means B2,
The notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the specific period is specified (the specific period (character display period) differs depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game until the specific production is executed.

The game machine of means B4
A game machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period differs depending on the mode of the notification effect (the display period when the character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when the character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display when the character C appears. The period will be 5 minutes)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to the means B4 may be as follows, for example.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of predetermined specific periods (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes). One of the specific periods is selected, an effect mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed on the image display device 5) is determined based on the selected specific period, and a notification effect (character is displayed for a specific period) is determined according to the determined effect mode. Execute the effect to be displayed).
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, the display of character A) is set as compared with the case where the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio. In addition, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, display of character B) is set as compared with the case where the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio.
When the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond to one-to-one (1 minute for character A, 2 minutes for character B, and 3 minutes for character C). ), The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) determines one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes based on the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. , It is preferable to execute the notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) according to the determined effect mode.

The game machine of means B5
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
The variable display means has a starting condition based on the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area (a game ball wins a prize in the first starting winning opening when the first reserved memory number does not reach the upper limit value (effective starting winning). ), And the game ball won the second start winning opening (valid start winning) when the second reserved memory number did not reach the upper limit), and then the start condition (controlled to the jackpot game state) The variable display is executed based on the fact that the variable display of the special figure game is not executed).
The effect executing means corresponds to a notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (in the start prize memory display area 5H, the variable display game to be notified is supported. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form) characterized in that the holding change effect of changing the display portion from the normal mode to the special mode is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, the game medium enters the general prize area by creating a hobby of notifying the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general prize area. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the beginning to the execution of the specific production.

The game machine of means B6
It is a game machine of means B5,
Hold information corresponding to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the existence of the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. It is further provided with a hold information display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying the display portion) on the display device (image display device 5).
The advance notice effect is to announce the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the mode of the hold information (if the start winning determination result designation command is a command to specify "big hit", the notice effect is applicable. The display part corresponding to the command is changed from a normal mode (for example, blue or red) to a special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command for designating "off"). It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B7
It is a game machine of means B6,
By displaying the objects (characters A to C) on the display device, the effect executing means identifiablely notifies that the state is after the game medium has entered the general winning area (to the general winning opening). (Any of characters A to C will appear immediately after winning the prize)
The advance notice effect is an effect that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information (the mode of the display portion corresponding to the special figure game in which the displayed character performs some action and is held. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an effect of changing from a normal mode to a special mode).
According to this, it is possible to suggest the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the advance notice of the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied by a common object, and the game to the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific production.
Specifically, the player can recognize that the object changes the mode of the hold information by making the effect that the mode of the hold information changes according to the change of the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action). Become.

The game machine of means B8
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period (the specific effect F and the specific effect G are not executed if the predetermined condition is not satisfied within the character display period). is there.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period.

The game machine of means B9
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8.
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D).
The specific period differs depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B is won, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning is specified. It can be a period (characters A to C can appear), but if you win the 3rd general prize 50C or the 4th general prize opening 50D, only 5 minutes from the general prize can be a specific period (only character C can appear). It is a gaming machine characterized by being able to appear)).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B10 to means B21 shown below.

The game machine of means B10
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
Motion detection means (operation button 30 and production control CPU 120) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
When the player's movements (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) are detected by the motion detection means after the game medium has entered the general winning area, a specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-ream) is detected. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 50th production form to the 53rd production form) characterized by being provided with an effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a notice effect and a chance eye advance notice effect. ..
According to this, after the game medium enters the general prize area, the specific effect is executed triggered by the action of the player, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B11
It is a game machine of means B10,
The state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is identifiablely notified (in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode, the button icon 4000 is increased for each prize in the general winning opening, 52nd In the production form and the 53rd production form, the advance notice production ("cut-in", "pseudo-ream", "chance eye") that can be executed for each prize in the general winning opening is determined, and the character 4000a according to the determination result is determined. The gaming machine is further provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a notification effect (displaying up to 4000c).
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12
It is a game machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of operation (continuous striking operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling the specific effect, the mode of the notification effect (character 4000a of "cut-in", "pseudo-ream") It is a game machine characterized in that the characters 4000b and the characters 4000c of "chance eyes" are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of operation enables the specific effect to be executed.

The gaming machine of means B13
A gaming machine of means B11 or means B12.
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general prize area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general prize opening 50A of the left game area 10A or When the second general winning opening 50B is won, the notification is given at a higher rate than when the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D in the right game area 10B is won). It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The game machine of means B14
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B13.
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The mode of the notification effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B is won. In this case, either the character 4000a of "cut-in" or the character 4000b of "pseudo-ream" can be displayed, and when the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D is won, " It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can display either the character 4000a of "cut-in" or the character 4000c of "chance eye").
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The game machine of means B15
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B14.
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the general winning opening is won in the normal state. In the case (when the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B of the left game area 10A is won), when the general winning opening is won in the probabilistic state or the time saving state (the first of the right game area 10B). 3 General winning opening 50C or 4th general winning opening 50D) will be notified at a higher rate than
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The game machine of means B16
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B15.
The mode of the notification effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, in the normal state, the characters 4000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo". The character 4000b of "ream" can be displayed, and the character 4000a of "cut-in" and the character 4000c of "chance eye" can be displayed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state.)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B17
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B16.
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect when the predetermined operation is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (generally in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode). Pseudo continuous notice production can be executed when the winning opening is won twice or more, and chance eye notice production can be executed when the general winning opening is won three times or more)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B18
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B17.
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The execution rate of the specific effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B is used. If a prize is won, the advance notice effect will be executed at a higher rate than when the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D is won.)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The game machine of means B19
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B18.
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The type of specific effect that can be executed differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening). If you win 50B, you can execute either the cut-in notice effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and if you win the 3rd general winning opening 50C or the 4th general winning opening 50D, the cut-in notice effect And any of the chance eye notice effects can be executed)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B19.
The execution rate of the specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, when the general winning opening is won in the normal state ( When the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B of the left game area 10A is won), when the general winning opening is won in the probabilistic state or the time saving state (the third general of the right game area 10B). (When a prize is won in the winning opening 50C or the 4th general winning opening 50D), a notification is given to enable the specific effect to be executed at a higher rate than the winning opening 50C).
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B21
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B20.
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st and 53rd effects forms, the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-ream in the normal state). Either of the notice effects can be executed, and either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state).
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B22 to B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point-giving effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect).
When the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or is determined to be executed), the general winning area When the game medium enters the machine and when the variable display is not executed (during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, it is also decided that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is executed. Pachinko machines (27th to 30th production forms) characterized in that the ratio of execution of the specific effect is different from that when the game medium enters the general winning area (within the period during which the game is not played). It is a game machine 1).
According to this, the execution ratio of the specific effect differs between the case where the variable display is executed and the case where the variable display is not executed, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area is enhanced. Can be done.

The game machine of means B23
It is a game machine of means B22,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point-giving effect) in a gaming machine (27th effect form, 29th effect form pachinko gaming machine 1). is there.
According to this, even when the variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24
It is a game machine of means B22,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect), and the general winning area when the variable display is not executed. This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 28th effect mode and the 30th effect form), which is characterized in that it is not executed when the game medium enters the machine.
According to this, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B25
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point-giving effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect).
When the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or is determined to be executed), the general winning area When the game medium enters the machine and when the variable display is not executed (during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, it is also decided that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is executed. A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 31st effect mode and the 32nd effect form) characterized in that a different specific effect is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (within a period not specified). ).
According to this, different specific effects differ depending on whether the variable display is executed and the variable display is not executed, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be enhanced. ..

The gaming machine of means B26
Means B25 game machine
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
When the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect). Is executed as the specific effect,
When the game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is not executed, an effect (specific effect C: point-giving effect) not related to the display result of the variable display is executed as the specific effect. It is a characteristic gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form).
According to this, when the variable display is executed, the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be further enhanced, and even when the variable display is not executed, the general winning area can be further enhanced. It is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the game.

The gaming machine of means B27
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B26 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form).
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed (for example, a special figure game when winning a prize in the general winning opening). The classification of whether or not is executed, the classification of the number of reserved memories at the time of winning the general winning opening, and the gaming state at the time of winning the general winning opening is the normal state, or the probabilistic state or the time saving state. Perform specific effects at different rates depending on the classification, etc.)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it becomes possible to be interested in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B28
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B27 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form).
When the variable display is executed, different specific effects are executed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (for example, the special figure game is executed when the general winning opening is won. Whether or not the game is in the normal state, the number of stored memories at the time of winning the general winning opening, and whether the gaming state at the time of winning the general winning opening is the normal state, the probabilistic state or the time saving state Execute different types of specific effects according to the classification, etc.)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it becomes possible to be interested in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to means B29 to B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (Fig. 33), a winning rate for a starting winning opening in a game machine is calculated, and a character wearing different color clothes is used according to the calculated winning rate. A game machine that executes an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to display information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information more visible. The invention according to the means B29 to the means B39 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is to make it easy to visually recognize information on the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B29
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an entry area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Equipped with a display means (image display device 5)
The information display means displays effect information (for example, a decorative symbol, a fourth symbol, etc.) different from the approach information in an area where the visibility of the approach information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. 42, each winning opening). It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in a second area β), which is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B30
It is a game machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the approach information regardless of the mode of the effect information (as illustrated in FIG. 42, regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed, and the fourth symbol. Regardless of whether or not is variablely displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. The displayed number of prizes can be updated according to the prizes in each prize opening.)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized regardless of the mode of the effect information.

The invention according to means B31
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an entry area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Error detecting means (abnormality detecting sensor group 26) for detecting an error (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.) and
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) A display means (image display device 5) is provided.
The information display means sends error information (for example, an error message) for notifying the occurrence of the error to each winning opening as illustrated in FIGS. 42 and 43 in an area where the visibility of the entry information is not hindered. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the number of winnings is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B32
It is a game machine of means B31.
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as illustrated in FIG. 43, regardless of whether or not an error message is displayed, a general winning opening. The number of winnings in, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and are displayed according to the winnings in each winning opening. The number of winning prizes can be updated)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means B33
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an entry area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Equipped with a display means (image display device 5)
The information display means displays the display result of the variable display (for example, the display result of the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) or the fourth symbol) executed based on the entry of the game medium into the start region, and the entry information. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is displayed in an area (as illustrated in FIG. 42, a second area β different from the first area α in which the number of winnings to each winning opening is displayed). Is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B34
It is a game machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the approach information even when the variable display is being executed (as illustrated in FIG. 42, regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and also. Regardless of whether or not the 4th symbol is variably displayed, the number of prizes to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the 1st starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the 2nd starting winning opening, etc. are set to the 1st area α. It is possible to display and update the displayed number of prizes according to the prizes in each prize opening.)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the variable display is being executed.

The invention according to means B35
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B34.
Operable operating means (operation button 30) and
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the entry information on the information display means according to the operation of the operation means (as illustrated in FIG. 5, to each winning opening based on the setting by the operation button 30). The gaming machine is further provided with an effect control CPU 120) that sets whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the approach information.

The invention according to means B36
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B35.
Operation means (operation button 30) that can be operated by the player,
The aggregation period setting means (as illustrated in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 that sets the aggregation period based on the setting by the operation button 30) that sets the aggregation period of the entry information according to the operation of the operation means. It is a game machine characterized by further providing.
According to this, the aggregation period can be set according to the judgment of the player.

The invention according to means B37
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B36.
Further equipped with a game state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) capable of controlling a game state (big hit game state, probability change state, time saving state, low base state, high base state, etc.).
The information display means can display the approach information according to the game state (as illustrated in FIG. 45, the number of prizes in the low base state and the number of prizes in the high base state can be displayed separately. Is)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the approach information according to the game state.

The invention according to means B38
It is a game machine of means B37,
Variable display means for executing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the game medium entering the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B) is further provided.
The game state control means has a low frequency state (a low base state in which the high opening control for the second start winning opening is not executed) and a high frequency state (the first) in which the frequency at which the game medium enters the start area is different. 2 It is possible to control to the high base state where the high opening control for the starting winning opening is executed).
The information display means includes the entry information (such as the number of general prizes in the low base state exemplified in FIG. 45) regarding the period controlled to the low frequency state and the entry regarding the period controlled to the high frequency state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can display information (general winning numbers in a high base state illustrated in FIG. 45, etc.).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the approach information according to the low frequency state and the approach information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means B39
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B38.
Notify when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as illustrated in FIG. 46, when the number of winnings per set aggregation period does not reach a predetermined reference value, that fact is notified. The gaming machine is further provided with a notification means (image display device 5) for displaying a message.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the approach information satisfies the predetermined condition.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B40 and the means B41 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIGS. 32 and 33), when a player accepts a game start by inputting a password, the winning rate to the starting winning opening in the game machine is calculated. , A game machine that executes an effect display that displays characters dressed in different colors according to the calculated winning rate has been proposed. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at the game hall) to confirm the information regarding the fact that the game medium has entered the entry area such as the start winning opening. The invention according to the means B40 and the means B41 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is intended to allow only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk of the game hall) to confirm the information.

The invention according to means B40 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having an entry area (for example, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter. Game machine 1)
A granting means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) for imparting a game value (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the approach area.
Specific operation means (for example, mode changeover switch 31, reset button) that cannot be operated by the player, and
Notifying means for notifying cumulative value information (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening, the number of payouts of each starting winning opening, and the total number of payouts) regarding the cumulative value of the game value given by the granting means (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening shown in FIG. For example, an image display device 5) is provided.
The notification means notifies the cumulative value information based on the operation of the specific operation means (for example, when the mode changeover switch 31 is operated to enter the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed as an image display device. Displayed in 5)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at the game hall) can confirm the information.

The "specific operation means that cannot be operated by the player" may be, for example, a means that can be operated by a clerk at the game hall or an inspector / inspector of the game machine.

The invention according to means B41
Means B40 game machine
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for executing an effect related to a game is provided.
The notification means notifies the cumulative value information according to the mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means (for example, a character appearing during the advance notice effect or the reach effect provides information on the winning number management table. (Displays aloud and outputs voice)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of game machine information is from the mode of notification.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B42 to B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters the ordinary winning opening (general winning area), the number of entered balls is counted up and displayed on the effect display device. , A gaming machine has been proposed in which when the number of counts being counted up reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory villa will occur. In the game machine shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-733187, when a game ball enters a normal winning opening, the number of balls entered is uniformly counted up and displayed one by one. Therefore, in a game machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. The inventions according to the means B42 to the means B51 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to enhance the interest of a game in a game machine having a general winning area.

The game machine of means B42
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect (specific effect D that gradually increases the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages) that changes the effect mode stepwise according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. A specific effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed is provided.
The specific according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, etc.). The rate at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the rate at which the effect of increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 by one step is executed is different).
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 33rd production form to the 37th production form).
According to this, the rate at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be done.

The game machine of means B43
It is a game machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 5) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to a variable pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120). To do
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). , A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which the production mode changes in the specific production is different (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 34th production form).
According to this, the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced by changing the rate of change of the effect mode in the specific effect according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general prize area.

In the game machine of means B43
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). ) And the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs. You may. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is displayed. Correspondingly, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect may be different (for example, it changes at a high rate when it becomes a big hit symbol, and changes at a lower rate when it becomes an out-of-order symbol). ..

The game machine of means B44
A game machine of means B42 or means B43.
The variable display means (image display device 5) ends the start condition (variable display based on the previous start prize) after the game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit game state. ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect). It is further provided with a notice effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) to be executed before (before).
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). A game machine characterized in that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed (35th effect form pachinko game machine). 1).
According to this, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the game machine of means B44
The period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command). According to the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed) and the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect, the effect is produced in the specific effect. The rate at which the mode changes may be different. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that is the target of the notice effect is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range. In the case of within (for example, 2 times or less), the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (high in the case of a big hit symbol). It may change at a rate, and if it becomes an outlier, it may change at a lower rate).

The game machine of means B45
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B44.
Further provided with a reach effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol).
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), and after the execution of the reach effect. The rate at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general prize area (when the game ball wins the general prize opening after the reach state is established due to the reach fluctuation). It is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 36th production form).
According to this, the production mode changes in the specific production depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect or the game medium enters the general winning area after the execution of the reach effect. By having different ratios, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The game machine of means B46
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B45.
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D), and has
Depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C, the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D) It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 37th production form) characterized in that the rate of change in the production mode is different in the specific production (depending on the case where the game ball wins in any of the above).
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production by changing the rate at which the production mode changes in the specific production according to the general winning area in which the game medium has entered.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect (specific effect D that gradually increases the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages) that changes the effect mode stepwise according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. A specific effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed is provided.
The specific according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, etc.). In the production, the stages in which the production mode changes are different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling region 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is different).
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 38th production form to the 42nd production form).
According to this, the stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B48
It is a game machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 5) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to a variable pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120). To do
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). , A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 39th production form), characterized in that the stages in which the production mode changes in the specific production are different.
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

In the game machine of means B48
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). ) And the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. You may. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is displayed. Depending on the specific effect, the stage in which the effect mode changes is different (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol, the number of stages changes, and in the case of an out-of-order symbol, the number of stages changes less than that). good.

The game machine of means B49
A gaming machine of means B47 or means B48.
The variable display means (image display device 5) ends the start condition (variable display based on the previous start prize) after the game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit game state. ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect). It is further provided with a notice effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) to be executed before (before).
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). A gaming machine characterized in that the stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed (the pachinko game machine of the 40th effect form). 1).
According to this, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the game machine of means B49
The period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command). According to the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed) and the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect, the effect is produced in the specific effect. The stage at which the mode changes may be different. Specifically, when the game medium enters the general winning area, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that is the target of the notice effect is executed is within a predetermined range. In the case of being within (for example, twice or less), the stage at which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice production (for example, when it becomes a big hit symbol). The number of steps may change, and if the symbol is out of order, the number of steps may change less than that.)

The game machine of means B50
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B49.
Further provided with a reach effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol).
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), and after the execution of the reach effect. The stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general prize area (when the game ball wins the general prize opening after the reach state is established due to the reach fluctuation). This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 41st production form).
According to this, the production mode changes in the specific production depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect or the game medium enters the general winning area after the execution of the reach effect. By different stages, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B51
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B50.
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D), and has
Depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C, the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D) It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 42nd production form) characterized in that the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production is different depending on whether the game ball wins a prize in any of the above.
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B52 to B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters the ordinary winning opening (general winning area), the number of entered balls is counted up and displayed on the effect display device. , A gaming machine has been proposed in which when the number of counts being counted up reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory villa will occur. In the game machine shown in Patent Document 1, the effect (count-up display) is executed every time the game ball enters the normal winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, if the game medium does not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to grasp this, but this is not considered in the prior art. The inventions according to the means B52 to the means B56 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to make it possible to grasp that the game medium does not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
When the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in 10 minutes when it is detected that the game is being played is 0, or when the game is played. When the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than 3 in 30 minutes when it is detected to be inside, a specific effect (an image imitating the form of the general winning opening and "There is no general winning"" The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying a notification image 2200 or the like including characters on an image display device 5.
According to this, it becomes possible for the player and the game field to grasp that the number of the game media entering the general winning area is less than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53
It is a game machine of means B52,
Setting means for setting whether or not to allow the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means (whether or not to execute the specific effect E is determined based on the game hall setting and the player setting in the display setting table. Control CPU 120) and
It is further equipped with a clerk operation reception means (display changeover switch 32) that accepts setting operations by the clerk.
The setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the clerk operation reception means (specific effect E (notifies that there is no general prize) based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32. ， Notify that the number of general prizes is small)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the amusement park regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53.
A storage means (a winning number counter area formed in the RAM 122) for storing the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings for 30 minutes) is further provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of entries stored in the storage means is not retained at the time of power failure (the value in the winning number counter area is erased by power failure).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control load for holding the memory of the number of intrusions at the time of power failure.

The game machine of means B55
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B54.
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the state of the game machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed at a different rate depending on the case of the normal state and the case of the probability variation state or the time saving state).
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The game machine of means B56
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B55.
Different specific effects are executed according to the state of the game machine (for example, the specific effects E are executed in different modes depending on the normal state and the probabilistic state or the time saving state).
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B57 to B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 83), the number of prize balls (added value) obtained by the game medium entering the big winning opening during the execution of the big hit game, There has been proposed a game machine that executes an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (added value) obtained by entering the game medium into the normal winning opening (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intentions of the game hall and the player are not reflected with respect to whether or not to execute the effect when the game medium enters the general winning area. The inventions relating to the means B57 to the means B64 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player regarding whether or not to execute the effect when the game medium enters the general winning area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The game machine of means B57
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (displays information on the winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode switching switch 31 by setting the display switching switch 32 and operating the operation button 30 Based on the settings, the object is increased each time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed, specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead Notification means (image display device 5) capable of executing a notice effect) and
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising setting means (mode changeover switch 31, display changeover switch 32, and operation button 30) for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means. ..
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58
It is a game machine of means B57,
Further equipped with a clerk operation receiving means (mode changeover switch 31, display changeover switch 32) for accepting setting operations by the clerk.
The setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the clerk operation receiving means (based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31 in the maintenance mode, the winning number management table). The object is increased every time the game ball enters the general winning opening based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed, and the specific effect A : Variable result advance notice effect can be executed, Specific effect B: Look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the amusement park regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The game machine of means B59 is
A gaming machine of means B57 or means B58.
Further equipped with a player operation receiving means for accepting setting operations by the player,
The setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the player operation receiving means (general winning opening based on the setting by the operation button 30 displayed on the demo screen). Increases the number of objects each time the game ball enters the game, displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state based on the setting by the operation button 30 while the demo screen is displayed, Specific effect A: Fluctuation result notice effect Specific effect B: Pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The game machine of means B60
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B59.
The specific effect identifiablely notifies the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area during a predetermined period (the period controlled by the big hit gaming state) (the number of winning balls to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls). The number of prize balls according to the above, the number of prize balls to the general winning opening, and the number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls are displayed separately).
According to this, it is possible to improve the playability in a predetermined period.

The game machine of means B61
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B60.
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form) when the number of the game media entering the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a featured game machine.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B61.
The specific effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that different specific effects are executed according to the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area (the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form are executed). Is.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B63
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B62.
The specific effect is an effect that identifiablely notifies the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the object is increased each time the game ball enters the general winning opening).
When the game is not performed on the game machine (the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received for a predetermined period. The effect control CPU 120) that determines the end of the game based on the fact that the game has not been completed), and notifies that the number of the game media entering the general winning area is 0 in the specific effect (the end of the game is determined). In that case, all the objects corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 5 are deleted.)
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B64 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B63.
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that display information (an object corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening) corresponding to the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area is displayed.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B65 to means B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 59), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the start memory display changes and the start memory is displayed. A game machine has been proposed that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is "hit" or "missing". In a game machine having such a general winning opening, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game ball wins in the general winning opening. The invention according to the means B65 to the means B77 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to enhance the interest of a game in a game machine having a general winning opening.

The game machine of means B65
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result advance notice effect) is provided.
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state). , The ratio of executing the specific effect is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher ratio than in the probability variation or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first production form to the fourth production form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B66
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is provided with a specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect).
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state). , Execute a different specific effect (execute specific effect A in the normal state, and execute specific effect B in the probability change or time saving state)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth production form to the twelfth production form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B67
A gaming machine of means B65 or means B66 (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form 1).
In the first gaming state (normal state), when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area becomes the first number of entries, the specific effect is executed.
In the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state), the specific effect is executed when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area is a second entry number different from the first entry number. It is a game machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B68 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result advance notice effect) is provided.
The above-mentioned when the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established) and during the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established). The ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area (after the reach fluctuation state is established, it is specified at a higher ratio than before the reach state is established or during a period other than the reach fluctuation. The production is executed)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the thirteenth production form to the sixteenth production form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 1)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 4A, 2nd special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is provided with a specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect).
The above when the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established) and during the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established). A different specific effect is executed depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area (specific effect A is executed after the reach state is established, and specific effect B is executed before the reach state is established. After the reach variation state is established, Execute specific effect A, and execute specific effect B during a period other than reach fluctuation or before the reach state of reach fluctuation is established)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 17th production form to the 24th production form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B70
A gaming machine of means B68 or means B69 (pachinko gaming machines 1 of the 14th effect form to the 16th effect form and the 22nd effect form to the 24th effect form).
During the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), the specific effect is executed when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area becomes the first number of entries.
During the second period (a period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area is the number of second entries different from the number of first entries. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed in some cases.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B70 (second effect form, sixth effect form, tenth effect form to twelfth effect form, 14th effect form, 18th effect form, 22nd effect form). Pachinko game machine 1)
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D), and has
It is a game machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a game medium enters each of a plurality of the general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The game machine of means B72 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B65 to means B71 (pachinko gaming machines 1 in the 5th to 12th effects and the 17th to 24th effects).
The variable display means has started conditions (variable display based on the previous start winning prize has been completed and a jackpot game state) after the game medium has entered the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that it is not controlled.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can control the advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. )When,
Pre-start determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the start condition is satisfied (control to the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning). Further equipped with a game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not to play.
The specific effect executing means is
Based on the pre-start determination, the effect of notifying that the advantageous state is controlled (pre-reading advance notice effect) is performed by the specific effect (specific effect B) before the start condition of the variable display to be targeted is satisfied. It is a game machine characterized by executing as.
According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect more interesting by notifying that the variable display start condition is controlled in an advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied.

The game machine of means B73 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B72 (pachinko gaming machines 1 in the first to 24th effects).
The variable display means has started conditions (variable display based on the previous start winning prize has been completed and a jackpot game state) after the game medium has entered the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that it is not controlled.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can control the advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. )When,
When the start condition is satisfied, the start time determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for jackpot determination stored when the variable display of the special symbol is started). A game control microcomputer 100) that determines whether or not to control the jackpot game state based on a random number is further provided.
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that an effect (variation result advance notice effect) for notifying control of the advantageous state is executed as the specific effect based on the start time determination.
According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect more interesting by foretelling that the control is performed in an advantageous state.

The game machine of means B74 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B73 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the third effect form and the fifteenth effect form).
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the execution rate of the specific effect varies depending on the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning in the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B75
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B74 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 11th effect form and the 23rd effect form).
The gaming machine is characterized in that different specific effects are executed according to the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning in the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B76
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B75 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 4th effect form, the 8th effect form, the 12th effect form, the 16th effect form, the 20th effect form, and the 24th effect form). And
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D), and has
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order of entry of the game media into the plurality of general winning areas in a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the order of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B77 is
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B76 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 4th effect form, the 8th effect form, the 12th effect form, the 16th effect form, the 20th effect form, and the 24th effect form). And
It has other winning areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning area.
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order in which the game medium enters the general winning area and the game medium enters the other winning area in a specific order. ..
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the order of entry of the game medium into the general winning area and other winning areas.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. (A) It is a figure which shows the prize number information managed by the prize number management table, and (b) is a figure which shows the prize number information managed by a display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the playground setting and the player setting. It is explanatory drawing when the display setting is performed by the operation button which a player can operate. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the object corresponding to the prize in the general prize opening. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the number of winnings to a general winning opening in a jackpot game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each effect executed according to the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 1st effect form to the 4th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 5th effect form to the 8th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 9th effect form to the 12th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 13th effect form to the 16th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 17th effect form to the 20th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st effect form to the 24th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form. It is a figure which shows the prize number information managed by the prize number management table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the point giving effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 27th effect form to the 30th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the gauge update effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 33rd effect form to the 36th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 37th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 38th effect form to the 41st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 42nd production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the non-winning notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form. It is a figure which shows the appearance ratio of the characters A to C in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is a figure which shows the display period of the characters A to C in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation result notice effect in the 48th effect form. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each effect in the 47th effect form and the 48th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuous hit operation notification and the cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and pseudo-continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and pseudo-continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the all symbol stop operation notification and the chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the all symbol stop operation notification and the chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each advance notice effect for every general winning opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production information in the setting which displays the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode of an error message. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production information in the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the item example of the winning number information that can be displayed in the 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of the aggregation period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information, and the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information, and the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is a block diagram which shows in more detail various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of the storage area in the RAM of a main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the CPU in the main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the built-in ROM area in a CPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. It is a table which shows the call instruction used in the built-in ROM area. It is a figure which shows the other configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the first interrupt processing, (B) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the second interrupt processing, and (C) is a processing procedure of the third interrupt processing. Is a diagram conceptually showing. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the combination / role ratio related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the combination / combination display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of display restriction confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of display switching control processing. It is a table which shows the type of an error in a game machine. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor or the like, and (B) is the signal flow and the monitor when the first interrupt process is executed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship with the display state such as. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of each LED of the display part in a display monitor. It is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the 1st display monitor arrangement mode. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the frame for a game machine to which a main board is attached is opened from the outer frame. (A) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a second display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a third display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a fourth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a fifth display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. It is a front view of the game machine provided with the blade type variable winning ball device. It is a front view of the variable winning ball device provided in the game board as seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of characters acquired by a character, and the number of balls acquired by a continuous character. (A) to (D) are front views which simplified the modification of the main board.

As described above, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area has an effect on the game as compared with the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the game medium enters. Is low. Further, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player, and the game medium enters the specific winning area where the game medium can enter in this advantageous state. Compared to the approach, the interest of the player is low, and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Under such circumstances, the game nails may be maintained on the game hall side so that it is substantially difficult for the game medium to enter the general winning area.

However, on the game machine maker side, it is usual to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, it is desirable that the game field side should be in a maintenance state of the game nails so that the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. It is necessary to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and to make the player aware of the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

Therefore, in a game machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. In the game machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the game machine having the general winning area.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 3a formed in a frame shape which is provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. The game machine frame 3 is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism. This outer frame is fixed to a so-called game island where a plurality of pachinko game machines are arranged side by side. By opening the game machine frame 3 with respect to the outer frame, a clerk or the like can visually recognize the back side of the game machine frame 3 and the inside of the game island.

The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area 10 surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched into the game area 10 from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area 10. Further, the game area 10 is composed of a left game area 10A and a right game area 10B. The game area 10 is an area through which a game ball can pass in the game board 2, and the left side is the left game area 10A and the right side is the right game area 10B with reference to the center of the game area 10.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area 10 in the example shown in FIG. 1). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and is identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Not limited. In the following, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". .. The number of special symbol display devices may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game are supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a variable display unit divided into three, for example, a decorative symbol that is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified by each is variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, "left" corresponds to the start of either the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , "Middle", and "Right", each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts to change the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5 are displayed. , The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. The derivation display of the display result means that the identification information such as the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) to end the variable display.

In the image display device 5, as display areas for each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, three areas may be provided so as to be bonded or separated, or to be bonded and separated. .. The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to execute the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the image display device 5 executes the effect display along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese numerals. There are numbers "1" to "8", English letters "A" to "H", eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters or symbols and a character image, and the like. Is composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure.) In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (designs composed of the characters "abrupt") and blank symbols (also referred to as "2R probable big hits") and blank symbols (also called "2R probable big hits") A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured.

During the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, from the one with the smallest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number, from top to bottom. A flowing scroll display is performed, and when the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the decorative symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, "1") is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number to display the symbol. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

At the lower right of the display screen of the image display device 5, fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B for displaying the fourth symbol following the decorative symbol, the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. The fourth symbol display area 5A for the second special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. A fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is provided.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variable display of the decorative symbol specifies the variable pattern on the effect control CPU 120 side. This is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the command.) When performing an effect using the image display device 5, for example, an effect in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. The mode of production has been diversified, such as the production of a moving object that shields all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 5, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, is the state of the fourth symbol currently being variably displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. Whether or not it can be reliably recognized. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always variably displayed by a constant operation and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 5A and the 2nd special for the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 5B for drawing may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

In the variable display (variable display) of the fourth symbol, the fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B are displayed in predetermined display colors (for example, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is white, and the second special symbol is the second. 4 The symbol display area 5B is black), and is realized by continuing a blinking state in which lighting (display) and extinguishing (non-display) are repeated at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol are synchronized. "Synchronization" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. Will remain. The display color may be different depending on the jackpot type. Further, when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the missed symbol. Will remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5A.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. Will remain. The display color may be different depending on the jackpot type. Further, when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the missed symbol. Will remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5B.

A start winning memory display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning prize storage display area 5H, a hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the number of holds (special figure hold memory) of the variable display is performed. Here, the hold of the variable display occurs when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B (starting winning). To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. Will be done.

As an example, the start prize memory display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start prize. There is. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening, the display is hidden. One of the display parts in the mode (transparent color) (for example, the display part at the left end of the display parts in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. Further, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening, the display is hidden. One of the display parts in the mode is changed to a red display. After that, when either the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure (first start condition) or the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure (second start condition) is satisfied, for example. The display at the leftmost display portion is removed, and the display at each display portion is moved to the left by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to the blue display or the red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display parts whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

That is, when a start winning is generated, the holding information (object shown in a circle in FIGS. 1 and 31 and the like) corresponding to the special figure game executed based on the starting winning is stored in the starting winning memory display area 5H. Display control that is newly displayed is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left according to the order in which the start conditions of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information are satisfied (in the above example, it is also the order in which the start conditions are satisfied). If a new start prize is generated while n hold information is displayed (when n special game games are held), the n + 1th hold information from the left corresponds to the new start prize. Will be newly displayed. Then, when the start condition of the reserved special figure game is satisfied, the leftmost reserved information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n ≧ 2) reserved information from the left is left one by one. It will be shifted to and displayed at the n-1st position.

The order in which the start conditions of the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions occur, and the start condition of the special figure game related to the second special figure is higher than the start condition of the special figure game related to the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 2 priority change). On the contrary, the start condition of the special figure game related to the first special figure is established with priority over the start condition of the special figure game related to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority change). You can do it.

In the start winning prize storage display area 5H, the player or the like may be able to recognize the number of special figure reserved memories by displaying a number indicating the number of special figure reserved memories. A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning prize memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning prize memory display area 5H. In the example shown in FIG. 1, in addition to the start winning prize storage display area 5H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display device 25A and a second hold display device 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A identifiablely displays the first hold storage number as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. The second hold indicator 25B can identifiablely display the number of second hold memory as the number of valid start winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B have, for example, the number (for example, 4) LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values (for example, "4") in each of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number, respectively. Is configured to include. Further, a movable accessory 1000 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The movable accessory 1000 has a built-in motor and lamp for operating the star-shaped member. The movable accessory 1000 is adapted to operate (rotate and light) when an effect of notifying a big hit, for example, a variation result advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect described later is executed.

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 27 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball does not enter or enters the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 27 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It becomes a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball enters the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 27 for the normal electric accessory is on. It becomes an easy expansion and opening state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ) If the following, the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ) If the following, the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 28 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the large winning opening door changes between an open state and a closed state. Form the mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening when the solenoid 28 for the large winning opening door is in the off state. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening when the solenoid 28 for the large winning opening door is on. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In this way, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state. Figure When the start condition for starting the game is not satisfied, the variable display is held. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first hold storage is stored. The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second hold storage is stored. The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1. The added value of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be the total reserved storage number or the special figure reserved storage number.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also called "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). The ordinary symbol display 20 variably displays a plurality of types of ordinary symbols composed of, for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". The ordinary symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", etc. as ordinary symbols, for example, "○" and "×". Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the indicated decorative lamps (or LEDs) or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left", "middle", and "right" in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gates 41A and 41B.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 50A to 50D that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. There is a winning area.

The general winning openings 50A to 50D are composed of ball receiving members projecting forward (player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above through the opening, and the horizontal length (width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are not connected in the horizontal direction and pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the distance between the ball receiving members provided with the general winning openings 50A to 50D is such that at least one game ball can pass through. In addition, a winning ball device for switching the opening and closing of the openings of the general winning openings 50A to 50D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the normal variable winning ball device 6B for switching the opening and closing of the second starting winning opening) is provided. It is always open. Further, even if the game ball wins in the general winning openings 50A to 50D, neither the start condition of the variable display of the special figure game nor the start condition of the variable display of the normal figure game is satisfied based on the winning.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the winning of the game balls in the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. With the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, a variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting winning opening, and a special variable for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening. Activating the winning ball device 7 to facilitate the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening or the large winning opening may be set as the specific value given by the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

Further, the specific value given to the player may be different depending on the general winning opening. For example, when the game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C, 5 One prize ball is given, but when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D, ten prize balls are given (that is, specific values of different sizes are given. It may be granted). Further, the specific value given when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is a predetermined number of winning balls, but the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening When the game ball wins the 50D, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 7 may be operated (that is, a specific value of a different type is given).

Further, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. For example, the winning ball may be executed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Is given, and when the variable winning ball device operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the type of specific value is different), different effects are executed. Is also good. In addition, there are cases where 10 prize balls are given according to the winning of the game balls to the general winning opening, and cases where 5 prize balls are given according to the winning of the game balls to the general winning opening. Different effects may be performed (that is, when the magnitude of the specific value is different).

As shown in FIG. 2, the winning of the game ball into the first general winning opening 50A, the second general winning opening 50B, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening 50D is the first general winning opening corresponding to each. It is detected by the mouth switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. When game balls are detected by the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls Is paid out as a prize ball.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the winning opening switches corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 50A to 50D are provided, the game ball wins the general winning openings in the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to detect not only what was done, but also which general winning opening the game ball won.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for each general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning opening provided in the left game area 10A has been won) is provided for the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B. , A common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that the general winning opening provided in the right game area 10B has been won) is provided for the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. You can do it. In addition, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that one of the general winning openings has been won) is provided for all the general winning openings of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. You may be able to do it.

At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings. The game ball taken into the out port is collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) connecting to the out port. The game balls that have won each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st to 4th general winning opening) are collected through a winning ball set gutter (not shown) and are balls. It is designed to be collected on the game island via the collection passage. An out-ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, a game ball that is driven into the game area 10 (a game ball that is guided to the out opening without winning any winning opening, and a winning ball set that wins in any winning opening. (Game balls collected in the gutter) Detects all game balls. Every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 12, so that the effect control CPU 120 totals the number of game balls driven into the game area 10, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. If the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the counter value increases by a certain number (for example, 10). The out number increase signal may be output to the substrate 12 so that the out number can be totaled in a fixed number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 120 side.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 3a, there is an upper plate 60 that holds (stores) the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. It is provided. For example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate 60 on the front side, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by pressing or the like is installed.

A keyhole 61 for a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the upper plate 60. By inserting the key corresponding to the keyhole 61 into the keyhole 61 and rotating the key in one direction, for example, counterclockwise, it is possible to open the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the game machine frame 3. Further, by inserting the key into the keyhole 61 and rotating the key in another direction, for example, clockwise, the gaming machine frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the outer frame. In the locking device, a spring is built in the keyhole 61, and when the key is inserted into the keyhole 61 and rotated counterclockwise or clockwise and then the key is released or pulled out, the direction in which the keyhole 61 is rotated is opposite. Turn in the direction and return to the neutral position. When the keyhole 61 is in the neutral position, the glass door frame 3a can be closed and locked with respect to the game machine frame 3, and the game machine frame 3 can be closed and locked with respect to the outer frame. Is possible. Further, by opening the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the game machine frame 3, maintenance of the game board (gauge board including game nails and winning openings) 2 (for example, measures to eliminate ball clogging). Alternatively, the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32, which will be described later, can be operated.

A lower plate 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 60 is provided directly below the upper plate 60, and a game ball as a game medium is directed toward the game area in the lower right of the upper plate 60. A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 63 operated by a player or the like for firing is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle 63 adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and can be rotated. The operation button 30 is not limited to one that can be pressed or rotated, and may be one that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. It may be operable, or it may be capable of pressing and tilting operations such as a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 30 may be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation button 30 is a push detection switch (not shown) for detecting the press of the operation button 30 and a rotary encoder (not shown) for detecting the rotation direction and the amount of rotation of the operation button (jog dial) 30. Detected by (not shown).

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 41A provided in the left game area 10A and the second passing gate 41B provided in the right game area 10B becomes the first passing gate 41A shown in FIG. The normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20, such as being detected by the corresponding first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B corresponding to the second passing gate 41B, is After the establishment, the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display 20 is started based on the establishment of the ordinary symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. To.

In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time, elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss". Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per normal", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilt position. However, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time elapses.

In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A, a game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. In the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started and the predetermined time that becomes the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol Derived display of the finalized special symbol (special symbol display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol (missing symbol) other than the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". ". The specific special symbol (big hit symbol) as the definite special symbol is different depending on the type of the jackpot. For example, the definite special symbol is different between the probable variable jackpot and the non-probable variable jackpot. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game (also simply referred to as a "round") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the jackpot game state in which the jackpot symbol is controlled after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 7 is a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number as the first period. By opening the large winning opening in the period until (for example, 9) winning balls are generated, a round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player. To. In this way, the opening / closing plate with the large winning opening open during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closes the large winning opening, thereby causing a special variable winning ball device. 7 is changed to a second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the jackpot state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the jackpot, is, for example, 15 times. It should be noted that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of executions of the round game may be provided.

After the jackpot state ends, as one of the advantageous states advantageous for the player, time reduction control is executed in which the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. It is controlled to a time saving state in which the time is shortened, or a probability changing state in which probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with time reduction control.

Here, the normal state is a normal state as a game state different from a specific state such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). The same control as (the state in which the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on) is performed. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when one of the conditions of the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result being a "big hit" is satisfied first. Then, just finish. In addition, in the probabilistic state, in the variable display of each special figure game and decorative symbol, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and is further controlled to the big hit game state is higher than in the normal state and the time saving state. improves. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" or a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of the special figure game is executed.

A jackpot (type) that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game state ends is also called a probabilistic jackpot. The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the time saving state without being controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot game state ends is also called a non-probability variation jackpot.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each normal symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per normal figure" compared to the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "per normal figure" The second start condition is to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to be longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the probability of being established. In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, which is advantageous for the player, is also called high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the big hit game state is more likely to occur than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probabilistic state or the time saving state. The state in which the high opening control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the high opening control is not executed is also called a low base state.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A , Of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started corresponding to the start of any special symbol game. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which fluctuations continue, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) are preliminarily used. When the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric characters of "7") that constitutes the specified jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped is displayed. In the symbol display area 5C, etc.), the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while forming all or part of the combination.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variable mode of the decorative pattern, a different production operation from before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a change in the display mode of the character image, a display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect display (or simply a reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) on the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are brought into the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the previous operation mode. As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And, in each reach mode, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are preset. Then, when the reach mode of super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result becomes "big hit" (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the reach mode of normal reach appears.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variable display mode of the symbol, a variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "pseudo-ream" and "slip" can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to the determination of the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Whether or not it is decided.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, the decoration is different from the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream" or "slip", for example, displaying an effect image such as a predetermined character image or a message image. Notify the player that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state or the variable display result may be a "big hit" due to an effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect may be executed.

When the special symbol that is the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and is predetermined. The fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination of is sometimes displayed as a stop. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "reachless loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

When the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach loss combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss". The fixed decoration symbol that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decoration symbol that is a reach loss combination are also collectively referred to as a fixed decoration symbol that is a loss combination (non-specific combination).

When the special symbol that is the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. Later, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, as for the fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5 is "1". Any one of the decorative symbols from "8" is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Anything is fine.

In addition, after the decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the look-ahead that announces and notifies that the reserved data whose special symbol display result is "big hit" is stored during the execution of the round in the jackpot game state. The advance notice effect may be executed.

As described above, the game area 10 includes the left game area 10A and the right game area 10B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) to adjust the left game area 10A. It is possible to switch between a left-handed hit that shoots a game ball toward the right side and a right-handed shot that shoots a game ball toward the right game area 10B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball is launched into the left game area 10A (when the game ball enters the left game area 10A), the right game area is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game ball wins the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game ball is fired at 10B. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is longer than when the game state is the probability change state and the time reduction state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol". Since the probability of becoming a player is low, the rate at which the game ball launched into the left game area 10A in the normal state wins the second start winning opening is extremely low as compared with the rate at which the first starting winning opening is won. There is.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball is launched into the right game area 10B (when the game ball enters the right game area 10B), the left is due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). Compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the game area 10A, the ratio of the game ball winning in the first starting winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win in the first starting winning opening. There is. Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is left-handed in the normal state. Occasionally, the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is extremely low. Therefore, the player will hit left in the normal state.

Further, the ratio of the game ball launched into the right game area 10B passing through the second passage gate 41B is such that the game ball launched into the left game area 10A is the first due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 41A. The rate at which the game ball fired in the right game area 10B wins in the second start winning opening in the open state is the rate of the game fired in the left game area 10A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second starting winning opening in the open state.

Then, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol" is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when hitting right in the probabilistic state and the time saving state is left in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when hitting. Therefore, the player strikes right in the probabilistic state and the time saving state.

In addition, the ratio of the game ball fired in the right game area 10B to the large winning opening in the open state is that the game ball fired in the left game area 10A is determined by the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of winning a large prize opening in the open state. Therefore, the player will hit right in the jackpot game state. In this way, the player strikes left in the normal state, switches to right-handed when the jackpot game state occurs, continues right-handed in the probability change state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and returns to the normal state. With the transition (for example, the end of the probability change state or the time saving state without the big hit game state), the player will return to left-handed.

Further, the ratio of the game ball launched in the left game area 10A to the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B provided in the left game area 10A is the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50A. Depending on the position where the general winning opening 50B is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the right game area 10B is the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 50B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game ball launched in the right game area 10B to the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D provided in the right game area 10B is the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth. Depending on the position where the general winning opening 50D is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the left game area 10A is the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 50D.

For some or all of the plurality of general winning openings (first general winning opening 50A and second general winning opening 50B) provided in the left game area 10A, only the game ball launched into the left game area 10A. It is possible to win a prize, and the game ball launched in the right game area 10B may not win a prize, and a plurality of general prize openings (third general prize opening 50C and fourth general prize opening) provided in the right game area 10B may be provided. For a part or all of 50D), only the game ball fired in the right game area 10B can win a prize, and the game ball fired in the left game area 10A may not win a prize.

In this way, since left-handed hitting is performed in the normal state, there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B among the four general winning openings, and the jackpot gaming state and In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, right-handed hitting is performed, so that there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D among the four general winning openings. As the game area in which the game ball is launched changes according to the game state and the like, the general winning opening where the game ball is likely to win also changes. In the left game area 10A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball can easily win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability change state, and the time saving state. In the area 10B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to win (or vice versa), so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening may change depending on the game state.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1. The power supply board is a board that supplies power to each board such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board is connected to the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and other boards such as the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the relay board 15 to supply power. A power switch is provided on the power supply board, and when the power supply switch is turned on, power is turned on and power supply from the power supply board to each board is started. Further, by turning off the power switch, the power supply to each board is stopped. Further, the main board 11 includes a payout control board. The payout control board may be provided separately from the main board 11. The payout control board is a board that controls the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board is composed of a ball payout device (not shown) or the like in response to reception of a prize ball number command (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 11) in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set. The prize ball is paid out by driving the payout mechanism (the mechanism for paying out the prize ball).

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function. On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and a game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 27 and 28 is mounted.

Further, the switch circuit 110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 (described in detail later) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. As will be described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is for detecting an abnormality generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is produced such that the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the like. It is equipped with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined effect operation to be performed on the electric component for use.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes voice signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives it.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 has a first gate switch 21A, a second gate switch 21B, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning port switch 24A. , The wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D is connected.

The first gate switch 21A, the second gate switch 21B, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D are, for example, Anything having an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor, may be used. Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the general figure hold display 25C Wiring for transmitting command signals for performing display control such as is connected. Further, a wiring for transmitting a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is connected to the main board 11.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with, for example, a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and blocks the input of the signal from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the side of the effect control board 12 or the relay board 15 to the side of the main board 11.

For example, the relay board 15 may be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Each transmission direction regulation circuit is connected to a diode in which an anode is connected to a main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode is connected to an effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 12, and one end is connected to the cathode of the diode. The other end is composed of a resistor connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulation circuit can block the input of the signal from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the effect control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulation circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal on the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing the above, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes lamp control commands used to control lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

Such effect control commands include, for example, a game state specification command that specifies a game state (normal state, probability change state, or time saving state), a variation start command that specifies a variation start in a special figure game, and a special in a special figure game. A variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation time of a symbol or a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol in the image display device 5, a variable display result notification command that specifies a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol, and a decorative symbol in the image display device 5. A decorative symbol stop command that specifies the stop of the variable display of, a jackpot start designation command that specifies the start and end of the jackpot game state, a jackpot end designation command, and a game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. The start winning command that is output when, the general winning opening designation command that is output when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the large winning opening winning command that is output when the game ball wins in the large winning opening, etc. included.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

In this way, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 (or the CPU 103) executes the game control microcomputer 100 (or the CPU 103). (Or perform processing) specifically means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. This also applies to a microcomputer mounted on a substrate different from the main substrate 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 provides an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. The circuit 124 and the I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data in the RAM 122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 13. A wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14, a wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 1000, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 12, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation button 30 has been detected is transmitted from a push detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Further, the effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 31 described later, and operation in the display changeover switch 32 described later. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the unit (first position or second position) is also connected.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, light emitters such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, an operation button 30, a movable accessory 1000, and an effect accessory. A plurality of types of pattern data constituting the effect control pattern are stored in advance in order to control the effect operation using the effect device (electric component for effect) including the movable member and the like.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 or the like. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various effect displays such as variable display of decorative patterns and effect display in reach effect by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. To control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode changeover switch 31. Includes an input port for capturing various signals such as a enable signal and a signal for confirming the state of the display changeover switch 32, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (effect sound signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 A command (drive signal) or the like to be transmitted to the movable accessory 1000 is output, such as (illumination signal) is output.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data shown in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. Control data corresponding to the sound number data is stored in the voice data ROM, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The stored data in the voice data ROM may be composed of data showing the output mode of voice and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the illumination signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the illumination signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the generated abnormality is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13, or the lamp control board 14 is used. The lighting / extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 9 or the decorative LED is controlled via the light to notify the player by light, or an abnormality notification image (error message) is transmitted to the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123. Notify by displaying. Examples of the abnormality include a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like, which are detected by using the abnormality detection sensor group 26 or the like.

The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is composed of one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality that occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is not limited to the sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 may be composed of those for detecting an abnormality. One or more sensors and the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor groups 26 are prepared according to each type of abnormality. The specific content of the abnormality detection sensor group 26 may be determined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. Abnormalities that occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are phenomena that do not occur or are extremely unlikely to occur in normal games performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, magnetic abnormalities and vibration abnormalities that occur when there is an illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Phenomena such as radio wave abnormalities) and phenomena that can hinder the progress of games, and in particular, phenomena that require notification to players and employees of game halls (pachinko shops, etc.).

Examples of the abnormality detection sensor group 26 include a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.). For example, these sensors and the like may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 26. A known method can be appropriately used for detecting the abnormality. When the game control microcomputer 100 detects a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, etc. based on an output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26, an abnormality detection designation command for specifying that an abnormality has occurred is a main board. It is transmitted from 11 to the effect control board 12, and the abnormality has occurred due to the display of the error message in the image display device 5, the output of the warning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode when the abnormality occurs in the game effect lamp 9, and the like. Notification is performed. For example, when an abnormality occurs, as shown in FIG. 43 (f), an image of the characters "An error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5.

Here, not only an abnormality has occurred due to the notification means such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, but also any of the types of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and opening of the front door. It may be possible to notify identifiable whether or not an abnormality has been detected.

The magnetic anomaly notification is an abnormality notification performed when a magnetic anomaly (an abnormality that a magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. There is a fraudulent act of moving the game medium by a magnet to make a prize in the winning opening, or clogging a predetermined area with the game medium in order to guide the game medium to the winning opening. By notifying the magnetic anomaly, it is possible to prevent such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided. The CPU 103 determines the presence or absence of a magnetic anomaly by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor exhibits a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (indicating a magnetic force → having a magnetic anomaly). When a magnetic anomaly is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the magnetic anomaly has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the image display device 5 or the like notifies the magnetic anomaly. For example, an image with the characters "A magnetic error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5.

The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, an abnormality notification that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a special variable winning ball device 7. There is a fraudulent act of intentionally shaking the pachinko game machine to change the flow direction of the game medium toward the winning opening such as the big winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an act from being performed. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is an abnormality (vibration abnormality) due to vibration by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (stronger than a predetermined threshold value). Shows vibration → There is vibration abnormality). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the vibration abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the image display device 5 or the like notifies the vibration abnormality. For example, an image with the characters "A vibration error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5.

The radio wave abnormality notification is a notification of an abnormality performed when a radio wave abnormality (an abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. By irradiating the start port switch (1st start port switch 22A and 2nd start port switch 22B), count switch 23, etc. with radio waves, these switches can be switched on / off to illegally generate a prize and win a prize ball. There is cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.) is provided. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether or not the signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of the predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the image display device 5 or the like notifies the radio wave abnormality. For example, an image with the characters "A radio wave error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5.

Both the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are configured by a DIP switch (Dual In-line Package switch), and are provided outside the game area of the game board 2. The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 configured by the DIP switch switch the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of the slide type, the knob positions are set to one end side and the other end side. (By switching to the side), the process (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 120 can be switched. When the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 3, the player cannot operate the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 because the glass door frame 3a covers the front surface of the game board 2. It has become. The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are provided by the player via the glass door frame 3a in a state where the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 3 (the state shown in FIG. 1). It is not shown in FIG. 1 because it is installed in an invisible position.

As described above, the clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the keyhole 61, opens the locking device (not shown), and opens the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the game machine frame 3. The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 provided on the game board 2 can be operated (dIP switch changeover). Then, when the operations of the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are completed, the glass door frame 3a is returned to the closed state with respect to the game machine frame 3, the key is inserted into the keyhole 61, and the locking device (shown). ) Is closed.

When the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the first position, the voltage of the mode changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 120 is in the Low state, and when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, the effect control The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 120 is set to High. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 has the operation unit of the mode switching switch 31 in the first position, that is, the image display device 5 has information for the player (for example, a demo). It is specified that the game mode is to display the screen, etc.), and the information of the winning number management table, which will be described later, is not displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the operation unit of the mode switching switch 31 is in the second position, that is, the information for the clerk in the image display device 5 (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is for displaying the number of winnings to each winning opening, and the information of the winning number management table described later is displayed on the image display device 5.

When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 120 is in the Low state, and when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, the effect control is performed. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 120 is set to High. When the voltage of the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 32 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 5 is informed of the number of winnings in the general winning opening. By specifying that the display is not permitted, it is prohibited to display the information based on the display control table (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) on the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the operation unit of the display switching switch 32 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 wins a prize in the general winning opening. It is specified that the permission to display the number is given, and the information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is permitted to be displayed on the image display device 5. To do.

In this embodiment, the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are provided on the front side (the surface facing the player) of the game board 2, but the mode changeover switch 31 and / or the display changeover switch 32 is used. , It may be provided on the back surface side (game island side) of the game board 2. In such a configuration, by rotating the game machine frame 3 forward with respect to the outer frame, the mode changeover switch 31 and / or the display changeover switch 32 provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 Can be operated.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, there is a start winning command as described above. The start winning command includes a start winning opening designation command indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has been generated, and the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. There is a start winning judgment result designation command and the like indicating a big hit judgment result and a big hit type judgment result at the time of winning a game ball.

The CPU 103 determines the effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When a prize is detected, a random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type are used as the first random number in the random number storage area for the first special figure. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and a command for designating the "first starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Judgment of whether or not to start Performs the judgment at the time of winning.

In this start winning judgment, if the big hit judgment random number does not match the big hit judgment value in the big hit judgment table, a start winning judgment result specification command for specifying "missing" is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the extracted (stored) big hit type judgment random number is further added to the big hit type judgment table for the first special figure for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set. For example, as a start winning judgment result specification command, a command for specifying "non-probability change jackpot" or a command for specifying "probability variation jackpot" is set. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“first starting winning opening” designation) and the start winning determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

The CPU 103 responds to the start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening (that is, according to the first starting winning opening) in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value. When an invalid start prize (invalid start prize) that is paid out but is not the target of the special figure game is detected, a command to specify the "first start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command, and the judgment result at the start prize is specified. As a command, set blank data that specifies that it is not a valid start prize. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“first starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

The CPU 103 determines the effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When a prize is detected, a random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type are stored in a second random number storage area for a second special figure. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages (the number of second reserved storages after addition including the valid start winning prize), and a command for designating the "second starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Judgment of whether or not to start Performs the judgment at the time of winning.

In this start winning judgment, if the big hit judgment random number does not match the big hit judgment value in the big hit judgment table, a start winning judgment result specification command for specifying "missing" is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the extracted (stored) big hit type judgment random number is further added to the big hit type judgment table for the second special figure for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set. For example, as a start winning judgment result specification command, a command for specifying "non-probability change jackpot" or a command for specifying "probability variation jackpot" is set. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

The CPU 103 responds to the start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (that is, according to the second starting winning opening) in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value. When an invalid start prize (invalid start prize) that is paid out but is not the target of the special figure game is detected, a command to specify the "second start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening specification command, and the judgment result at the start prize is specified. As a command, set blank data that specifies that it is not a valid start prize. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

In this embodiment, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the start winning is determined based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, and based on the determination result. Although the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the variation pattern of the variable display corresponding to the start winning is determined based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of the start winning, not limited to such a form. The look-ahead notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is a fluctuation pattern of super reach, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach. Then it is good.

Specifically, when the CPU 103 detects the effective start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the fluctuation pattern for jackpot determination. Along with the random number and the random number for determining the jackpot type, the random number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number after addition including the effective start winning) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. Further, when the CPU 103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining a fluctuation pattern as a random number for determining a big hit and a big hit. Together with the random number for type determination, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the random number storage area for the second special figure.

Here, the ROM 101 corresponds to each of the deviation pattern determination table in which the random number range corresponding to each of the deviation fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 8A is set and the jackpot fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 8B. A variable pattern determination table for jackpots in which the random number range is set is stored.

When the determination result of the start winning determination (display result specified by the start winning determination result specification command) is "out of place", the CPU 103 refers to the out-of-order variation pattern determination table and extracts (stores) it. The variation pattern determination random number is determined to be included in the random number range of which variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is specified, and the specified variation pattern is "non-reach out". , "Normal reach out" or "Super reach out", set the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command to specify which of the variation patterns.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the start winning determination (display result specified by the start winning determination result specification command) is either "non-probability variation jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", the CPU 103 varies for jackpot With reference to the pattern determination table, it is determined which variation pattern random number range includes the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination random number, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is specified. Then, a command for specifying a variation pattern at the time of starting winning, which specifies whether the specified variation pattern is a "normal reach jackpot" or a "super reach jackpot", is set.

When the invalid start prize is detected, the CPU 103 sets blank data for designating that the invalid start prize is not a valid start prize as a command for specifying the variation pattern determination result at the time of the start prize.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set start winning variation pattern determination result designation command to the effect control board 12 as a start winning command together with the start winning opening designation command and the start winning determination result designation command described above.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a start winning opening designation command designated as the "first starting winning opening" and a start winning determination result specification command including valid data that is not blank data (as well as starting including valid data that is not blank data). When the winning variation pattern determination result specification command) is received, the start winning determination result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specification command) is first held in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of storages (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and the start winning opening designation command designated as the "second starting winning opening" and valid data that is not blank data are stored. When a start winning judgment result specification command (and a start winning variation pattern determination result specification command including valid data other than blank data) is received, the start winning determination result specification command (and start winning variation pattern determination) is received. The result designation command) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure. The effect control CPU 120 confirms the start winning determination result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area, so that the first special feature is set before the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to estimate the display result (and fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure and execute the look-ahead notice effect.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 has a start winning opening designation command designated as the "first starting winning opening" and a starting winning determination result specification command including blank data (as well as a starting winning variation pattern determination result specification command including blank data). Is received, it is specified that an invalid start winning is generated in the first start winning opening, and the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) is used for the first special figure. It is possible to store the winning history to the first starting winning opening in the winning history storage area, which will be described later, without storing it in the starting winning command storage area (excluded from the execution target of the look-ahead notice effect). When the start winning opening designation command designated by "starting winning opening" and the starting winning judgment result specification command including blank data (and the starting winning variation pattern judgment result specification command including blank data) are received, the second start winning opening is entered. By identifying that an invalid start winning has occurred, the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) is not stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure (look-ahead). (Excluded from the execution target of the advance notice effect), it is possible to store the winning history in the second starting winning opening in the winning history storage area described later.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, there is a variation pattern designation command as described above. As shown below, when the main board 11 starts the variable display of the special symbol, the main board 11 determines a fluctuation pattern according to the special symbol display result to be derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control board 12 of the fluctuation pattern. Outputs a variable pattern specification command to specify. The effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern is stored in advance in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 is for effect control corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern designation command. Data is selected, and the effect control is executed according to the selected effect control data.

When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the CPU 103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure. In addition, among the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random numbers for determining the jackpot and the random numbers for determining the jackpot type in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of stored storage = 1), and the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent random numbers are read. The jackpot determination random number, the jackpot type determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is started to determine whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

In this start determination, if the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command that specifies "missing", and together with the jackpot determination random number. It is determined which variation pattern random number set in the deviation pattern determination table includes the variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area, and the variation pattern determination random number corresponds to the random number. By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the "outlier fluctuation pattern" is determined.

When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the read big hit type judgment random number is further stored in the big hit type judgment table for the first special figure for each big hit type. It is judged which of the judgment values is matched. Then, a variable display result notification command that specifies the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for the big hit judgment and the random number for the fluctuation pattern judgment read from the head storage area are changed for the big hit. The "big hit variation pattern" is determined by determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs a set variable display result notification command and a variable pattern designation command for designating the determined variable pattern, together with the variable start command for designating the variable start of the first special figure.

When the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the CPU 103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure. In addition, among the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random numbers for determining the jackpot and the random numbers for determining the jackpot type in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of stored storage = 1), and the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent random numbers are read. The jackpot determination random number, the jackpot type determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is started to determine whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

In this start determination, if the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command that specifies "missing", and together with the jackpot determination random number. It is determined which variation pattern random number set in the deviation pattern determination table includes the variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area, and the variation pattern determination random number corresponds to the random number. By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the "outlier fluctuation pattern" is determined.

When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the read big hit type judgment random number is further stored in the big hit type judgment table for the second special figure for each big hit type. It is judged which of the judgment values is matched. Then, a variable display result notification command that specifies the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for the big hit judgment and the random number for the fluctuation pattern judgment read from the head storage area are changed for the big hit. The "big hit variation pattern" is determined by determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs a set variable display result notification command and a variable pattern designation command for designating the determined variable pattern, together with the variable start command for designating the variable start of the second special figure.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation start command for specifying the variation start of the first special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result specification commands (and the start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure, the first storage area (reserved storage number). The start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) of the storage area corresponding to = 1 is deleted, and the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning) of the storage area after that is deleted. The time fluctuation pattern determination result specification command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 stores the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the ROM 121, and decorates the ROM 121 so that the reach state is established at the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern designation command. Controls the variable display of symbols. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation start command for specifying the variation start of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result specification commands (and the start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure, the first storage area (reserved storage number). The start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) of the storage area corresponding to = 1 is deleted, and the start winning judgment result specification command (and start winning) of the storage area after that is deleted. The time fluctuation pattern determination result specification command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

Further, when the first general winning opening switch 24A to the fourth general winning opening switch 24D detects that the game ball has won in the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, the game ball is detected in any of the general winning openings. A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not a prize has been won is output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12. That is, when a game ball is detected by the first general winning opening switch 24A, a general winning opening designation command for designating a prize in the first general winning opening 50A is output, and the game ball is released by the second general winning opening switch 24B. When it is detected, a general winning opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general winning opening 50B is output, and when a game ball is detected by the third general winning opening switch 24C, the third general winning opening 50C is entered. A general winning opening designation command for specifying a winning is output, and when a game ball is detected by the 4th general winning opening switch 24D, a general winning opening designation command for specifying a prize for the 4th general winning opening 50D is output. ..

Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can identify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and which general winning opening the game ball has won based on the received general winning opening designation command. .. Further, as described above, when the game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which starting winning opening the game ball has won. It is designed to receive mouth specification commands. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 stores information that can identify the general winning opening in which the winning has occurred and information that can identify the starting winning opening in which the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122 according to the order in which the winning is generated. It is possible.

The effect control CPU 120 determines which of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the general winning opening (general winning opening won by the game ball) designated by the received general winning opening designation command. Confirm and confirm whether the starting winning opening (starting winning opening won by the game ball) specified by the received start winning opening designation command is either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , Each general winning opening and each starting winning opening are stored in the RAM 122. For example, if the game ball wins in the order of the second general winning opening 50B, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 50A, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening 50C, [2nd general winning opening] The history of the winning opening, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening] is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122.

Further, when the winning of the starting winning opening and the winning of the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 issues a starting winning opening designation command and a starting winning determination result designation command. , You may send it before the general winning opening designation command. For example, detection by any of the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, and by any of the first general prize opening switch 24A to the fourth general prize opening switch 24D. When the detection is confirmed almost at the same time (for example, within the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 100 issues a start winning opening designation command and a starting winning decision result designation command with a general winning opening designation command. It is better to give priority to sending first. By adopting such a transmission order, it is understood that the effect control CPU 120 has already received the start winning opening designation command and the starting winning determination result designation command when the general winning opening designation command is received. It is possible, and as a specific effect to be executed based on the winning of the general winning opening, it is possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect based on the previously received start winning determination result specification command.

If the general winning openings are awarded multiple times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 shall transmit a plurality of general winning openings designation commands in accordance with a predetermined priority. To do. For example, when the detection by the first general winning opening switch 24A and the detection by the second general winning opening switch 24B are confirmed almost at the same time (for example, within the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 100 , The general winning opening designation command for specifying the winning to the general winning opening, which is more difficult to win, may be sent first with priority. In addition, if the number of prize balls to be given differs depending on the general winning opening, even if the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the general winning opening with a larger number of winning balls is given priority and sent first. good.

Further, when the count switch 23 detects that the game ball has won the big prize opening, the big winning opening winning command that specifies that the game ball has won the big winning opening is issued from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12 Is output to. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening based on the received large winning opening winning command, and the winning history to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening described above can be specified. Similar to the history, it is possible to store the winning history to the large winning opening in the winning history storage area.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a big hit start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state and a jackpot end designation command for designating the end of the jackpot game state. It is possible to distinguish and total the number of times the command is received and the number of times the general winning opening designation command is received. As a result, the number of winnings to the big winning opening and the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the period controlled by the big hit game state can be separately totaled, and the totaling result can be totaled as shown in FIG. It is also possible to display it on 5.

Further, when the game ball is launched in the game area 10, the game ball usually wins a prize in any of the starting winning opening, the general winning opening, and the large winning opening at a certain frequency. If the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed and the game ball is not won in any of the starting winning opening, the general winning opening, and the large winning opening for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), the game is played. There is a high possibility that the person is in a non-gaming state in which the player is not playing. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and receives the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to determine the end of the game, which determines that the game has ended.

FIG. 3A is a diagram showing an example of prize number information managed by the prize number management table stored in the RAM 122. In this winning number management table, the number of winnings to each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is stored. The effect control CPU 120 can total the number of winnings to each general winning opening for each gaming state based on the jackpot start designation command, the jackpot end designation command, the game state designation command, and the general winning opening designation command. .. The game state specification command specifies the timing at which the game state changes (the game state specification command in this case specifies the controlled game state, and is transmitted at the end of the jackpot game state or the time reduction state, for example. ) Or, it is transmitted at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the game state specification command in this case specifies the game state when the special symbol game is executed).

In this example, the number of prizes to the second general prize opening 50B is 50 (total for the entire period), of which the number of prizes in the normal state is 46, the number of prizes in the jackpot game state is 2, and the number of prizes in the probability change state. Is 1, and the number of prizes in the time saving state is 1. That is, the number of winnings in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of winnings in the right-handed period is 4. In addition, the total number of prizes to the general winning opening is 108, of which 81 is the number of prizes in the left-handed period and 27 is the number of prizes in the right-handed period.

In this way, along with the number of winnings in each general winning opening, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored and displayed on the image display device 5 (or corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is transmitted to a game device such as a card unit or a call lamp device and displayed on a display device provided in the game device, or is transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device provided in the information management device. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the ease of winning a game ball into each general winning opening in the game hall and use it for maintenance of the game nail. For example, if the number of winnings of a game ball to a general winning opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail in the vicinity of the general winning opening is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

Number of winnings information of the number of winnings management table (number of winnings to each general winning opening, number of winnings to general winning opening in each game state, number of winnings to general winning opening in left-handed period and right-handing period, to general winning opening (Including the total number of winnings) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (in the case of maintenance mode), and is displayed in the case of the first position (in the case of the game mode). Do not show. The clerk at the amusement park switches the mode changeover switch 31 from the first position to the second position to display the winning number information in the winning number management table, and uses this as a reference to perform maintenance on the game nails and to the general winning opening. Make the winning frequency of game balls appropriate. Then, after the maintenance is completed, the mode changeover switch 31 is returned from the second position to the first position.

In this embodiment, the winning number information in the winning number management table does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state), and the execution status of the special figure game (special symbol). Whether or not the variable display is executed, the number of reserved memories of the special figure game), and the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the normal figure game) Regardless of this, the image display device 5 is continuously displayed during the period when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the game state. For example, the mode changeover switch 31 may be displayed. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and even if the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the probability change state, the time saving state, and the big hit game state. You can do it.

Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayable on the image display device 5 according to the execution status of the special figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is located at the second position. Even if the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the special symbol game can be displayed only during the period of 0, and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position. , The period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed or the period during which the number of reserved storages of the special symbol game is not 0 may not be displayed. Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayable on the image display device 5 according to the execution status of the normal drawing game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is located at the second position. Even if the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed and the reserved memory number of the normal figure game is 0, it can be displayed only, and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position. , The period during which the variable display of the normal symbol is executed or the period during which the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol game is not 0 may not be displayed.

The prize number information stored in the prize number management table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 31, the setting state of the display changeover switch 32, and the display setting by the operation buttons 30 (settings of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3)). It is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command regardless of the setting on the screen). Further, the prize number information stored in the prize number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko game machine 1 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the business of the game hall is closed. Then, the information on the number of winnings for each gaming machine is stored in the gaming information management device for each business day. In addition, the prize number information stored in the prize number management table is deleted (reset) based on the execution of a specific effect corresponding to the prize history storage area described above in the prize history storage area. Even if it is not deleted, the operation button is not deleted, and after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, or in the state where the clerk reset operation (for example, the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5) It is erased by the operation of 30).

For example, a clerk at the amusement park determines the operation button 30 in a state where the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 (the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (display setting) state). By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the winning number management table (the number of winnings of each general winning opening and the total number of winnings of general winning openings) can be reset to 0. It is possible.

FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an example of prize number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 122. In this display control table, the number of winnings to each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is stored. The effect control CPU 120 can total the number of winnings to each general winning opening based on the general winning opening designation command. In this example, the total number of winnings to the general winning opening is 11, of which the number of winnings to the first general winning opening 50A is 3, the number of winnings to the second general winning opening 50B is 5, and the number of winnings to the third general winning opening 50B. The number of prizes for the 50C is 2, and the number of prizes for the 4th general prize opening 50D is 1.

As shown in FIG. 4, the information on the number of winnings in the display control table (specifically, the number of objects displayed according to the total number of winnings) is displayed when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the display setting). Case), and when the display setting of the general winning number is set by the operation button 30, it is displayed on the image display device 5. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (in the case of non-display setting), the prize in the display control table is won regardless of whether or not the display setting of the general prize number is set by the operation button 30. Numerical information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of the display setting), when the display setting of the general prize number is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of the non-display setting). Does not display the winning number information in the display control table.

That is, when the clerk of the game hall sets the display prohibition setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 32, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. There is. Only when the clerk of the game hall sets the display permission of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 32, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect) based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed. Regarding the effect, as shown in FIG. 4, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (when the execution permission is set), and the operation button 30 is used to set the display of the number of general prizes (execution of the specific effect). It can be executed when the setting) has been performed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (when the execution is not permitted), it depends on whether or not the operation button 30 is used to set the display of the number of general prizes (execution setting of the specific effect). However, the specific effect is not executed (execution is prohibited). Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (when the execution permission is set), the display setting of the general prize number is not set by the operation button 30 (when the non-execution setting is set). No specific effect is executed.

That is, when the clerk of the game hall sets the execution permission of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 32, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the execution setting operation of the player. Only when the clerk of the game hall sets the execution permission of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 32, the specific effect can be executed according to the execution setting operation of the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common. (Amusement place side: display changeover switch 32, player side: operation button 30). Not limited to such a form, it may be possible to individually set whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening and whether or not a specific effect can be executed, and it is set by different operation means. You may.

The winning number information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 31, the setting state of the display changeover switch 32, and the display setting by the operation buttons 30 (settings of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3)). It is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command regardless of the setting on the screen). In addition, the winning number information (the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings) stored in the display control table is such that the winning history of the above-mentioned winning history storage area corresponds to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the effect (A or B), it is not deleted, and when the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 120, for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. It is deleted (reset to 0) when the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are not received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute).

When the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed. The number of winnings is also reset to 0. For example, the coin-shaped object (winning-corresponding display) displayed on the right side of the characters of "general winning" is no longer displayed on the screen of FIG. 6 described later, and the number of displayed objects becomes 0. When the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are determined to end the game. When it is reset to 0 based on, then, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 5, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time ( For example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings) will be displayed.

Further, the clerk or the player of the amusement park presses the operation button 30 in a state where the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 5 (a state in which an object corresponding to the total winning number is displayed). By pressing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the display control table (the total number of winnings of each general winning opening and the total winning of the general winning opening) regardless of the game end determination. The number) can be reset to 0, and the winning number information displayed on the image display device 5 is also reset to 0 (all the displayed objects are deleted).

As shown in FIG. 5, the display setting operation of the player is accepted by operating the operation button 30 during the display of the demo screen which is not related to the progress of the special figure game and the progress of the normal figure game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are executed for a predetermined period (for example, 1). In the state of not receiving for more than a minute), the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the screen of FIG. 5 (1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is being displayed.

On the screen of FIG. 5 (1), the message "Please press the enter button for the display setting of the general prize number" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 30 is displayed below it, and the operation button 30 is pressed. An arrow prompting you to press is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 30 according to the instruction, the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon containing the characters "display" and an icon containing the characters "do not display" are displayed, and the message "Enter button after selecting with the jog dial" is displayed, and the operation button 30 ( An arrow prompting you to press the jog dial) after rotating it is displayed.

To display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, rotate the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the left to select an icon containing the characters "display" and enter the general winning opening. To hide the number of winnings, rotate the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the right to select an icon containing the word "not displayed". In this example, the icon containing the word "display" is selected.

Then, when the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon including the character "display" selected in FIG. 5 (2), as shown in FIG. 5 (3), "the number of general prizes is displayed." A message is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal demo screen shown in FIG. 5 (4). By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total number of winnings (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings in FIG. 6) stored in the display control table at the time of completing the setting operation is immediately displayed. The total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 5 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You may do so.

On the other hand, if the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon including the character "not displayed" selected in FIG. 5 (2), the message "The number of general prizes will not be displayed" is displayed, and FIG. 5 (4) Return to the normal demo screen of. By this setting operation, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, that is, on the playground side, the winning number information stored in the display control table is transmitted to the image display device 5. The image display device 5 has a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening as shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) only when the display is permitted. It shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, that is, when the game hall side does not permit the image display device 5 to display the winning number information stored in the display control table. As shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3), the screen itself for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 4 described above, it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 32 regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player. Will be done.

In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game field and the player regarding whether or not to display the number of winning balls of the game ball to the general winning opening. In this embodiment, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position) on the playground side. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the amusement park is prioritized over the intention of the player. Therefore, if the player does not want the player to know the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 may be set to the first position (non-display position).

Further, when the intention of the game hall is prioritized over the intention of the player, even though the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side ( Although it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening regardless of the setting on the player side), on the player side as shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3). If the setting screen is displayed, it will be misunderstood that the player will be able to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by his / her own setting operation.

In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (generally regardless of the setting on the player side). When it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the winning opening), the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself that "it is possible to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening according to the setting operation on the player side" is not performed.

Display settings on the playground side (the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is the second position) and display settings on the player side (on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2), an icon including the characters "display" is displayed. When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 30 in the selected state), as shown in FIG. 6 (1), at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5. The words "general prize" are displayed. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D), as shown in FIG. 6 (2), a coin-shaped object is to the right of the character "general winning opening". (Winning correspondence display) is displayed.

The number of coin-shaped objects displayed on the image display device 5 corresponds to the total number of winnings in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 6 (3), the total number of winnings in the display control table is added by 1 each time a game ball wins in the general winning openings (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D). As a result, the number of coin-shaped objects also increases. In addition, the coin-shaped object contains the number "10", which indicates the number of prize balls given when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can also grasp the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening. The number of prize balls given when a game ball wins a prize in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, large winning opening) is stored in ROM 121 in advance. And.

In this way, by displaying the objects corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and increasing the number of objects to be displayed according to the increase in the number of winnings, the player can use the general winning opening. It is possible to easily grasp that the game ball has won a prize and the number of game balls won in the general winning opening.

When the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 120, the number of winnings of the game balls and the total number of winnings to each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0 as described above. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6 (4), all the coin-shaped objects displayed on the right side of the characters of "general prize" are deleted. That is, it is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is 0.

In this way, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the game machine is in a non-game state, the number of winnings to the notified general winning opening is reset to 0 (general). By displaying that there is no winning in the winning opening), it is possible to prevent the player who subsequently plays the game with the game machine from knowing the number of winnings in the general winning opening. ..

In this embodiment, by setting the condition for determining the end of the game and the condition for shifting to the demo screen described above as a common condition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening notified at the time of transition to the demo screen is 0. Will be reset to. In this way, when the demo screen is displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been notified may be reset to 0.

As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general prizes on the player setting screen (FIG. 5), the display control for increasing the number of objects to be displayed for each prize in the general prize opening shown in FIG. 6 is not executed. .. In these cases, the characters "general winning number" shown in FIG. 6 are not displayed, and the coin-shaped object itself is also displayed regardless of the number of winnings in the general winning opening (total winning number in the display control table). Do not show.

If the number of objects (normal objects) displayed for each prize in the general winning opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases, so that the number of normal objects has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a mode different from that of the normal object including the number "100") instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. As a result, it is possible to notify the predetermined number of winning times and the corresponding number of prize balls in the display area of one special object without requiring the display area of a predetermined number of normal objects.

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the displayed objects increase by 1 for each winning in the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and a plurality of objects in the general winning opening are used. The object may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the displayed object may be incremented by 1 for every 5 winnings in the general winning opening.

In addition, the display setting on the game hall side (the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set as the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2)). When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 30 with the icon selected), as shown in FIG. 7, the period controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In, the number of winnings to the general winning opening will be displayed together with the number of winnings to the large winning opening.

FIG. 7 (1) is a screen displayed on the image display device 5 when the jackpot game state is controlled. When the first round game is started, the characters "general prize number" are displayed, and on the right side, the number of prizes to the general prize opening in the jackpot game state is displayed, and the "large prize number" is displayed. Is displayed, and the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed on the right side. In this example, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls given when the game ball wins to the general winning opening is 10 [0 × 10]. Is displayed. In addition, the number of prizes to the big prize opening in the big hit game state is still 0, and the number of prize balls given when the game ball wins to the big prize opening is 15, so that it is displayed as [0 × 15]. Has been done. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [0 × 10] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the big winning opening [0 × 15]. Since the total number of and is 0, it is displayed as [total 0 balls].

As shown in FIG. 7 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the game ball wins the large winning opening (special variable winning ball device 7) seven times, and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A). The number of general prizes has been updated to 1 and the number of large prizes has been updated to 7 because the game ball has won a prize once in the 4th general prize opening 50D). In addition, the total number of prize balls [1 × 10] given according to the winning of the general winning opening and the number of prize balls [7 × 15] given according to the winning of the large winning opening is 115. Therefore, it is displayed as [115 balls in total]. In addition, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [1 × 10 = 10 balls] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the large winning opening [7 × 15 = 105 balls] And may be displayed individually.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (3), as a result of performing the second to fifteenth (final) round games, the game balls are totaled in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball device 7) in the big hit game state. After winning 105 times, the number of general prizes became 3 and the number of large prizes was updated to 105 because the game balls won a total of 3 times in the general prize openings (1st general prize opening 50A to 4th general prize opening 50D). ing. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [3 × 10] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the big winning opening [105 × 15]. Since the total number of and is 1605, it is displayed as [1605 balls in total].

In this way, by displaying the number of prizes to the general prize opening during the period controlled by the jackpot game state separately from the number of prizes to the big prize opening, the player can only display the number of prizes to the big prize opening. In addition, we will be interested in the number of prizes in the general prize opening. In addition, by displaying the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes in the large prize opening and the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes in the general prize opening separately, the player can win the prize in the large prize opening. You will be interested not only in the number of prize balls given according to the number of prize balls, but also in the number of prize balls given in response to the prizes in the general winning openings.

In addition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the period controlled by the jackpot game state is not limited to the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 5. The number of winnings to the general winning opening in the normal state may be displayed on the image display device 5. Further, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the right-handed period (big hit game state, probability change state, or time saving state) may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state) may be displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 5. Further, the image display device 5 may display the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to the reserved storage number of the special figure game).

As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 5), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled by the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 7 is displayed. Display control is not executed. In these cases, the characters "general prize number" shown in FIG. 7 are not displayed, and the number of prizes to the general prize opening and the corresponding number of prize balls during the period controlled by the jackpot game state. , And the total number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winnings to the large winning opening are not displayed. Only the number of prizes to the large prize opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 6, an example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object has been described, but the image display device 5 has the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 7, an example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls given according to the winning in the general winning opening are displayed has been described. These may not be displayed on the device 5.

In this way, it is possible to display only the number of prize balls to the general winning opening and not to display the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening or the number of prize balls given according to the winning to the general winning opening. .. With such a configuration, when the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning openings is changed in the design process of the game machine, the display information of the image display device 5 must be changed according to the change. It is possible to prevent the situation of disappearing. On the contrary, only the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening may be displayed.

In this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side, the player settings shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) are set. An example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not notified that the number of winnings can be switched between display and non-display) has been described, but the display changeover switch 32 is not limited to this form. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screens shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) are displayed (the number of prizes can be displayed / hidden). (Notify the player that this is the case).

In such a configuration, even if the player is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3), even if the player is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 5 based on the fact that the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the playground side. Do not (priority is given to the playground setting). At this time, the image display device 5 may display that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to the priority of the playground setting.

When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIG. 5 (1) is displayed (the number of prizes can be displayed / hidden). This is notified to the player), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, even if the operation button 30 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 5 (1), the screen does not move to the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2), and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed. It may not be possible to select whether or not.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game field setting is prioritized over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may be prioritized over the game field setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) are displayed. When the operation button 30 is pressed while the icon including the characters "display" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2) so that the image can be displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device. If the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon displayed in 5 (display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed) and the icon including the character "not displayed" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2), a general prize is awarded. The number of winnings in the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

Further, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening according to the order of the received setting operations, with the game hall setting and the player setting having the same priority. That is, it may be decided whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the general winning opening is subsequently won on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3). When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed (display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) are set so that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is subsequently moved to the second position. When (display position) is set, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed (display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is subsequently displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3). When is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed). Further, even when the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) are set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is subsequently moved to the first position. When (non-display position) is set, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

Further, in this embodiment, the clerk of the amusement park can set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5 by operating the display changeover switch 32, and the player. By operating the operation button 30, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5, but the display is not limited to this form, and the clerk at the amusement park switches the display. By operating the switch 32, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5, while on the player side, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 5. It may not be possible to set whether or not to display (for example, the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) is not provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5 only on the amusement park side.

On the contrary, it is possible to set whether or not the player (and the clerk of the game hall) operates the operation button 30 to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. On the other hand, it is also possible not to provide a means that allows only the amusement park side to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5 (for example, the display changeover switch 32 is not provided). In such a configuration, whether or not the player and the clerk of the game hall display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 30). It becomes possible to set. In this way, it may be possible for the player and the amusement park to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5, but the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is pachinko. Information is displayed by being transmitted to an information display device provided corresponding to the game machine 1, for example, a display device of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko game machine 1 or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko game machine 1. It may be displayed on the device. In addition, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the general winning opening for each game machine is transmitted in the information management device. The number of winnings may be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition, as a configuration in which the mode changeover switch 31 is not provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 5), and the information display device or the information display device It may be displayed only in the information management device.

In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 by setting the mode changeover switch 31, and is stored in the display control table by setting the display changeover switch 32. An example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 5 has been described. As described above, the winning number management table and the display control table are not provided with individual switches for display control. A common switch for performing display control of both the number management table and the display control table may be provided. For example, by setting the common switch as a display setting, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are displayed on the image display device 5, and the common switch is displayed. By setting to hide, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table may not be displayed on the image display device 5.

In FIG. 8A, when a special symbol (missing symbol) other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol, it is determined by the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control). The out-of-order fluctuation pattern is illustrated. Further, FIG. 8B exemplifies a jackpot variation pattern determined by the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol. Has been done. Since the special figure fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command can execute the effect according to the special figure variation time.

Among the out-of-reach fluctuation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are fluctuation patterns in which the non-reach out-of-reach effect mode is used, PX003 is a variation pattern in which the normal reach-out-of-reach effect mode is used, and PX004 is a super-reach-out-out effect mode. It is a fluctuation pattern. Among the jackpot fluctuation patterns, PY003 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of a normal reach jackpot, and PY004 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of a super reach jackpot. Here, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

The battle production is a production that suggests whether or not a friendly character and an enemy character battle each other and win or lose a big hit. In PX004, which is a fluctuation pattern out of super reach, a defeat effect is executed in which a ally character is defeated by an enemy character, whereas in PY004, which is a fluctuation pattern of super reach jackpot, a ally character wins over an enemy character. The production is executed.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern designation command when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the special figure is executed in the game control microcomputer 100. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (before the stop display of the confirmed special symbol), a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol of the variable display (that is, the jackpot symbol). It is possible to execute a variable result advance notice effect for notifying that the game is controlled).

In the variation result advance notice effect shown in FIG. 9A, the first aspect of the variation announcement effect in which only the audio effect in which the voice "Now is a chance!" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed, and the audio effect are combined. It is possible to execute the variation notice effect of the second aspect in which the accessory effect in which the movable accessory 1000 operates (rotational operation and lighting) is executed. Due to such a difference in the effect mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is satisfied).

The effect control CPU 120 is based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: change result advance notice effect) based on the winning of the general winning opening is satisfied. The mode of the variation result notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning in the general winning opening is satisfied), the mode of the variation result notice production is determined, and the determined mode is determined. The fluctuation result notice effect is executed at. As will be described later, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is not executed, the execution of the variation result advance notice effect is suspended or the variation result advance notice effect is performed. Do not execute.

For example, if the variable display result (variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies "off", the voice effect is produced at a rate of 80%. The variation notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the variation notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the variable display result (variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies "big hit", the voice effect is produced at a rate of 25%. The variation notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the variation notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 75%.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 receives the start winning opening designation command and the starting winning prize when the effective starting winning entry to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs in the game control microcomputer 100. Receives the time judgment result specification command. As a result, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol of variable display that has not been executed yet before the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied (that is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state). ) Is available for pre-reading notice.

In the look-ahead notice effect shown in FIG. 9B, the first aspect of the look-ahead notice effect in which only the voice effect in which the voice "Chance is coming soon!" It is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect in which the accessory effect in which the object 1000 operates (rotational operation and lighting) is executed. Due to such a difference in the effect mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. There is.

The effect control CPU 120 reads ahead based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect) based on the winning of the general winning opening is satisfied. The mode of the advance notice production is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning to the general winning opening is satisfied), the mode of the look-ahead notice production is determined, and the determined mode is used. A look-ahead notice effect is executed. As will be described later, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is suspended or the look-ahead notice effect is not executed.

For example, when the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area does not include the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "big hit" (all start winnings that specify "missing"). In the case of the time determination result specification command), the look-ahead advance notice effect of the first aspect accompanied only by the voice effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the look-ahead advance notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the accessory effect is executed at a rate of 15%. Perform a look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, if the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area includes the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "big hit", the voice effect is produced at a rate of 10%. The look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the look-ahead notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 90%.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a specific effect executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. The variable result advance notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a big hit symbol is executed as the specific effect A in the present embodiment. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, that is, whether or not the hold memory includes the one judged as a big hit is performed in this implementation. It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not the specific effect can be executed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is notified. When the setting is made (when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (when the execution permission is set), and the operation button 30 is used to set the display of the number of general prizes (execution setting of the specific effect). Only when it is performed), the effect control CPU 120 can execute a specific effect.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 stores the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122 each time the general winning opening designation command and the starting winning opening designation command are received. However, this winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are separately provided. For example, the first general winning opening 50A, the second When a prize is generated in the order of the general winning opening 50B, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening 50D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area Winning history corresponding to the specific effect B Winning history of [1st general winning opening, 2nd general winning opening, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, 3rd general winning opening, 4th] Will be remembered.

In the effect mode in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (when a prize is generated in any of the winning openings). ), It is confirmed whether or not the winning condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is decided based on the winning condition being satisfied. Further, in the production mode in which only the specific production B can be executed, each time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific production B (at the timing when a prize is generated in any of the winning openings), a prize is won. It is confirmed whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. Further, in the effect mode in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, each time the prize history is stored in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any of them). (At the timing when a prize is awarded to the winning opening), it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific production A is satisfied in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific production A, and the specific production A is supported. The execution of the specific effect A is decided based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is satisfied in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. , The execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning conditions corresponding to the specific effect B are satisfied.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect A execution flag when the execution of the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, as described above, the specific effect A according to the variable display result The mode (only the voice effect, or both the voice effect and the accessory effect) is determined, the variation result notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect A execution flag is deleted. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without suspending the variation result advance notice effect.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying this) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the target of the variation result notice effect does not exist, so the specific effect A is executed. Is put on hold and the specific effect A execution flag is left set. The effect control CPU 120 can grasp that the specific effect A is determined to be executed by the specific effect A execution flag being set, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is satisfied, the mode of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, and the state is set to the hold state. The specific effect A that has been set is executed, and the set specific effect A execution flag is deleted.

Not limited to such a form, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying this) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. The execution of the specific effect A may be stopped without any reason, and the specific effect A may not be executed even when the variable display start condition is subsequently satisfied.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect B execution flag when the execution of the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, when the number of reserved storages (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1 or more at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, as described above, 1 The mode of the specific effect B (only the voice effect or both the voice effect and the character effect) is determined according to the above-mentioned start winning judgment result, the pre-reading notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect B Clear the execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without suspending the pre-reading notice effect.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, since there is no target for the pre-reading advance notice effect, the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag is set. Make it a state. The effect control CPU 120 can grasp that the specific effect B is determined to be executed by the specific effect B execution flag being set, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the starting condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more) due to the occurrence of a prize in the starting winning opening, the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the starting winning determination result. The specific effect B that has been in the pending state is executed, and the set specific effect B execution flag is deleted.

Not limited to such a form, if the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without suspending the execution of the specific effect B, and then the execution of the specific effect B is stopped. Even when the start condition is satisfied and the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the specific effect B may not be executed.

Further, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (for example, when a power failure is detected), the effect control CPU 120 has a winning history storage area (a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a winning history storage area). The winning history stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B and the specific effect execution flag (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) are all deleted. As a result, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 while the specific effect (variation result advance notice effect, look-ahead advance notice effect) is being executed, or in a state where the specific effect has not yet been executed after the execution of the specific effect is decided. Is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted, but the specific effect that was being executed or the specific effect that was decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, during a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased, so that the specific effect is not executed. When it is confirmed that the winning conditions have been met based on the winning history since the power supply was started, a new specific effect is executed.

[First production form]
In the first effect mode shown in FIG. 10, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a game ball in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. Each time a prize is won, a prize condition (which is the first prize condition) is established. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, which is the first winning condition). (Includes winning history for either) is deleted.

On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the time saving state, every time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, which is the second winning condition). (Includes winning history for either) is deleted.

In the first effect form and the second effect form to the fourth effect form described later, (1) the ratio of the specific effect being executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening in the normal state is (2). ) It is higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the player is usually more interested in the winning status of the game ball in the second starting winning opening and the variable display of the decorative symbol than in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Even if a specific effect is executed, it is difficult to create the same interest as in the normal state. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the execution rate of the specific effect is lowered as compared with the normal state, and the deterioration of the interest of the specific effect is suppressed.

Note that, unlike the first effect mode, the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, do not determine whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect. In each of the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, a specific effect can be executed when the winning condition is satisfied. However, (2) the winning condition in the probabilistic state or the time saving state is (1) normal. More winnings are required than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution rate of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution rate of the specific effect in the probability variation state or the time saving state.

In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening. Contrary to the examples of the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (2) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state is (2). 1) In the normal state, the ratio may be higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

In the second production form to the fourth production form, which will be described later, as in the first production form, when the winning condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect. You may do so. For example, in the second effect mode to the fourth effect form, the first prize condition required in the normal state and the second prize condition required in the probability variation state or the time saving state are the same prize conditions, and the first By differentiating the lottery probability when the winning condition is satisfied in the normal state and the lottery probability when the winning condition is satisfied in the probability change state or the time saving state as in the production form, the ratio at which the specific effect is normally executed and the probability change The ratio at which the specific effect is executed in the state or the time saving state may be different.

Further, the specific effect may be executed at different ratios according to not only the game state but also the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than the case where the display result of the variable display is an off symbol, and at the time of starting prize. When there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit, compared to a case where there is no hold memory determined to be a big hit at the time of starting prize (when only a hold memory determined to be off at the time of starting prize exists), A specific effect may be executed at a high rate. Further, the number of times the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type, or the specific effect of a different type is classified by type. It may be possible to execute it only once each time).

[Second production form]
In the second effect mode shown in FIG. 10, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has two or more general of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins at least once in each winning opening. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 is used for two or more general winning openings of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, respectively. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins two or more times. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

As described above, in the second effect form, and the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the number of prizes to the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the normal state and the probability change state or Since the number of winnings in the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the time saving state is different, it is possible to make the number of winning balls in the general winning opening interesting according to the gaming state. ..

Further, in the second effect mode, in order to execute the specific effect, at least one game is played for each of two or more general prize openings out of the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D. The condition is to win a ball. In this way, by setting the winning of each of the plurality of general winning openings as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only whether or not the general winning opening is won, but also the game ball is won in any of the general winning openings. You can be interested in what you did.

In the second effect mode, and the third effect form and the fourth effect mode, which will be described later, the start of the jackpot game state is specified based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 controls the jackpot game state. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the jackpot start designation command, both the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted. It is supposed to be.

Further, in the second effect mode, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the prize history in the prize history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the game state. .. Therefore, the fact that the first winning condition is satisfied means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state, and the winning history is not necessarily limited to the normal state. Based on this, the first winning condition is not always satisfied. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history of the winning history storage area in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the probable changing state or the time saving state is not necessarily satisfied. The second winning condition is not always satisfied based on the winning history of only the time saving state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probabilistic state or the time saving state to the normal state. Is also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. You may check it.

[Third production form]
In the third effect mode shown in FIG. 10, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of three or more times in the winning opening 50D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 enters the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of 5 times or more. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history to the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). (Set). Then, if the winning condition is not satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the timer for the specific effect A times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted without executing the specific effect A. .. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (if the winning condition is satisfied before the timer for the specific effect A times out), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is executed. Is erased.

In this way, the winning frequency (number of winnings within a predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the normal state and the winning frequency (predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. By different from the number of winnings in the game, it is possible to make the player interested in the frequency of winning in the general winning opening according to the playing state.

Further, in the third effect mode, when the specific effect A targeting the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning opening in the predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only for the variable display period of 1). (When the winning conditions are satisfied by the winning history), a specific effect A that targets a variable display different from the variable display that was executed when the first general winning opening was won in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed. In some cases (the winning condition is satisfied by the winning history in a plurality of variable display periods).

It should be noted that, as in the third effect mode, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times as a form in which the specific effect is executed when the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the predetermined period reaches a predetermined number. A specific effect may be executed when the number of winnings to the general winning opening during a certain period reaches a predetermined number. For example, it is specified until all the reserved memories of the special figure game are exhausted, that is, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number during the period when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved memory number is executed. The production may be executed.

[Fourth production form]
In the fourth effect mode shown in FIG. 10, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). , The starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D), and the game ball wins in this order. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established by winning the prize in the mouth. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 has a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a starting winning opening (first start). One of the winning openings and the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D), and the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth). The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of the general winning opening 50D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

In this way, the specific effect is executed on condition that the winning order to the general winning opening and other winning openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning opening is a specific order. By doing so, it is possible to be interested not only in the winning status of the general winning opening but also in the winning order of the general winning opening and other winning openings.

It should be noted that the number of times the game ball is continuously won in the general winning opening and the number of times the game ball is continuously won in the other winning openings may be set to have a range. For example, the winning condition may be satisfied by winning the starting winning opening three times or more in a row and then winning the general winning opening two or more times in a row. In addition, which of the plurality of general winning openings has won the prize, or which of the plurality of other winning openings has won the prize may also be a winning condition. For example, the winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 50A, and the second general winning opening 50B. Is also good. In addition, the order is not limited to the order in which the general winning opening is awarded after the starting winning opening is awarded, but the winning condition is that the starting winning opening is won after the general winning opening is won. May hold.

Further, the winning condition may be satisfied based on the fact that the winning order of the game balls to the plurality of general winning openings is a specific order. For example, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition is that the game ball wins a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B. When the first winning condition) is satisfied and the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the first general winning opening 50A, the second general winning opening 50B, and the third general winning opening 50B are further satisfied. The winning condition (the second winning condition) may be satisfied by the game ball winning a prize in a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D.

Further, the winning conditions may be satisfied based on the winning of the game balls to a plurality of general winning openings and the winning order of the game balls to one or a plurality of starting winning openings in a specific order. .. For example, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition is that the game ball wins in the order of the first general winning opening 50A, the first starting winning opening, and the second general winning opening 50B. When the first winning condition) is satisfied and the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the first general winning opening 50A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 50B, Further, even if the winning condition (the second winning condition) is satisfied by winning the game ball in the order of the third general winning opening 50C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 50D. good.

In addition, the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the starting winning opening is not limited to the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the large winning opening, and the winning is based on a specific order. The conditions may be satisfied, and the winning conditions are satisfied based on the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the first passing gate 41A or the second passing gate 41B in a specific order. You may do so. In addition, when a specific area where the jackpot type (for example, probability variation jackpot) is determined based on the entry of the game ball is provided, the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the specific area is specific. The winning conditions may be satisfied based on the order.

In addition, in the 1st effect mode to the 4th effect form, the example of executing the fluctuation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) as the specific effect has been described, but the look-ahead advance notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. You may.

[Fifth production form to eighth production form]
In the fifth effect mode to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 11, unlike the first effect form to the fourth effect form, there are (1) a normal state and (2) a probable change state or a time saving state. , The winning conditions are not different, and they are common winning conditions. In the examples of the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, the first prize condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, that is, the prize condition adopted in the normal state is provided as a common prize condition, respectively. ing. Then, (1) when the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the fluctuation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is a probabilistic state or a time saving state, a look-ahead notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as a specific effect. As a result, the type of the specific effect can be changed according to the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and the specific effect executed based on the game ball winning the general winning opening. You can improve your interest.

In the fifth effect mode shown in FIG. 11, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the specific effect at a rate of 50% when the winning condition is satisfied. Then, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and the winning history of the winning history storage area, and The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) a probability change state or a time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is executed. , And the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 11, the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific effect A when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state. Each time the specific effect A is executed, both the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) a probability change state or a time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the specific effect A is supported. The winning history of the winning history storage area and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted.

In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 issues a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 controls the jackpot game state. Is received, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted. Further, in the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the gaming state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probabilistic state or the time saving state to the normal state. Is also good.

In the seventh effect mode, the timer for the specific effect is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. .. Then, when the timer for the specific effect times out, neither the specific effect A nor the specific effect B is executed, and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are displayed. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied before the timer for the specific effect times out, (1) in the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning history and the specific effect B in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. The winning history of the winning history storage area of the above is deleted, and (2) in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and the winning history and the specific effect of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. The winning history of the winning history storage area of B is deleted.

[9th production form to 12th production form]
In the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 12, unlike the first effect form to the eighth effect form, there are (1) a normal state and (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state. , The winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state, the fluctuation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. If is satisfied, the look-ahead notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. As a result, the execution rate of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect can be different depending on the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific production performed based on the above.

In the ninth effect mode shown in FIG. 12, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a game ball in either the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B. Each time a prize is won, a prize condition (which is regarded as the first prize condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is decided at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the time saving state, each time the game ball wins in any of the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is decided at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the tenth effect mode shown in FIG. 12, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has one in both the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B, respectively. When the game ball wins more than once, the winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 has two or more game balls in both the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied by winning the prize, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 issues a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 controls the jackpot game state. Is received, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted. Further, in the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, the prize history in the prize history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the game state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probabilistic state or the time saving state to the normal state. Is also good.

In the eleventh effect mode shown in FIG. 12, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 enters the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B within 120 seconds. When the game ball wins a prize three times or more in total, the winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the time saving state, the game balls are awarded to the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D a total of five times or more. As a result, the winning condition (which is regarded as the second winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the eleventh effect mode, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A. Then, when the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the timer for the specific effect A times out, the specific effect A is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted. Further, the timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B. Then, when the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted without executing the specific effect B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is satisfied in the probabilistic state or the time saving state before the timer for the specific effect B times out, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted. Will be done.

In the twelfth effect mode shown in FIG. 12, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a first start winning opening, a first starting winning opening, and a second general winning opening 50B. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in this order. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 has a second start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a third general winning opening 50C, and a fourth general winning opening. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of 50D. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

As in the 9th to 12th production forms, the general winning openings (general winning openings and starting winning openings in the 12th production form) that are the targets of winning the game ball for executing the specific effect are determined according to the game state. By making them different, the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the game state. In addition, in the 9th effect mode to the 12th effect form, in order to establish the target winning opening to be won in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state and the second winning condition in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. An example is shown in which the target winning openings to be awarded are all different, but not limited to this form, the target winning openings in the normal state and the target winning openings in the probabilistic state or the time saving state are partially different. It may be common. For example, both the first winning condition and the second winning condition may include the winning of the second general winning opening 50B.

[13th production form to 16th production form]
In the thirteenth effect mode to the sixteenth effect form shown in FIG. 13, the ratio of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. However, when the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is (2) outside the period of the reach fluctuation or the period before the establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is higher.

Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is, specifically, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop) after the reach state is established in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach). It is the period until the symbol) is stopped and displayed. In addition, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is specifically the period during which the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) is executed. It is the period from the start of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) to the period before the reach state is established.

The first prize condition and the second prize condition in the thirteenth production form to the sixteenth production form are the same as the first prize condition and the second prize condition in the first production form to the fourth production form, respectively. It has become. In any of the production forms, when the timing when the first prize condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is determined by the second prize condition. When the established timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A. In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[17th production form to 20th production form]
In the 17th effect mode to the 20th effect form shown in FIG. 14, when the timing at which the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is satisfied. When (2) the period outside the reach variation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach variation is established, the specific effect B is executed.

The winning conditions in the 17th production form to the 20th production form are the same as the prize conditions (common winning conditions) in the 5th production form to the 8th production form, respectively. In any of the production forms, if the timing at which the winning condition (common winning condition) is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established due to the reach fluctuation, the specific production A is executed and the winning condition is satisfied. If the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[21st production form to 24th production form]
In the 21st effect mode to the 24th effect form shown in FIG. 15, when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed. If the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 21st production form to the 24th production form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 9th production form to the 12th production form, respectively. It has become. In any of the production forms, if the timing when the first prize condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the second prize condition is satisfied. If the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, and different types of specific effect are executed according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied. It is possible to improve the interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

[25th production form and 26th production form]
In the 25th effect mode shown in FIG. 16, unlike the 1st effect mode to the 24th effect form, the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D) is used regardless of the game state or the game period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of three or more times. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. In addition, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of five or more times in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D) regardless of the game state or the game period. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the 26th effect mode shown in FIG. 16, unlike the 1st effect mode to the 24th effect form, the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general) is within 120 seconds regardless of the gaming state or the game period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won a prize in the winning opening 50D) three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. In addition, regardless of the game state or the game period, the second prize is obtained by winning a total of five or more game balls in the general prize openings (first general prize opening 50A to fourth general prize opening 50D) within 120 seconds. The condition is met. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In this way, the number of prizes in the general prize opening is increased by executing different effects according to the number of prizes in the general prize opening and the frequency of winning (the number of prizes in the predetermined period) regardless of the game state and the game period. And the frequency of winning can be interesting. In this example, the production mode (output voice) differs depending on the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency, and the variable display to be notified is different (specific production A: variable display being executed, Specific effect B: Variable display that has not been executed, but is not limited to this, and whether or not to suggest the display result of variable display differs depending on the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency (variable display). For example, the effect of notifying the display result of the variable display and the effect not related to the display result of the variable display may be executable, and the effect of suggesting the gaming state or not is different (for example, high probability). It may be possible to execute an effect of notifying the state and an effect not related to the gaming state).

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command to generate a prize in the general winning opening, and the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. It is possible to identify which of the game balls has won a prize, and that a prize has been generated in the start winning opening by receiving the start winning opening designation command, and which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has won the game. It is possible to identify whether or not the ball has won a prize, and it is possible to identify that a prize has been generated in the large winning opening by receiving the large winning opening winning command. Therefore, as the winning number management table, the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 17 can be stored and updated.

The second start winning opening is formed by a normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is open-controlled (opening in which the game ball can win or is easy to win from a closed state where the game ball does not win or is difficult to win By switching to the state), the game ball can be won. Further, the large winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled (the game ball can be won or is easy to win from the closed state where the game ball does not win or it is difficult to win. By switching to the open state), the game ball can be won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball device 7 are classified into a winning opening for which a game ball can be won by operating the accessory. On the other hand, the 1st general winning opening 50A to the 4th general winning opening 50D and the 1st starting winning opening are always open, and the game ball can be won regardless of the operation of the accessory. It is divided into.

In the prize number management table of FIG. 17, a game ball has won a prize in each of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening. The number of prize balls sometimes given (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15 in this example) is stored. Then, for each winning opening, the number of winnings (11,36,22,14,754,315,420 in this example), which is the number of times the game ball has won in the winning opening, is multiplied by the number of winning balls. The number of payouts (the total number of balls paid out by winning a game ball in the winning opening, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 in this example) is stored.

Then, as the winning ratio, (1) the number of winnings of each winning opening (11,36,22,14,754,315,420, respectively) with respect to the total number of winnings of each winning opening (1572 in this example). And (2) the total number of winnings in each winning opening (1572 in this example), the non-role winning opening (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D and 1st starting winning) The ratio of the number of winnings (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754), the ratio of the number of winnings (315 + 420) of the character winning opening (second starting winning opening and the large winning opening), and (3) the total number of winnings of each winning opening (3) In this example, the ratio of the number of winnings other than the large winning opening (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315) to 1572) and the ratio of the number of winnings of the large winning opening (420) are stored.

In addition, as the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts for each winning slot (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300, respectively) with respect to the total number of payouts for each winning slot (9268 in this example). And (2) the total number of payouts of each winning opening (9268 in this example), the non-role winning opening (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D and 1st starting winning) The ratio of the number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508), the ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) of the character winning slots (second starting winning slot and large winning slot), and (3) the total number of payouts of each winning slot (3) In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts other than the large winning opening (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508 + 630) to 9268) and the ratio of the number of payouts of the large winning opening (6300) are stored.

Here, as described above, during the period when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is set to the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Displayed on the device 5. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall is paid out by winning the game ball in the accessory winning opening for the total number of balls (9268) paid out by winning the game ball in each winning opening. It is possible to grasp the ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as "first payout ratio", which is 74.77% in this example). In addition, the total number of balls paid out due to the winning of the game ball (9268) in each winning opening is the number of balls (6300) paid out due to the winning of the game ball in the large winning opening. The ratio (hereinafter referred to as the "second payout ratio", which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

Here, when the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 120 shall notify the fact in a identifiable manner. .. In the example of FIG. 17, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted in a thick frame. Further, when the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%), the effect control CPU 120 shall notify the fact in a identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 17, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted in a thick frame.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 5, and compares the results with the predetermined first reference ratio and the second reference ratio. It can be displayed in a graspable manner. In addition, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, for example, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 5 by the setting of the display changeover switch 32 and the setting operation by the operation button 30. At best, when the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the settings of the amusement park side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the gaming state, and may be displayed, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and the second payout ratio to a gaming device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1 for gaming. In the device, the received first payout ratio and the second payout ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device. Further, the effect control CPU 120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management device such as a hall computer, and in the information management device, the first payout ratio and the second payout of each game machine. It is possible to store the ratio and display it on the display device.

Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 outputs the general winning opening designation command, the starting winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command to the effect control CPU 120, the external output information corresponding to these commands is output. Information that can identify which of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D the game ball has won, and the starting winning opening have been won. The corresponding gaming device provides information that can identify whether the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and information that can identify that a prize has occurred in the large winning opening. It shall be output to an external device such as (card unit, ring lamp device) or information management device (hall computer).

In order to make it possible to specify the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received the information in the above, it is possible to store the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 17 for each game machine and update it. This makes it possible to grasp the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each game machine. Further, for each game machine, it is possible to grasp whether or not the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether or not the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

Further, regarding the totaling period of the winning number information (values of each item in FIG. 3 or 17) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if no setting is made for the totaling period, the pachinko machine This is the period from when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is started until when the power supply is stopped. As the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table was reset (the number of winnings to each winning opening became 0), and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 was restarted. Occasionally, the number of winnings to each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is 0. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted without being backed up.

The aggregation period of the prize number information (values of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) stored in the prize number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set on the game hall side, for example, operation. It is possible to set the aggregation period (for example, 10 hours, 3 hours, etc.) related to the gaming machine by using the button 30. Further, in the game device (card unit or call lamp device), the clerk of the game hall inputs a desired totaling period by an input device or the like, and the input totaling period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 1, and the totaling period is transmitted. It may be set as (stored in RAM 122). Further, in the information management device (hall computer), the manager of the game hall inputs a desired totaling period by an input device or the like, and the input totaling period is the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the pachinko selected as the setting target). It may be transmitted to the game machine 1) and set as the aggregation period (stored in the RAM 122). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning number management table for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours) is created, and these are displayed on the image display device 5, or a gaming device (card) provided correspondingly. It is possible to output to the unit, the call lamp device) and display it on the display device of the game device, or output it to the information management device (hall computer) and display it on the display device of the information management device. ..

In addition, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is based on the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the external device that stores and updates information (values of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17), by setting the aggregation period by the input device provided in the external device, every set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours) It is possible to create a winning number management table and display it on a display device provided in an external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (card unit or call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning number management table for each predetermined period related to the corresponding gaming machine is displayed on the display device. When the external device is an information management device that manages game information for each gaming machine, it is possible to display the winning number management table for each predetermined period on the display device for each gaming machine. It becomes.

[27th production form]
The specific effect A and the specific effect B described above both foretell the variable display result in the special figure game depending on the effect mode, but are executed in connection with the winning of the game ball to the general winning openings 50A to 50D. As a specific effect, it is also possible to execute an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game. In FIG. 18, a specific effect C (point-giving effect) is illustrated as an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game.

In the 27th effect mode shown in FIG. 19 and the 29th effect mode described later, each time a game ball wins a prize in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, a specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124. Whether or not the specific effect C is executed is determined based on the execution decision random number, and if it is determined to be executed, the specific effect C is executed. When the specific effect C is executed, the total points of the point storage areas formed in the RAM 122 are added by 1, and as shown in FIG. 18, the image display device 5 contains an image containing the characters "1 point". 2000 is displayed.

That is, every time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, a lottery is performed as to whether or not one point is given, and the lottery is won. In this case, the point giving effect in which 1 point is given is executed. Benefits are given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

For example, when the total points reach 5 (when winning 5 times), the image display device 5 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. .. Further, when the total points reach 10 (when winning 10 times), the image display device 5 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server. The player can access the music providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

In the 27th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the rate is 80%. Execute the specific effect C. The effect control CPU 120 issues a fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game and a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the fluctuation pattern such as the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

As with the specific effect A and the specific effect B, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C is provided. Every time the specific effect C is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, which is a winning condition, is won. History is included) is deleted.

Here, the total points of the point storage area formed in the RAM 122 are set to 10 regardless of the winning history of the winning history storage area (even if the winning history of the winning history storage area is deleted, it is not reset). After reaching 0 (in this example, after the two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), the value is reset to 0, and 1 is added again as the specific effect C is executed.

In the 27th effect mode and the 29th effect form described later, a specific effect is generated based on (1) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate of execution is lower than the rate of (2) the specific effect being executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). It is set. During the period (1), the player is usually given a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is able to execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point-giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game, the execution status of the special figure game and the number of reserved memories are determined. However, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when an effect related to the variable display result in the special figure game is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is determined by (2) the variable display of the special symbol is executed. If the period is not set (outside the symbol change period), there is no target for the change result notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning of the general winning opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied (general winning). The specific effect is not executed at the timing when the prize is won in the mouth, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, resulting in a decrease in interest. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game as the specific effect.

In the 27th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). Is also good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 27th production form, (1) the game ball is specified based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). The rate at which the effect is executed is (2) the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). May be set to be high.

[28th production form]
In the 28th effect mode, unlike the 27th effect mode, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124. In the 28th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) , Does not execute the specific effect A.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the specific effect A is either a first mode in which only the voice effect is executed or a second mode in which the accessory effect is executed together with the voice effect. This is a variation result advance notice effect that suggests the possibility that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied, before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, the specific effect B is either a first mode in which only the voice effect is executed or a second mode in which the accessory effect is executed together with the voice effect. This is a look-ahead notice effect that suggests that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the specific effect C has a variable display display result (whether or not it becomes a big hit symbol) and a variable display display result (whether or not it becomes a hit symbol) related to the special figure game. It is a production that is not related to any of (), and points are given to the player according to the winning of the general winning opening.

As described above, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the specific effect A is not executed (the above-mentioned "" The process of "holding the execution of the specific effect A and executing it when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied" is not performed), and it is specified only in the period of (1). The effect A is executed. Every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize history of the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least one of the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, which is a winning condition, is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the 28th effect mode, as a specific effect, a specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed. I am trying to improve my interest in specific productions. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), there is a target of the fluctuation result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then specified when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied. When the effect A is executed, the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, which may rather reduce the interest. Therefore, in the 28th effect mode, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect A is not executed.

In the 28th production mode, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and when the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%. In such a form, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (in the general winning opening). The specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the prize), and then the specific effect A is executed when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied. In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is either the case of (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period) or the period of (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Also, the specific effect A may be executed, and the specific effect A may be executed at different ratios.

Further, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), the special feature being executed is further added. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may be different depending on the variable display result of the figure game, whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed, and the like. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to use the final decoration symbol as the jackpot symbol, the specific effect A is executed at a rate of 80%, and the final decoration symbol is set as the off symbol. If it has been decided, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th production form]
In the 29th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories). When (2) the number of reserved memories is 0 but the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) when the total number of reserved memories is 1 or more. In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the period during which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

That is, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, or at least it is determined to execute the variable display of the special symbol ((1) or (2) above). In the case of), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. If the decision to execute is not made (in the case of the period of (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

Every time the specific effect C is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, which is a winning condition, is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the 29th effect mode, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or at least it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol ((1) above). Or (in the case of the period of (2)), the rate at which the specific effect is executed is that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is set lower than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed when the decision to execute is not made (when the period is the period (3) above). During the periods (1) and (2), the effects corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the fluctuation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect) are being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. , The player is usually more interested in these effects including the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (3), the player is able to execute a specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the periods of (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point-giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game, the execution status of the special figure game and the number of reserved memories are determined. However, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when a look-ahead notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more is adopted as the specific effect, the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is the number of reserved memories. In the case of the period when is 0, there is no target of pre-reading notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning of the general winning opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more (the general winning opening is won). The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, resulting in a decrease in interest. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game as the specific effect.

In the 29th production mode, the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When it is decided to execute (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the specific effect C is not executed, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the special symbol is not executed. The specific effect C may be executed only when it is not decided to execute the variable display of (3) above (the period of (3) above). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 29th production form, is the variable display of the special symbol executed at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D? Or, at least when it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the rate at which the specific effect is executed. If it is not determined and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (in the case of the period of (3) above), the ratio may be set to be higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed.

In addition, the timing at which the variable display related to the special figure game is started (the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and includes simultaneous). In the case of, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the variable display is started, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, when the specific effect B or the specific effect C is satisfied), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is related to the special figure game of. In addition, the timing when the game ball wins the starting prize opening (the timing when the starting condition is satisfied) and the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and includes simultaneous). In some cases, the specific effect may be executed not immediately after the specific effect is executed, but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the number of reserved memories has increased. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, when the specific effect A or the specific effect C is satisfied), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is related to the special figure game of.

[30th production form]
In the thirtieth effect mode, unlike the 29th effect form, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124. In the thirtieth production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories). If the total number of reserved memories is within the period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. Is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), (3) the period during which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). If is, the specific effect B is not executed.

In this way, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2) or (3), the specific effect B is not executed. (The above-mentioned process of "holding the execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of stored storages becomes 1 or more" is not performed), and only when the period is (1). The specific effect B is executed. Every time the specific effect B is executed, the prize history of the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least one of the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, which is a winning condition, is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the thirtieth effect mode, as a specific effect, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) related to the variable display result of the special figure game held at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed. I try to improve my interest in directing. However, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (2) or (3) when the number of reserved memories is 0, there is no target of the look-ahead notice at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the specific effect B is set when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. If it is executed, the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, which may rather reduce the interest. Therefore, in the thirtieth effect mode, when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (the period in which the number of reserved memories is 0), the specific effect B is not executed. ..

In the thirtieth production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory). Will execute the specific effect B at a rate of 80%, and if it is the period (2) or (3) (within the period without hold memory), execute the specific effect B at a rate of 20%. You may do so. In such a form, when a prize is won in the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding memory), the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended. Every time (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. In this way, the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (1) (within the period with hold memory) and the period (2) or (3) (within the period without hold memory). ), The specific effect B may be executed, and the specific effect B may be executed at different ratios.

Further, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the period with the holding memory), the holding is further held. The execution ratio of the specific effect B differs depending on the variable display result of the special figure game related to memory and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the execution of the special figure game related to the reserved memory. You may do so. For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the start winning decision result specification command for designating the "big hit" is stored in the start winning command storage area (that is, the variable display result of the special figure game is the jackpot symbol). When is present), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and the start winning judgment result specification command for specifying "big hit" is not stored in the starting winning command storage area (that is,). If there is no hold memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game is a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st production form]
In the 31st production mode shown in FIG. 20, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (1) If it is within the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). In some cases, the specific effect C (point-giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) and the period (2). Different types of specific effects are to be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the general winning opening interested in the production performed when the game ball wins a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning openings 50A to 4 which are the winning conditions). (Including the winning history to any of the general winning openings 50D) is deleted.

In the 31st effect mode, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed for the specific effect. I am trying to improve my interest. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), there is a target of the fluctuation result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, if no specific effect is executed, the execution frequency of the specific effect will decrease. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the special effect game is related. If the specific effect A is executed when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, which may rather reduce the interest.

In the 31st effect mode, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable in the normal figure game is changed instead of the specific effect A. Such a problem can be avoided by executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which a specific effect of any type is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%) for each prize in the general prize opening, and any type is used for each prize in the general prize opening. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

[32nd production form]
In the 32nd production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories). If the total number of reserved memories is within the period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. Is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved memories is 0. In the case where the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1), the period (2), and ( Different types of specific effects are executed depending on the period of 3). As a result, it is possible to make the general winning opening interested in the production performed when the game ball wins a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general prize that is a winning condition). The winning history of any of the opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is included) is deleted.

In the 32nd production mode, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the pre-reading notice exists, the specific production B (pre-reading notice) (Direction) is executed, and if it is within the period of (2), that is, if the target of the look-ahead notice does not exist but the target of the change result notice exists, the specific effect A (change result notice effect) Is executed, that is, when neither the target of the look-ahead notice nor the target of the fluctuation result notice exists in the period of (3), the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed.

In this way, by selecting a specific effect that can be executed immediately when the game ball wins the general winning opening and executing this, the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening is appropriately improved. I try to let you. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which a specific effect of any type is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%) for each prize in the general prize opening, and any type is used for each prize in the general prize opening. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

In the 32nd production mode, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. Regardless of that, that is, regardless of whether or not the target of the fluctuation result notice exists, the look-ahead notice effect is executed. That is, in the case of "the target of the fluctuation result notice and the target of the look-ahead notice exist", the look-ahead notice effect is preferentially executed. Not limited to such a form, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing, the fluctuation result notice When the effect is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at that timing, the look-ahead notice effect may be executed. That is, when "the target of the fluctuation result notice and the target of the look-ahead notice exist", the fluctuation result notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modifications of the 27th production form to the 32nd production form]
Further, in the 27th effect mode to the 32nd effect mode, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be different depending on the state when the game ball wins the general winning opening. The "state" referred to here is a state generated as a result of a game in a game machine, and is a state based on the game in the game machine. The execution ratio of the specific effect shall be different according to the classification of the state. For example, in the 27th effect mode, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is within (1) the symbol fluctuation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect is performed at a rate of 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a probability change state or a time saving state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the (2) symbol fluctuation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%. If the gaming state at that time is a probability change state or a time saving state, the specific effect C shall be executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

Further, in the 27th effect mode to the 32nd effect mode, the type of the specific effect to be executed may be different depending on the state when the game ball wins the general winning opening. For example, in the 31st effect mode, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is within the (1) symbol change period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect A (change result notice). The effect) is executed, and if the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the (2) symbol fluctuation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed. If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

In this way, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the classification of the state for different types of the specific effect is (1) the game state is the normal state, or (2) the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state. Or, it is not limited to (1) whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. For example, it may be classified into (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation and (2) the period before the reach state is established in the reach variation. Also, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is being executed. It may be classified as. Further, it may be classified into (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good. Further, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be different according to the difference in these categories.

The specific effect C (point-giving effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. It has become like. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to the display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only feasible if. In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player with respect to whether or not to execute the specific effect C.

In addition, the specific effect C (point awarding effect) is not limited to the one in which 1 point is given for each winning in the general winning opening, and 2 points or 3 points are given for each winning in the general winning opening. It may be something that is done. The number of points to be awarded may differ depending on, for example, which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the game ball has won the general winning opening, for example. The gaming state may be different depending on the classification such as whether it is a normal state, a probabilistic state, or a time saving state.

Further, in the specific effect C (point awarding effect), points may be given according to factors other than winning the general winning opening. For example, points are given according to winning the starting winning opening. It may be done, or points may be given according to the establishment of the reach state or the like.

[33rd production form]
In FIG. 21, a specific effect D (gauge update effect) is illustrated as an effect in which the effect mode changes stepwise according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 21, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) refers to the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 displayed on the image display device 5 according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is a production that can be changed step by step from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages.

In the example of FIG. 21 (a), the filling area 2100a (black portion in the gauge image) in the gauge image 2100 is set to 0 steps according to the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning openings 50A to 50D. It has increased from (white part occupies 10/10) to 1 step (black part occupies 1/10 and white part occupies 9/10) (gauge +1). Further, in the example of FIG. 21B, the filling region 2100a in the gauge image 2100 has 0 to 3 stages (black portion) according to the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning openings 50A to 50D. Occupies 3/10 and the white part occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

In this way, when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 increases according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and reaches 10 stages (the black part in the gauge image occupies 10/10). In that case), a privilege shall be given to the player. For example, as in the case of the specific effect C described above, the image display device 5 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server, and the player can obtain the desired image or music from the image providing server or the music. It can be downloaded from the providing server to the information terminal.

Not limited to this, when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 stages, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 5, and a special music is output as BGM during the game. It may be possible. Alternatively, a variable result notice effect for notifying the possibility that the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game executed at the timing when the filling area 2100a reaches 10 stages may become a big hit symbol may be executed. It is also possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the possibility that the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game held at the timing when the area 2100a reaches 10 stages becomes a big hit symbol.

That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 stages may be an effect not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game. It may be an effect related to the variable display result in the game or the variable display result in the normal drawing game. Further, the effect may be related to the game state, or may be an effect not related to the game state. Further, a different effect may be executed every time the filling region 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 stages. Further, different effects may be executed depending on the gaming state or the like when the filling region 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 stages.

When the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 stages, a message to that effect is notified by displaying a message on the image display device 5, audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc., and then the gauge image 2100 The filling region 2100a in is reset to the 0 stage. After the reset, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 will be increased again according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening.

In the 33rd effect mode to the 37th effect mode shown in FIGS. 22 to 23, each time a game ball wins a prize in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, the identification extracted from the random number circuit 124 is specified. Based on the random number for determining the effect execution, it is determined whether or not to increase the stage of the filling region 2100a (hereinafter referred to as the gauge level) in the gauge image 2100 by one step, and if it is determined to execute, the gauge level is currently set. Increase by one step. That is, every time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the gauge level by one step. If you win, the gauge level will increase by one level.

In the 33rd production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) a rate of 80% when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increases the gauge level by one level. The effect control CPU 120 issues a fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game and a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the fluctuation pattern such as the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

As with the specific effects A to C, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) will be accompanied. The winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 33rd effect form, and the 34th effect form, the 36th effect form, and the 37th effect form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball is that (2) the game ball won the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Based on that, the gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. During the period (1), the player is usually given a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is able to increase the gauge level by increasing the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (1), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 33rd production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is within the period), the gauge level is not increased, and (2) it is possible to increase the gauge level when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Is also good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 33rd effect form, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol fluctuation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on (2) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). It may be set to be.

[34th production form]
In the 34th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game and a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and until the variable display of the special symbol is completed (the confirmed special symbol is It is possible to specify the remaining time (until the stop is displayed). For example, when the variation start command and the variation pattern specification command are received, the variation time of the special symbol specified by the variation pattern specification command is set as the value of the variation time timer, so that the effect control CPU 120 has the variation time. The remaining time until the timer value times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the special symbol ends (until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed). Further, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stopped symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the fluctuation time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 34th production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped in 10 seconds or more is (3) when the symbol is stopped in less than 10 seconds. It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed will be, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (3), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (3), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, in the 34th production form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 50A to the 4th general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased. It is possible, and if it is the period (3), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 34th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3). ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening when it takes less than 10 seconds to stop the symbol.

Further, in the 34th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game being executed and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative pattern that is executed when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2). If the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and if the display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, while the first general prize When the timing when the game ball wins in any of the mouth 50A to the fourth general winning mouth 50D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is the jackpot symbol. May increase the gauge level at a rate of 30%, and increase the gauge level at a rate of 10% when the displayed result is an out-of-order symbol.

[35th production form]
As described above, the specific effect B is illustrated as a look-ahead advance notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the reserved special figure game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 9B, is the start winning judgment result specification command for specifying "big hit" included in the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area? Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect is the first mode (audio effect only) or the second aspect (audio effect and accessory effect). That is, in the look-ahead notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter referred to as the target change) that is the target of the look-ahead notice is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target change. It has become difficult.

As a look-ahead notice effect, it is also possible to adopt an effect of notifying the target fluctuation. For example, as described above, in the start winning memory display area 5H, a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start prize. Is provided. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the start winning judgment result specification command, if it is a command that specifies "big hit", the display part corresponding to the command is displayed corresponding to the command that specifies "off". It is possible to execute a hold change effect that is displayed in a special mode (for example, gold) different from that of the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to a display portion displayed in a special mode, and the player can grasp the remaining variable display number of times to be executed until the target variation.

For example, if the command specifies "big hit" when the start winning judgment result specification command is received, the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. On the other hand, if the command specifies "missing" when the start winning judgment result specification command is received, the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 95%. The display part corresponding to the command shall be displayed in the normal mode. In this way, when the display part corresponding to the hold memory generated by the start prize is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start prize, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Every), it will move to the left, and when the start condition of the variable display game (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) corresponding to the display part of the special mode is satisfied, the special mode The display part disappears from the start winning memory display area 5H. In such an aspect, the hold change effect is executed during the period from the start winning to the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game corresponding to the starting winning.

That is, when the start conditions of the variable display game are satisfied according to the order in which the start conditions of the variable display game are satisfied, the hold change effect is executed, so that the display portion displayed in the special mode (the target of the hold change effect). Depending on the number of display parts in the normal mode (display information corresponding to the variable display hold memory that is not the target of the hold change effect) existing to the left of the variable display hold memory that is , It becomes possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display that is the target of the pending change effect is executed.

The timing of displaying the display portion in a special mode is not limited to the start winning prize. For example, at the time of winning a start, the display portion may be displayed in a normal mode, and after a predetermined effect is passed, the normal mode may be changed to a special mode, and the timing when the start condition is satisfied (display mode of each display part). May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing when the shift to the left). In these modes, from the timing when the display part corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice changes from the normal state to the special mode, until the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is satisfied. During the period, the pending change effect is being executed.

In the 35th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is determined by (1) the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed and the target change is also executed. If there is no period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the pending change effect and it is not the execution period of the target change), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more. In the case of the period (when there are two or more special figure games for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the ratio is 40%. Increases the gauge level by one level.

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 1. In the case of the period (when there is one special figure game in which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge is 20%. Level increases by one level.

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the look-ahead notice effect (in the hold change effect). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10% during the period during which the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is executed).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 35th production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more is up to (3) the target change. When the remaining variable display number of is 1, the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, (4) When the remaining variable display number until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) During the period), the gauge level is set higher than the rate of increase based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Further, in the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target change than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, in the 35th production form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased. It is possible, and if it is the period of (3) and (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 35th effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of remaining variable display times until the target fluctuation is 2 or more is (3) the remaining variable until the target fluctuation. It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of impressions is 1, and (4) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the execution period of the target fluctuation.

Further, in the 35th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the variable display result in the target fluctuation is displayed. When it becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and when the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, and the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general If the timing when the game ball wins in any of the winning openings 50D is the period (3), and the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 20%, and the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4). In the case of the period of, if the variable display result in the target fluctuation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 15%, and if the variable display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 10%. May be increased.

[36th production form]
In the 36th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period during which (2) variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed. In that case, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%.

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period during which (3) the variable display (reach variation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed. In the case of the period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) the period in which the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed and the reach state is established. In the case of the period after the establishment, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 36th production form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is general after (4) the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of a game ball in the winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the reach state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, in the 36th production form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (3), the gauge level is increased. It is possible, and if it is the period (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 36th production form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach fluctuation is executed and before the establishment of the reach state is (4). ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period in which the reach fluctuation is executed and in the period after the reach state is established.

[37th production form]
In the 37th effect mode shown in FIG. 23, the rate of increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol changing period). The gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the game ball wins a prize in either the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, when the game ball wins a prize in either the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 37th production form, the rate at which the gauge level increases differs between (1) within the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and further, the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between the case where the game ball wins in 50C and the case where the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D. Since the rate at which the gauge level increases differs depending on the general winning opening where the game ball wins, the player becomes interested in which general winning opening the game ball wins, which improves the interest. be able to.

For example, the first general prize provided near the edge of the game area 10 rather than the game ball winning in the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C provided near the center of the game area 10. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the mouth 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D. By making the gauge level higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening 50B and the 3rd general winning opening 50C, the interest in winning the general winning opening, which is more difficult to win, is increased. It is good to raise it.

In addition, in the 37th production form, when a game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening or the 4th general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and the 2nd general winning opening or the 3rd general winning opening can be used. If the game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 37th production form, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is the second general winning opening 50B. Alternatively, the gauge level may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the third general winning opening 50C.

[38th production form]
In the 38th effect mode to the 42nd effect mode shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124. Further, in the 38th effect mode to the 42nd effect form, the gauge level that increases with one winning of the general winning opening is not limited to one stage. For example, as shown in FIG. 21B, the gauge level may be increased by three steps according to one winning in the general winning opening.

In the 38th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one level (gauge +1), and (2) the gauge level is increased by three levels during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increase (gauge +3).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four or more winning histories of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 38th effect form, and the 39th effect form, the 41st effect form, and the 42nd effect form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening is performed during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of the game ball is (2) that the game ball won the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). It is set less than the number of gauge level steps that increase based on. During the period (1), the player is usually given a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (1), the interest of the specific production may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is increased by increasing the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. Is in a situation where it is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (1), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 38th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is within the period), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), and (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (2) In the case of (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps may be set to, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 38th production form, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol fluctuation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The number of stages in which the level increases is greater than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on (2) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). May be set to increase.

In addition, as a privilege given when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a privilege having a different value may be given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a two-dimensional code that can download only images may be displayed, or a two-dimensional code that can download images and music may be displayed. At this time, the privilege value given to the latter is larger than that to the former. The number of steps in which the gauge level increases may indicate the magnitude of the privilege value given when the gauge level reaches 10 steps. For example, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), and when the benefit value is large, the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. When the rate of increase is, for example, 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), and (2) the privilege value is small when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is 50% (the rate of changing only one step is 50%), and when the privilege value is large, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 80%. (The rate of changing only one step is 20%).

[39th production form]
In the 39th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by 3 steps (gauge +3). The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +2). The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four or more winning histories of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 39th production mode, (2) the number of gauge level steps that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when it takes 10 seconds or more to stop the symbol is (3) less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops. It is sometimes set higher than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed will be, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (3), the interest of the specific production may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (3), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 39th production mode, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the case of the period (3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step). Is 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 39th production form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (2). 3) When it takes less than 10 seconds to stop the symbol, the gauge level may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

Further, in the 39th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game being executed and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol that is executed when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2). If the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and if the display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps, while the 1st general winning opening 50A to the 4th general If the timing when the game ball wins in any of the winning openings 50D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is the jackpot symbol, the gauge level is set to two levels. If the number is increased and the displayed result is out of alignment, the gauge level may be increased by one step.

[40th production form]
In the 40th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is determined by (1) the pre-reading advance notice production is not executed and the target change is also executed. If there is no period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the hold change effect and it is not the execution period of the target change), the gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge +4).

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more. If the period is (when there are two or more special figure games for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge level is 3. Gradual increase (gauge +3).

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the look-ahead notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 1. If it is during the period (when there is one special figure game for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge level is increased by two steps. (Gauge +2).

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the look-ahead notice effect (in the hold change effect). The gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1) during the period during which the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is being executed).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 40th production mode, (2) the number of gauge level steps that increase based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the target change. The number of gauge level increases that increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display number up to 1 is 1, (4) When the remaining variable display number until the target change is 0 (target change) It is set more than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening during the execution period of. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Further, in the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target change than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 40th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level is set to 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period of (3) and (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (only one step). The rate of change may be 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 40th production form, (2) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until the target fluctuation is 2 or more is (3) the remaining until the target fluctuation. It may be set to be less than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the variable display count is 1, and (4) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the execution period of the target fluctuation.

Further, in the 40th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the variable display result in the target fluctuation is displayed. If it becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 4 steps, and if the variable display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and any of the 1st general winning opening 50A to the 4th general winning opening 50D. When the timing when the game ball wins the prize is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and the variable display result becomes an outlier symbol. The gauge level is increased by two steps, and when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (4), the variable display in the target fluctuation If the result is a big hit symbol, the gauge level may be increased by two steps, and if the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level may be increased by one step.

[41st production form]
In the 41st production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge +4). Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period during which (2) variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed. In that case, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps (gauge +3).

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period during which (3) the variable display (reach variation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed. If it is the period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +3), and (4) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is being executed and the reach state is established. In the subsequent period, the gauge level is increased by one level (gauge +1).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 41st production form, (3) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is (4) after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. It is set more than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (4), the interest of the specific production may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the reach state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 41st production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (3), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the case of the period (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step). Is 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 41st production form, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases during the period in which the reach fluctuation is executed and before the reach state is established is ( 4) The gauge level may be set to be less than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the period in which the reach fluctuation is executed and in the period after the reach state is established.

[42nd production form]
In the 42nd production mode shown in FIG. 25, the number of steps for increasing the gauge level is different depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol changing period). , Gauge level increases by 1 level (gauge +1). On the other hand, when the game ball wins a prize in either the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +2).

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increases the gauge level by 3 levels (gauge +3). On the other hand, when the game ball wins a prize in either the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge +4).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 42nd production form, the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased is different between (1) within the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and further, the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning The number of steps of the gauge level to be increased is different depending on whether the game ball wins the mouth 50C or the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D. Since the number of gauge level stages to be increased differs depending on the general winning opening that the game ball has won, the player becomes interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the interest is improved. Can be made to.

For example, the first general prize provided near the edge of the game area 10 rather than the game ball winning in the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C provided near the center of the game area 10. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the mouth 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D, the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D. By making the number larger than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, for winning a prize in a general winning opening that is more difficult to win. It's a good idea to enhance your interest.

In the 42nd production mode, when a game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening or the 4th general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by 2 steps or more is, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only 1 step is 20). %), And when a game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening or the 3rd general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by 2 steps or more is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only 1 step is 80%). Is also good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 42nd production form, the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is the second general winning opening. The gauge level may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 50B or the third general winning opening 50C.

[Modification example of 33rd production form to 42nd production form]
Determine the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form, which is a reference division for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level in the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form. The criteria for this is not limited to the above example. For example, the division for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level and the division for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased are as follows: (1) the gaming state is the normal state, or (2) the gaming state is It may be classified as a probabilistic state or a time saving state. Further, it may be classified as (1) whether the number of reserved storage is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved storage is 0. Further, it may be classified into (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good.

Although the gauge image 2100 is displayed even when the filling region 2100a is at the minimum 0 stage, a condition for displaying the gauge image 2100 may be provided. For example, the gauge image 2100 is displayed when the game state is the normal state, and the effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed, but the gauge image 2100 is not displayed when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state (gauge). The effect of increasing the level may not be executed).

The display of the gauge image 2100 and the effect of increasing the gauge level are executed during the period when the predetermined effect is executed, and may not be executed during the period when the predetermined effect is not executed. For example, the gauge image 2100 is displayed when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening only during the period when the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 is a predetermined background image (predetermined production stage period). Or the gauge level may be increased. In addition, the game ball wins the general winning opening only during the period when the display portion in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, white suggesting that the display portion may change to a special mode). The gauge image 2100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is simultaneously executed at the timing when the RTC (real-time clock) (not shown) provided on the effect control board 12 reaches a predetermined time (when the game machine of the same model reaches the predetermined time). When the effect) is executed, the gauge image 2100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the execution period of the simultaneous effect.

Further, when the gauge level is increased, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, different production sounds may be output according to the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. For example, when the gauge level is increased by three steps, it is compared with the case where the gauge level is increased by one step. The volume of the production sound may be increased.

Further, it is preferable to output the effect sound that increases the gauge level at a volume different from the effect sound related to the special figure game and the effect sound related to the normal figure game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be louder than the volume of the effect sound related to the normal figure game, but may be lower than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game. Further, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be higher than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game, but may be lower than the volume of the error sound for notifying the game machine error.

Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the volume in the normal state may be louder than the volume in the probabilistic state or the time saving state.

In addition, the specific effect in which the effect mode changes stepwise according to the winning of the general winning opening is not limited to the specific effect D that changes the gauge level, and the mode of the displayed character is stepwise. It may change (for example, the size of the displayed character increases or the items owned by the character change), and the characters that can be selected by the player gradually increase. Is also good. Further, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed stepwise, and the emission color of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed stepwise. Further, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be changed stepwise.

As with the other specific effects A to C, which are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) can be switched depending on the display setting table of FIG. It has become like. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to the display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only feasible if. In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player with respect to whether or not to execute the specific effect D.

[43rd production form]
The above-mentioned specific effects A to D are all effects that are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not win the general winning opening. You can do it. For example, when the game ball does not win any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D during the 10-minute game period, the effect control CPU 120 has, as shown in FIG. 26, It is possible to execute a specific effect E that displays an image imitating the form of a general winning opening and a notification image 2200 or the like including the characters "There is no general winning" on the image display device 5.

In this way, the specific effect is not limited to the effect executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening, but the effect executed based on the fact that the game ball does not win in the general winning opening (general winning). It may be a production that suggests the difficulty of winning a prize in the mouth). That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event of winning a game ball to a general winning opening (an effect executed when a game event occurs or a game event does not occur).

In the 43rd effect mode shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period during which the game ball has not won a prize in the general winning opening. When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a general winning opening from the game control microcomputer 100. When either the designated command or the large winning opening winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer and the timer is started. Then, if the general winning opening designation command is received before the non-winning judgment timer times out (10 minutes before the timer set), 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning judgment timer, and then again. Start the timer.

On the other hand, when the non-winning determination timer times out because the general winning opening designation command is not received before the non-winning determination timer times out, the notification image 2200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The specific effect E to be displayed is executed. When the specific effect E is executed, 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the broadcast image 2200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The value of the non-winning determination timer in this case is a value according to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and executes the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If the command is not received, the game end determination is performed to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended, the processing due to the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed during the period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the processing caused by the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, the detection of the timeout when the timer value becomes 0). Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command while the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended. , Resume updating the non-winning judgment timer.

That is, the non-winning determination timer is updated during the period during which the player is playing the game (the game end determination is not made), and is generally 10 minutes during the period during which the player is playing the game. When the number of winnings in the winning opening becomes 0, a time-out occurs (the time-out is detected by the effect control CPU 120). As a result, when the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed if no prize is generated in the general winning opening for 10 minutes.

In the above-mentioned production mode, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game based on whether or not the game ball is being fired toward the game area 10. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 10, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. You can do it. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game according to whether or not the hitting ball operation handle 63 is operated (whether or not the firing motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

In this way, if the general winning opening is not won in the predetermined period (10-minute game period) even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed. Notify that no prize has been awarded to the general prize opening. By this notification, the player can grasp that no prize has been generated in the general winning opening and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for selecting a machine) when playing a game. Further, in the amusement park, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the specific effect E is executed frequently), the game nails are used so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening is higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on the machine.

Further, if the general winning opening is not won even though the game is played by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not played by the player. When no prize has been awarded to the general winning opening, the non-winning determination timer is paused (the effect control CPU 120 is prevented from executing the process based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer). Execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the general winning opening has not been won because the player has not played the game. In this case, the game The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than when it is determined that the general winning opening has not been won even though the game is being played by the person.

[44th production form]
As the specific effect E, it is not limited to the one that notifies that the general winning opening has not been won within the predetermined period (the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than 1), but is not limited to the general one within the predetermined period. It is also possible to notify identifiable that the number of winnings in the winning opening is less than a predetermined number. In the 44th effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening in a predetermined period. When the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a general winning opening from the game control microcomputer 100. When either the designated command or the large winning opening winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 122 is set to 0. Then, during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer set), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area each time a general winning opening designation command is received.

Then, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect within the predetermined period in the specific effect E. Notify that the number of winnings is less than a predetermined number and / or notify the number of winnings within a predetermined period. For example, the message "The number of general prizes for 30 minutes is less than 3" and / or the message "The number of general prizes for 30 minutes is only 1" is displayed on the image display device 5.

When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is set again as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value according to the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect E. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or more than a predetermined predetermined number (for example, 3), the winning number determination timer does not execute the specific effect E. Set 30 minutes as the value again and start the timer again.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and executes the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If the command is not received, the game end determination is performed to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended, the processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to the time-out of the winning number determination timer is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed during the period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the winning number determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the processing caused by the winning number determination timer timing out (specifically, the detection of the timeout when the timer value becomes 0). Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command while the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended. , Resume updating the winning number determination timer.

That is, the winning number determination timer is updated during the period during which the player is playing the game (the game end determination is not made), and 30 minutes have elapsed within the period during which the player is playing the game. (The time-out is detected by the effect control CPU 120). At the time of the time-out, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes is less than the predetermined number.

In the above-mentioned production mode, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game based on whether or not the game ball is being fired toward the game area 10. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 10, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. You can do it. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game according to whether or not the hitting ball operation handle 63 is operated (whether or not the firing motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

In this way, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period (30-minute game period) is less than the predetermined number even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed. It is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the frequency of winning a prize in the general winning opening is low and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for selecting a machine) when playing a game. Further, in the amusement park, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the specific effect E is executed frequently), the game nails are used so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening is higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on the machine.

Further, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is performed by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 120 executes a process based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer). By not doing so), the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the game is not performed by the player. , In this case, the specific effect is lower than the case where it is determined that the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is played by the player. E may be executed.

[45th production form]
In the 43rd effect mode and the 44th effect mode, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time. Although it was decided to execute the specific effect E regardless of the above, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be different depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 45th production mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, (1) the specific effect E is executed when it is in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is not executed when it is in the probability change state or the time saving state.

The gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1). ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. You may. In this way, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E at a different ratio according to the game state when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[46th production form]
In the 43rd effect mode and the 44th effect mode, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time. Regardless of the above, it was decided to execute the specific effect E in a common mode, but the effect mode of the specific effect E may be different depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 46th production mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output) in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is performed in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state. It is executed in two modes (image display only).

Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is to notify the image display device 5 of the fact by displaying an image indicating that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. A mode in which notification is performed by voice output in which voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which notification is performed only by image display and notification by voice output is not performed.

The gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1). ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of, for example, 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), and (2) in a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. May execute the specific effect E in the first aspect at a rate of, for example, 20% (execute in the second aspect at a rate of 80%). In this way, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E in a different mode according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modifications of the 43rd production form to the 46th production form]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is the display setting table of FIG. 4 like the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. The execution can be switched according to the above. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to the display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only feasible if. In this way, the intentions of the amusement park and the player can be reflected in whether or not the specific effect E is executed.

For example, if the game hall side does not want to execute the specific effect E, by switching the display changeover switch 32 to the non-display setting (first position), the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting. .. With such a configuration, the intention of the amusement park side is prioritized and reflected regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning the general winning opening. Can be made to.

Further, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect mode, the value of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect mode, and the value of the winning number counter area, which are stored in the RAM 122, are all electric. It is not backed up at the time of disconnection, and when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, it is deleted accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect mode and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect mode are both invalid. Therefore, the value of the timer is not referred to until the predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the 44th effect mode becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted.

In this way, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is erased without being backed up, and when the power supply is restarted, the addition is started again from 0. become. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a control burden that requires a backup means at the time of power failure.

As in the 45th effect mode and the 46th effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the division for making the effect mode of the specific effect E different is (1) whether the gaming state is the normal state or (2) ) The gaming state is not limited to the probabilistic state or the time saving state. For example, it may be classified as (1) whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified into (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation and (2) the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. Also, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is being executed. It may be classified as. Further, it may be classified into (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good. Further, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the mode of the specific effect E may be different depending on the difference in these categories.

The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is executed when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined game period is less than the predetermined number. Not limited to such a form, among the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, only a specific general winning opening is targeted, and the number of winnings to the specific general winning opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when the number is less. For example, only the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, which have a higher frequency of winning the game ball than the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D, are targeted at the general winning opening 50C during a predetermined game period. The number of prizes won may be counted, and the specific effect E may be executed when the counted number of prizes is less than a predetermined number.

Further, in the 43rd to 46th production forms, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening within a certain time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is less than the predetermined number, the specific production E is executed. However, the period for determining the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of times the special figure game is executed, and may be, for example, a period in which the variable display related to the special figure game is executed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the game machine to the present time, or may be a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period controlled to a predetermined gaming state, for example, a period controlled to a normal state (a period in which a game is played by left-handed), a probabilistic state or a shortened time. It may be a period controlled by the state (a period during which the game is played by hitting right).

Further, the following method may be used as a method for determining whether or not the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

(A) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number with respect to the predetermined number of hit balls fired in the game area 10. While the launch motor included in the hit ball launcher is being driven, approximately 100 game balls are launched into the game area 10 in one minute. Therefore, for example, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number for the number of shots of 1000 balls (corresponding to the game period of 10 minutes), the specific effect E may be executed. .. In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio, the specific effect E is executed. You may.

Further, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 10 differs depending on whether the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio or greater than or equal to the predetermined ratio. A specific effect may be executed. For example, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 10 is low, the character A appears and the frequency of winning to the general winning opening is low. Character B appears when the ratio of the number of winning balls to the general winning opening to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio. Then, it is notified that the frequency of winning the general winning opening is at a medium level, and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 10 is higher than the medium ratio. In the case of a ratio, the character C may appear to notify that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is high.

(B) It may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to winning a prize in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. For example, if 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning in the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes. When the number is less than 30 (three prizes), the specific effect E may be executed. Further, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening for the predetermined number of shot balls (for example, 1000 shots) fired in the game area 10 is less than the predetermined number. May be determined, and the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning of the general winning opening to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is calculated, and the ratio is predetermined. When the ratio is lower than the ratio of, the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 10 is lower than the predetermined ratio and more than the predetermined ratio. It is also possible to execute a specific effect of a different aspect depending on the case.

In this way, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number. It should be noted that such a form can be applied even in the case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on the general prize opening in which the game ball is won.

(C) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to the predetermined number of winnings to the starting winning opening (for example, 100). The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening is greater than the predetermined number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the starting winning opening (for example, 10000). It may be determined whether or not there are few prize balls, and the prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the general prize opening for the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the starting prize opening. The specific effect E may be executed when the ratio of the numbers is calculated and the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning in the general winning opening to the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning in the starting winning opening is lower than the predetermined ratio. And, depending on the case where the ratio is equal to or more than a predetermined ratio, the specific effect of different modes may be executed.

Further, for example, the total number of prize balls paid out during the predetermined period when the game state is in the normal state (according to the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning of the starting winning opening and the winning of the general winning opening). When the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the general winning openings is calculated and the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio to the total number of prize balls paid out). , The specific effect E may be executed. In addition, a specific effect of a different mode may be executed according to the ratio.

(D) It may be determined whether or not the number of prizes to the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number (for example, twice) for the predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the game machine. , The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the consumption amount in the game machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In such a form, a different predetermined number (for example, 4 yen is twice, 1 yen is 8) depending on the rental unit price (for example, 4 yen or 1 yen) of the game medium used for the game machine. (Times, etc.) or different predetermined ratios (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 yen for 1 yen, etc.) are applied. In addition, the specific effect of different modes is executed depending on whether the ratio of the number of prizes to the general winning opening to the consumption amount of the game machine is lower than the predetermined ratio or more than the predetermined ratio. You may try to do it.

[47th production form]
In the 47th effect mode shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, and within the period in which the character is displayed, the first starting winning opening is entered. Effective start winning of the game ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value) and the game to the second starting winning opening Based on the occurrence of any of the valid start winnings of the ball (that is, the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value). In the start winning prize memory display area 5H, a hold change effect is executed in which the display portion corresponding to the hold variable display game including the variable display game based on the generated effective start prize is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. ..

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 holds the display portion corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize to be displayed in a special mode from the beginning without going through the normal mode, based on the occurrence of the effective start prize. You may try to perform a change effect. For example, when a new effective start prize occurs, the displayed character takes an action such as swinging up the cane, and the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new effective start prize. May be displayed in a special mode instead of the normal mode (from the beginning of the display of the hold information, the hold information in the special mode corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is finally satisfied exists).

Here, in the 47th effect form, and in the 48th effect form and the 49th effect form described later, each time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening, the random number circuit 124 A random number for character determination is extracted from. Then, based on the extracted random numbers for character determination, whether or not to make the character appear, and when making the character appear, which of the characters A to C is to appear is determined in the character determination table of FIG. 28. Determined at the indicated rate.

It should be noted that the random number for character determination may be extracted by the effect control CPU 120 only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting a random number for character determination on the condition that the character is not controlled in the jackpot game state, it is possible to limit the character from appearing during the period controlled in the jackpot game state. .. Further, by not extracting the random number for character determination after the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is executed, it is possible to prevent the character from appearing after the reach state is established.

In the example of FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the character A appears at a rate of 10% when receiving the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the first general winning opening 50A. It is decided to make character B appear at a rate of 30%, and to make character C appear at a rate of 60%. In addition, when receiving the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the second general winning opening 50B, it is decided that no character appears at a rate of 50%, and character A appears at a rate of 35%. It is decided to make the character B appear at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to make the character C appear at a rate of 5%.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the third general winning opening 50C, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 90%, and 10%. It is decided that the character C appears at a rate. In addition, when receiving the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the 4th general winning opening 50D, it is decided that no character appears at a rate of 75%, and character C appears at a rate of 25%. Decide to let.

That is, in this example, when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B provided in the left game area 10A, the third general winning opening 50A provided in the right game area 10B. Characters will appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in either the general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D. The player fires a game ball into the left game area 10A when the game state is in the normal state, and fires the game ball into the right game area 10B when the game state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. Therefore, in the normal state, the probabilistic change Characters will appear at a higher rate than in the state or time saving state.

Then, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect form, the specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) is based on the fact that the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, reach state) are satisfied during the period in which the character is displayed. , Specific effect G (variation result notice effect by dialogue)) is executed, so in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state. Specific effects can be executed at a rate.

As described above, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous as compared with the probabilistic state and the time saving state, and the player's game, for example, the interest in the variable display of the special figure game is low, so that the appearance frequency of the character and the specific effect By increasing the frequency of execution, we are trying to improve the interest. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, it is advantageous as compared with the normal state, and the player is highly interested in the game, for example, the variable display of the special figure game. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect If the price remains high, it may spoil the interest. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 28, even when a game ball wins in the same general winning opening, the ratio of characters appearing may be different depending on the game state, for example, the normal state. In, when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B, a character appears at a rate of 50%, but when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B in a probabilistic state and a time saving state, 10%. Characters may appear at the rate of.

Further, the character can appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. In this way, in order to "make the execution ratio of the effect in one state different from the execution ratio of the effect in the other state", the effect can be executed only in one state, and the effect is not executed in the other state. Shall be included. Further, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 28, the appearance rate of the character in the probabilistic state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance rate of the character in the normal state.

Further, in the example of FIG. 28, when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A, the characters appear at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B. There is. Further, when the game ball wins the 4th general winning opening 50D, the characters appear at a higher rate than when the game ball wins the 3rd general winning opening 50C. In this embodiment, when the game ball is launched into the left game area 10A, the game ball wins more frequently in the second general winning opening 50B than in the first general winning opening 50A, and in the right game area 10B. When the game ball is launched, the game ball wins more frequently in the third general winning opening 50C than in the fourth general winning opening 50D. That is, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where it is difficult for the game ball to win, the character appears at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win. On the contrary, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win, the character has a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where it is difficult for the game ball to win. It may be made to appear.

Further, in the example of FIG. 28, the characters that may be displayed when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B, which are frequently won in the normal state, are Although the characters are A to C, they may be displayed when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D, which are frequently won in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. Character C is the only character with. In the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, which are the game states in which the game interest is higher than that in the normal state, the situation that "the character appears but the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the character display period elapses" occurs. Since it is possible that the display period will be lowered, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 28, even when a game ball wins in the same general winning opening, the characters appearing may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, the first character may appear. 2 Characters A to C may be displayed when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 50B, but a character when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B in a probabilistic state and a time saving state. It may be possible that only C is displayed. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 28, the number of characters that may be displayed in the probabilistic state and the normal state should be larger than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. You may.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a display period of each character displayed on the image display device 5. It is assumed that all of the characters A to C are immediately displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning of the general winning opening. That is, since the character is displayed immediately after the winning of the general winning opening, the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning opening has occurred.

When character A is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (effective start winning, reach state is established) within 1 minute from the start of display, the display of character A is started. When the character A is erased from the screen at the timing when 1 minute has passed, and (2) a predetermined condition is satisfied within 1 minute from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect)) based on the condition is satisfied. ), Character A is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (including a condition related to the effect executed as the game progresses). Even if a valid start prize is generated, if the number of pending variable display games including the variable display game corresponding to the valid start prize is 1, the start condition is satisfied for the variable display game. Since the start condition is satisfied immediately after the game is executed (the hold information is deleted), it becomes difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change effect by the displayed character. Therefore, if the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start prize is less than the predetermined number (1 in this example), the hold change effect is not executed, and the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start prize is the predetermined number. If there are more than 1 in this example, the hold change effect may be executed.

Further, the character may be erased even when the game shifts to the big hit game state or when the game end determination is performed by the effect control CPU 120 described above. Further, the character displayed on the image display device 5 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped shall not be displayed again after the power supply is restarted. That is, it is assumed that the backup process for displaying the character displayed before the power failure on the image display device 5 again after restarting the power supply is not performed.

It should be noted that the execution of the specific effect F (hold change effect) is caused by the appearing character performing a predetermined action (that is, with the change in the mode of the displayed object), and is stored in the hold memory. It is assumed that both the case where the mode of the corresponding display part is changed and the case where the mode is not changed are included. Further, the timing at which the specific effect F (hold change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the appearing character 3000 (book) In the example, the character A is used, but the flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the cane 3001 possessed by the specific effect F (the character B may appear or the character C may appear) is stored in each hold memory. This is the timing at which the action effect that covers the corresponding display portion is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

Further, the fact that the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed means that the appearing character 3100 (character B in this example, but the specific effect G) is executed, as shown in FIGS. 32 (f) and 32 (g). (In some cases, character A may appear or character C may appear in the variation result advance notice effect)) utters a predetermined line, and the timing at which the specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect) ends is This is the timing at which the character's dialogue is displayed for a certain period of time (a predetermined dialogue display period has elapsed).

When character B is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) If the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (effective start winning, reach state is established) within 2 minutes from the start of display, the display of character B is started. When the character B is erased from the screen at the timing when 2 minutes have passed, and (2) the predetermined condition is satisfied within 2 minutes from the start of the display, the specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect) based on the condition is satisfied. ), Character B is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

When character C is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) If the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, establishment of reach state) are not satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, the display of character C starts. Character C is erased from the screen when 3 minutes have passed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect)) based on the condition is satisfied. ), Character C is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

In this way, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 5, which is the state after the game ball has won the general winning opening to the player. You can make them recognize that. Further, the period in which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed by satisfying the predetermined condition, and even if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period in which the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on is not executed, the player recognizes that "if the specified condition is satisfied while the character is displayed, the specific effect is executed", and the game is played in order to satisfy the predetermined condition. It will be done, and the interest of the game will be enhanced until the specific production is executed.

In addition, since the display period differs depending on the displayed character, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is displayed. The player who confirms the type of the character can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period in which a predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest until the specific production is executed.

Further, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the setting ratio of the specific period in which the predetermined condition must be satisfied differs depending on the general winning opening, so that the player can place the game ball in any of the general winning openings. You will be interested in winning a prize.

(Specific example of specific production F (holding change production))
In the 47th effect mode shown in FIG. 30, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 and an effective start winning is generated, the character displayed as the specific effect F is displayed. The pending change effect with the action of is executed. As described above, the occurrence of the effective start winning is the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening in the state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value, and the second. A game ball is won in the second start winning opening when the number of second reserved memories corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

The effect control CPU 120 has received a start winning opening designation command designated as a "first starting winning slot" or a "second starting winning slot" designation, and a start winning decision result designation command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of a valid start prize. FIG. 31 shows a specific example of the pending change effect in the 47th effect form.

In FIG. 31 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored in hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 2. At this time, in the start winning prize memory display area 5H, among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied. Is displayed in the normal mode, and the display part (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied second is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 decides to make the character A appear at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B (see FIG. 28). In FIG. 31B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character 3000 (character A) holding the cane 3001 on the image display device 5. Character A shall appear on the screen immediately after the general prize.

Then, within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, it is assumed that the effective start winning prize is generated in the first starting winning opening and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In FIG. 31 (c), the number of reserved memories becomes 3 accordingly, and the display portion (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied third is displayed in the normal mode. Whether or not the effect control CPU 120, which has detected the occurrence of the effective start prize, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, changes the display portion corresponding to each of the three hold memories from the normal mode to the special mode. Is determined respectively.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is a command for specifying each start winning decision result (not blank data) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure and the start winning command storage area for the second special figure. It contains valid data). Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), with respect to the start winning judgment result designation command for designating the "big hit", the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is decided that the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed as the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, regarding the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "missing", it was decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and a rate of 90%. Determines not to change the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command in the normal mode.

In this example, with respect to the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game in which the first and second start conditions are satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command should not be changed in the normal mode. Only for the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game in which (no pending change) is determined and the start condition is satisfied, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. It is assumed that it has been decided to let it (with pending changes).

Then, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the character 3000 (character A) directs the tip of the cane 3001 toward the start winning memory display area 5H, and the flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the cane 3001. This causes an action effect in which the display portion corresponding to each reserved memory is surrounded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (f), the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the left end and the second display portion from the left in the normal mode based on the above-mentioned determination as the action effect is executed. With respect to the third display portion from the left, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the above-mentioned determination. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period of time, the character 3000 (character A) holding the cane 3001 and the flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the cane 3001 are erased from the screen.

As a result of the mode change of the display part accompanying this action effect, for the player, the character 3000 (character A) that appeared based on the winning of the general winning opening took an action, and as a result, the third display part from the left. Recognizes that the normal mode has changed to a special mode, and expects a variable display game that is executed three times after the currently executed variable display game.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 31 (c) and 31 (d), with respect to the start winning judgment result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is not satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is usually used. When it is decided not to change the mode as it is (no change on hold), even after the action effect shown in FIG. 31 (e) is performed, as shown in FIG. 31 (g), three hold memories are stored. All of the three corresponding holding sites have not changed in the normal manner.

In this way, the specific effect F (pending change effect) is executed triggered by "the effective start prize has occurred during the period in which the character is displayed", so that the effective start prize is generated during the character display period. It is possible to make people interested in whether or not it is, and it is possible to enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening until the specific production is executed. In addition, a game ball is placed in the general winning opening due to the effect configuration of notifying the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied, triggered by the event of winning the general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from winning a prize to the execution of a specific production.

Further, with the action of the character 3000 (character A), among the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied, whether the display mode of any of the display parts changes from the normal mode to the special mode. Whether or not, and if it changes, it is possible to pay attention to which display mode of the display portion changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, by suggesting a variable display game that the player can expect, the interest can be improved.

In addition, a common object (character A's action) is an effect that suggests a prize in the general winning opening (character A's appearance) and an effect that suggests a display result of a variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied (character A's action). By being composed of the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening to the time when the specific effect is executed. Then, the appearance of the character and the action are related to the appearance of the character and the action by suggesting the winning to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied by a common object. It can increase the interest of the player.

The specific effect F (hold change effect) is a variable display game corresponding to an effective start prize (effective start prize that triggers the determination that a predetermined condition is satisfied) that triggered the execution of the hold change effect (a variable display game). The display result is announced by targeting each of the pending variable display games including the variable display game in which the start condition is finally satisfied), but the display result is not limited to this form, and the pending change effect is executed. Targeting only the variable display game (variable display game in which the start condition was finally satisfied) corresponding to the effective start prize (effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was satisfied) was targeted. The display result may be announced. On the contrary, the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize (effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was satisfied) that triggered the execution of the hold change effect (finally, the start condition). The display result may be announced by targeting the variable display game excluding the variable display game in which is established.

(Character erasure process)
Similar to the specific effect A to the specific effect D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (pending change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (at least the first general winning openings 50A to the first). 4 One or more winning histories to the general winning opening 50D and one or more winning histories to any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are deleted (the winning history of FIG. 30). Reset condition).

Further, if the displayed character is deleted after the lapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect F, the winning history (at least) of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F is accompanied by this. The first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D (including one or more winning histories) is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

FIG. 33A is a timing chart showing a display period of each character when the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the variable display game of the decorative symbol is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When the variable display 1 is being executed, at the timing of (1), any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 50A to 50D. To.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing (2) when one minute has passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. During this period, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, but with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden and is continuously displayed. There is. If a valid start prize is generated within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A will be hidden after the action effect is completed.

When the displayed character is character B, the character B is hidden at the timing (3) when 2 minutes have passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, and further, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, but the variable display 1 ends, the variable display 2 starts, and the variable display 2 starts. With the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the effective start prize is generated within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is hidden after the action effect is completed.

When the displayed character is character C, the character C is hidden at the timing when 5 minutes have passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. In this example, since the effective start prize is generated at the timing of (4) before 5 minutes have passed from the appearance of the character C, the action effect is executed without the character being hidden, and the action is performed. At the timing of the end of the production (5), the display portion corresponding to one or more reserved memories is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and further, the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts, but it is variable. With the end of display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, character C is not hidden. It is displayed continuously.

In this way, once the character is displayed, it will continue to be displayed until "a predetermined condition is satisfied" or "a predetermined period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition". ing. Then, the character is hidden at the earlier timing of "the predetermined condition is satisfied" and "the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied".

[48th production form]
In the 48th effect mode shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, and the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed. Based on this, the dialogue corresponding to the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game of the variable pattern accompanied by the reach state) is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as that of the 47th effect mode, but the predetermined condition to be satisfied within the display period of the character and the type of the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific production G (variation result notice production))
In the 48th effect mode shown in FIG. 30, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach state is established, the character displayed as the specific effect G is displayed. A variable result notice effect accompanied by a dialogue display is executed. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display game with the reach state is executed and the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state reaches a predetermined timing for establishing the reach state, the reach state is established. It is possible to grasp and execute the specific effect G if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 32 shows a specific example of the variation result advance notice effect in the 48th effect form.

In FIG. 32 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored in hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize memory display area 5H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 decides to make the character B appear at a rate of 30% based on the fact that the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A (see FIG. 28). In FIG. 32 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character 3100 (character B) holding the cane 3101 on the image display device 5. Character B shall appear on the screen immediately after the general prize.

Then, in FIG. 32 (c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "2" on the left, "1" on the right, and "3" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

Then, it is assumed that the reach state is established and the predetermined conditions are satisfied within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 32 (e), the character 3050 of "reach!" Is displayed at the upper part of the screen as the reach state is established. The effect control CPU 120 that has detected the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed determines the dialogue of the character B.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbol being executed is determined to be a jackpot combination or a loss combination. It should be noted that it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern specification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is the variation pattern specification command for big hits or the variation pattern specification command for loss. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (f), when it is decided that the display result of the variable display game is a jackpot combination, the character displaying the line "chance!" At a rate of 25%. It is decided to display it horizontally, and it is decided to display the line of "Fahrenheit !!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, if it is decided that the display result of the variable display game is a lost combination, it is decided that the line of "chance!" Is displayed next to the character being displayed at a rate of 90%. It is decided to display the line of "Intense heat !!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of%.

In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line of "super heat !!" next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, as shown in FIG. 32 (g), the effect control CPU 120 produces an effect in which the character 3100 (character B) swings up the cane 3101 and emits the line 3102 "heat !!" To execute. When the dialogue 3102 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the character 3100 (character B) holding the cane 3101 and the dialogue 3102 uttered from the character 3100 are deleted from the screen.

As a result, for the player, there is a possibility that the decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination will be finally stopped and displayed as a result of the reach effect due to the dialogue of the character 3100 (character B) that appears based on the winning of the general winning opening. You can grasp that it is expensive.

In this way, is the reach state established during the character display period by executing the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) triggered by "the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed"? It is possible to make people interested in whether or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening until the specific production is executed. In addition, with the event of winning a prize in the general winning slot that is not related to the progress of the variable display game, the display result of the variable display game for which the display result has not yet been derived and displayed is announced. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the time the ball wins until the specific production is executed. In addition, the dialogue of the character 3000 (character A) can be noticed, and the interest of the character display effect can be improved.

In addition, a common object is an effect that suggests winning a prize in the general winning opening (appearance of character B) and an effect that suggests the display result of a variable display game in which the display result is not derived and displayed (character B's dialogue). Since it is composed of (character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening to the time when the specific effect is executed. Then, the winning of the general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game that has not been confirmed are suggested by a common object, so that the player's appearance and dialogue regarding the appearance of the character You can increase your interest.

In the 48th effect mode, the specific effect G in which the character utters a predetermined line is executed when the reach state is established, that is, the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined mode. The specific effect G may be executed not only in such a form but also when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, for example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed, a predetermined advance notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up advance notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed. The specific effect G may be executed.

Further, in the 48th effect mode, an example in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is described regardless of the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative symbol executed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening is in a predetermined mode. For example, the game ball wins in the general winning opening. The character may be displayed on condition that the variable display of the decorative symbol executed at the time of this is in the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is executed).

(Character erasure process)
Similar to the specific effect A to the specific effect D and the specific effect F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (at least the first general winning openings 50A to No. 1). 4 The general winning opening 50D (including one or more winning histories) is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

Further, if the displayed character is deleted after the lapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect G, the winning history (at least) of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G is accompanied by this. The first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D (including one or more winning histories) is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

FIG. 33B is a timing chart showing a display period of each character when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the variable display game of the decorative symbol is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4, and the reach effect is executed only in the variable display 4 in the reach state. Shall hold. When the variable display 1 is being executed, at the timing of (11), any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 50A to 50D. To.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing (12) when one minute has passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the reach state is established within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is hidden after the dialogue display effect is completed.

When the displayed character is character B, the character B is hidden at the timing (13) when 2 minutes have passed since the appearance without the reach state being established. During this period, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the reach state is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is hidden after the dialogue display effect is completed.

When the displayed character is character C, the character C is hidden at the timing when 5 minutes have passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. In this example, since the reach state is established at the timing of (14) before 5 minutes have passed from the appearance of the character C, the dialogue display effect is executed without the character being hidden. During this period, the character C is hidden when the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. It is displayed continuously.

[49th production form]
In the 47th effect mode and the 48th effect form described above, an example is shown in which a specific effect is executed as long as a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of characters A to C is displayed. However, only when a character of a specific type is displayed, a specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

For example, in the 49th effect mode shown in FIG. 30, a specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed based on the occurrence of a valid start prize within the period in which either character A or B is displayed. Even if a valid start prize is generated within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is not executed. Further, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed based on the fact that the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed, and the character A or B is temporarily displayed. Even if the reach state is established within the period of time, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is not executed.

In this way, the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect and the predetermined conditions according to the type of the displayed character, that is, the notification mode for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening. The type of specific effect executed based on the establishment may be different.

Although the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect to be executed are common regardless of the type of the displayed character, the specific condition to be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the type of the displayed character. The type of production may be different. For example, if a valid start prize occurs within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is not executed). However, if a valid start prize occurs within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed (the specific effect F (hold change effect) is not executed). You may.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect differ depending on the type of the displayed character, but regardless of the type of the displayed character, it is executed when the corresponding predetermined conditions are satisfied. The types of specific effects may be the same. For example, if a valid start prize occurs within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (even if the reach state is established within that period, it is specified. Although the effect F is not executed), the specific effect F (pending change effect) is executed even if the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed (a valid start prize is temporarily generated within that period). However, the specific effect F may not be executed).

In addition, if a valid start prize is generated before the establishment of (1) reach state within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action is performed. After executing, the character is erased, and (2) if the reach state is established before the effective start prize, the character is displayed after executing the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) in which the displayed character utters a line. You may want to erase it. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition that is satisfied earlier among the plurality of predetermined conditions is set. The specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

In addition, if a valid start prize is generated before the establishment of (1) reach state within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action is performed. The character is deleted after execution, and (2) even if the reach state is established before the effective start prize, the character is deleted after executing the specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action. You may try to do it. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and when any of the predetermined conditions is satisfied, a specific effect is performed. You may try to do it.

[Modifications of the 47th production form to the 49th production form]
In the example of FIG. 29, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined specific period after the character is displayed, the character is deleted before the end of the specific period. However, the character is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be continuously displayed until the end of the specific period even after the specific effect is executed. good.

In such a form, the specific effect may be executed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period in which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on the winning of the general winning opening, the character C does not disappear from the screen and continues for 5 minutes when the character C is displayed even if the valid start winning is generated. Is displayed, and the specific effect F (hold change effect) may be executed every time a valid start prize is generated in the 5 minutes.

In the example of FIG. 29, an example in which the display period of the character is a predetermined fixed period (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes) has been described, but the display period of the character is not limited to such a form, for example. , The period until the variable display game executed a predetermined number of times is executed, or the period until the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed ends, and the character is displayed. It may be the period until the game state (for example, the normal state, the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, the big hit game state) ends.

Further, regardless of the display period, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, once such a character is displayed, the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

Further, the display period of the character may be determined before the type of the character to be displayed is determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 determines which of 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes the character display period is to be determined. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. If, if character B is selected at a rate of 70%, character A is selected at a rate of 15%, character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, then the character C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, a different display period may be determined depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won, or depending on the game state.

Further, the predetermined conditions to be established in order to make the specific effect feasible are not limited to the above-mentioned effective start winning prize and the establishment of the reach state, but also the occurrence of a big hit game state, a predetermined type of big hit game state (for example, a probability variation big hit, or Occurrence of a jackpot with the largest number of rounds), the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, and the number of consecutive jackpot game states (consecutive number = probability change state or time reduction after the end of the jackpot game state) The number of consecutive jackpot game states controlled by the state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the end of the jackpot game state, the control to a predetermined game state (for example, a probability change state), and the display result are a loss combination. Others such as the variable display game being continuous a predetermined number of times, the variable display game of the variation pattern of "non-reach" ("loss without reach") being continuous a predetermined number of times, the number of reserved memories reaching a predetermined number, etc. Any condition may be used as long as it is a condition, that is, a condition that is satisfied with the game. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol (the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) such as the period during which the jackpot game state is controlled is executed. It may be performed during a period that has not been done.

In the 47th effect mode and the 49th effect form, an example is shown in which the notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is the hold change effect. Not limited to, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot hold, an effect of only voice is executed, or an effect of voice and movable accessory 1000 is executed. It may be a look-ahead notice effect in which the ratio of the sound is different, or it may be a chance eye advance notice effect as shown in the 50th effect form or the 51st effect form described later. Further, it may be a countdown notice effect in which the player is notified of the remaining variable display number until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice.

In the 47th effect mode and the 49th effect form, after the character is displayed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening, the effective start winning is generated, so that the displayed character is the mode of the hold information. An example of executing a hold change effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a general winning opening, a start winning judgment corresponding to each held variable display game is made. If there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state by checking the result specification command and the variation pattern judgment result specification command at the time of start winning, the rate is higher than when it does not exist. You may make a character appear. Further, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the rate at which a specific character appears may be higher than in the case where it does not exist. Further, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, and a case where the display result does not exist. Then, when an effective start prize is generated after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable that the displayed character executes a hold change effect that changes the mode of the hold information.

Further, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, when the character is controlled to the jackpot game state, the displayed character is deleted, and the game ball is placed in the general winning opening during the period controlled to the jackpot game state. Even if the character wins a prize, the specific effect may not be executed by preventing a new character from appearing. As a result, the player's consciousness is concentrated on various effects (for example, fanfare effect, in-round effect, ending effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state, and these various effects are not disturbed. be able to.

In the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, an example in which a specific effect is always executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period has been described, but the display of the character is not limited to such a form. Even if a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. For example, if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 50%. Is executed, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%, and the specific effect is performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the displayed character. The execution ratio may be different.

Here, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect form, when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening while the character is displayed, the display of the new character based on the winning in the general winning opening is displayed. Instead, the characters that have already been displayed shall be displayed continuously. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of character display and the character to be displayed at the ratio shown in FIG. 28, provided that none of the characters is displayed when the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is assumed that the character is displayed based on the determination.

Not limited to this form, if a character is displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed is replaced (already displayed). The character may be deleted), and the character based on the later general prize may be displayed.

Also, comparing the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed with the display period of the character based on the later general prize, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is larger. If it is long, it will continue to be displayed, and the character based on the later general prize will not be displayed. If the display period of the character based on the later general prize is longer, it will replace the character based on the earlier general prize (already). The displayed character may be deleted), and the character based on the later general prize may be displayed.

In such a form, when displaying a character based on a later general prize instead of a character based on the previous general prize (the character already displayed is deleted), the display period of the character based on the later general prize is displayed. The remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed may be added (the period in which both are added is set as the display period of the newly displayed character).

Further, in the 47th production form to the 49th production form, if a game ball wins a general winning opening within the character display period, a new character is not displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening. , The remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed may be extended. The period to be extended here (time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period (for example, 1 minute if the character A is displayed) specified for the already displayed character. Further, even when a prize is entered in the general winning opening within the character display period, one of the characters is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 28, and the determined character (however, newly displayed) is displayed. The display period (for example, 2 minutes for character B) according to the character that is not removed may be added to the remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, if a character is displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (without deleting the already displayed character) is displayed later. Characters based on the general prize may also be displayed. For example, if a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening when character A is displayed and it is determined that character B is newly displayed, a new character is added to the already displayed character A. B may also be displayed on the image display device 5.

In such a form, the period obtained by adding the display period of the character based on the later general prize to the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is set as the common display period of both characters. You may. In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed and either one character or both characters are deleted. Further, if the common display period elapses without satisfying the predetermined conditions, both characters are deleted.

Further, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 5, the first predetermined condition (for example, effective) corresponding to the first character is first obtained. When the start prize) is established and the first specific effect (for example, specific effect F (hold change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is erased and only the second character is displayed. The displayed state is set, and then the second predetermined condition (for example, the reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, and the second specific effect (for example, the specific effect G (variation result)) based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition is satisfied. When the notice effect)) is executed, the second character may also be deleted. Here, the first character and the second character may be characters of the same type.

In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be common conditions (for example, the occurrence of a valid start prize), and in that case, both the first character and the second character are used. In the state displayed on the image display device 5, based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of a valid start winning only once), the first specific effect by the first character and the second identification by the second character Both of the effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are erased.

Further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, specific effect F (hold change effect)), in which case both the first character and the second character are image display devices. When the first predetermined condition (for example, effective start winning) corresponding to the first character is satisfied in the state displayed in 5, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) is executed, and the first When one character is erased and only the second character is displayed, and then the second predetermined condition (for example, the reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, the same type of specific effect (specific effect F (specific effect F)) is satisfied again. The hold change effect)) may be executed so that the second character is erased.

Further, as in the 49th effect mode, if the first character (character A or B) is displayed during the period, the first specific effect (specific effect) is obtained according to the establishment of the first condition (generation of effective start winning). F) can be executed, and if the second character (character C) is displayed, the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed according to the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state). It is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed at the same time). Here, when the second specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character when the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is higher than when the first specific effect is executed. It shall be displayed with priority over the character. For example, when it is decided to display the second character based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening when the first character is displayed, the first character is deleted and the second character is deleted. Shall be newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, the control to display the first character instead of the second character is not performed.

On the other hand, when the configuration is such that the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed according to the satisfaction of the first condition, and the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, when both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are intended for the same variable display game and the execution periods overlap (for example, both are variable result advance notice effects of the same variable display game and reach. (When it is executed immediately after the establishment of the state), the second specific effect shall be executed with priority over the first specific effect, and at this time, the first specific effect shall not be executed.

[50th production form]
In the 50th effect mode shown in FIG. 34, every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, a button icon 4000 is newly displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 35 and the like), and the displayed button icon 4000 is displayed. The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the number of. Here, each of the specific effects in the present effect form prompts the player to perform some operation, and is an effect capable of predicting the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's movement. There are three types of specific effects: cut-in notice effect (specific effect H), pseudo-continuous notice effect (specific effect I), and chance eye notice effect (specific effect J).

The display information condition of FIG. 34 is the number of button icons 4000 to be displayed in order to execute each specific effect, and if at least the number of button icons 4000 shown in the display information condition is not displayed, each specific condition is specified. No production is performed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, the pseudo continuous notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and the chance eye notice effect is If the button icon 4000 is not displayed 3 or more, it will not be executed.

The button icon 4000 displayed on the image display device 5 is incremented by 1 each time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 5. Suppose there is. Then, when the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the number of displayed button icons 4000 required for executing the specific effect from the number of displayed button icons 4000 before the execution of the specific effect is generated. It will be displayed on the image display device 5 after the execution of the specific effect. For example, if (1) the cut-in notice effect (the number of required button icons to be displayed = 1) is executed while the five button icons 4000 are displayed, the button icon after the cut-in notice effect is executed will be displayed. The number of displays of 4000 becomes 4, and (2) when the pseudo-continuous notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 2) is executed, the number of displayed 4000 button icons after the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed becomes 3. , (3) When the chance eye notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 3) is executed, the number of display of 4000 button icons after the chance eye notice effect is executed becomes 2.

(Cut-in notice production)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect of notifying the display result of the variable display of the variable display pattern by the content of the characters displayed on the screen after the reach state is established. As shown in FIG. 34, the cut-in notice effect is obtained when (1) one or more button icons 4000 are displayed and (2) a variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state. A notification is given to perform a predetermined continuous striking operation, and (3) the player can perform the predetermined continuous striking operation.

If the variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state while no button icon 4000 is displayed, the cut-in notice operation is not notified and the cut-in notice is not notified. No production is performed. Further, in the variable display game of the variable pattern that does not accompany the reach state, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

Further, in the cut-in notice effect, the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is being executed, and then the player operates the operation button 30 a plurality of times, so that the reach effect is executed. The condition is that the variable display game is executed according to the variable pattern. A specific mode of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

In FIG. 35 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize memory display area 5H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

The effect control CPU 120 displays the first button icon 4000 on the left edge of the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 35B, the screen is updated from the state in which the button icon 4000 is not displayed to the state in which one button icon 4000 is displayed. In addition, as a total of one or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, the character 4000a of "cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition referred to here is that (1) a variable display game of a variation pattern accompanied by a reach state is executed while (1) one or more button icons 4000 are displayed.

Then, in FIG. 35 (c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "4" on the left, "2" on the right, and "8" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game is a reach fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game, the game control microcomputer. Confirm based on the fluctuation pattern specification command received from 100. Then, when the variable display game to be started has a reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in notice effect is satisfied.

Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect of displaying the character 4080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 35 (e). Then, based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), the characters "continuous hit!", A plurality of downward arrows, and the operation button 30 are imitated in order from the top in the center of the screen. The image and the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 composed of a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is valid are displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 30 should be continuously performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 erases one button icon 4000 required for executing the cut-in notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000 along with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 4100. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and the character 4000a of "cut-in" is deleted from the screen as there is no specific effect that can be executed.

It is assumed that the player who recognizes the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 continuously presses the operation button 30 a predetermined number of times or more. The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar according to the elapsed time since the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 is displayed. When the time bar is displayed, it is in a state of 5 stages out of 5 stages, and it is assumed that the time bar is decremented by 1 stage every 1 second after the display. As shown in FIG. 35 (g), in the effect control CPU 120, the operation buttons 30 are pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 of the 5 stages (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined, and the cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 5.

Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 satisfies the continuous hit suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 35 (h), when the display result of the variable display game to be executed becomes the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination. Decided to display the characters "Chance!" At a rate of 20% and the characters "Fever !!" at a rate of 80%, and the display result of the variable display game to be executed is a lost combination. In the case of the final stop symbol of, it is decided to display the characters "chance!" At a rate of 80% and the characters "heat !!" at a rate of 20%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in notice effect for displaying the screen including the determined characters on the image display device 5. In the example of FIG. 35 (i), the character 4200 of "heat !!" is displayed large on the entire screen.

If the operation button 30 is not operated more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 4100, the effect control CPU 120 gives a "chance!" And neither of the characters "super heat !!" shall be displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo-ream notice production)
The pseudo-continuous notice effect provided as the specific effect I is a re-variation in which the decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped is scrolled up and down again in one variable display game, as if it were performed multiple times. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed continuously. When re-variation is performed, in response to each symbol stop operation of the player, a pseudo-continuous symbol is used as a decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C (composed of the characters "NEXT" in this example). Supposes that is temporarily stopped.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, (1) a variable display game was executed with a fluctuation pattern of 8 seconds or more while (1) two or more button icons 4000 were displayed. In this case, the player is notified to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can perform each predetermined symbol stop operation.

Further, in the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, the player operates the operation button 30 three times within the period in which one variable display game is executed (each symbol stop operation is performed three times). It requires a certain operation time, and is conditioned on the execution of a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is a certain time (8 seconds in this example) or more. A specific mode of the pseudo-continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

In FIG. 36 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored in hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize memory display area 5H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, one button icon 4000 is displayed at the left end of the screen, and "cut after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied". The character 4000a of "cut-in" indicating "the in-notice effect can be executed" is displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second button icon 4000 on the left edge of the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 36B, the screen is updated from the state in which one button icon 4000 is displayed to the state in which two button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, as a total of two or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, the character 4000b of "pseudo-ream" indicating that "pseudo-ream notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition referred to here is that (1) the variable display game is executed with a fluctuation pattern of 8 seconds or more in a state where 2 or more button icons 4000 are displayed. is there.

Then, in FIG. 36C, it is assumed that after the second button icon 4000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "5" on the left, "1" on the right, and "7" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 receives from the game control microcomputer 100 whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Check based on the fluctuation pattern specification command. Then, when the fluctuation time of the variable display game to be started is 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is satisfied.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state, as shown in FIG. 36D. Determines to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (execute re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and decide not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (do not execute re-variation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state, it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (re-variation is executed) with a probability of 100%.

When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decorative symbol in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L in response to each symbol stop operation of the player, and the decorative symbol. , The decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R is determined, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C.

As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command and the variable display result. The final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the notification command. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the "left" and "right" decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R according to each symbol stop operation of the player are determined and confirmed. It may be different from or the same as the "left" and "right" decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

When it is decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol according to each symbol stop operation of the player. In the area 5R and the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols constituting the determined fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) are rocked and stopped, respectively. Decide on that. That is, when the re-variation is not performed, it is determined that the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is oscillated and stopped according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

In this way, when the presence / absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol for performing re-variation are determined, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Along with this, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the display portion at the left end is in the non-display mode. With the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the characters "press!", The downward arrow, and the operation button 30 are moved to the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L in order from the top. The operation suggestion information 4050 composed of the imitated image is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 erases two button icons 4000 required for executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000 along with the display of the operation suggestion information 4050. As a result, the number of the displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and the characters 4000a of the "cut-in" and the characters 4000b of the "pseudo-ream" are deleted from the screen as the specific effect that can be executed does not exist.

"Left" decoration As shown in FIG. 36 (g), the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the design display area 5L performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30 to display the "left" decoration. The decorative symbol (“1” in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 5L. The rocking stop is a state in which the decorative design is not scrolled in the vertical direction, but is not completely stopped and is swinging (the final stop is not displayed). Here, the decorative symbol that is oscillated and stopped is a "left" decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of temporary stop symbols when it is decided to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, and is a pseudo. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbol, it is a "left" decorative symbol that constitutes a combination of a predetermined fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

When the "left" decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 120 then displays the operation suggestion information 4050 in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, as shown in FIG. 36 (g). .. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R.

"Right" decoration As shown in FIG. 36 (h), the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the pattern display area 5R performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30 to display the "right" decoration. The decorative symbol (“2” in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 5R. Here, the decorative symbol that is oscillated and stopped is a "right" decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of temporary stop symbols when it is decided to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, and is a pseudo. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbol, it is a "right" decorative symbol that constitutes a combination of a predetermined fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

When the "right" decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 120 then displays the operation suggestion information 4050 in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, as shown in FIG. 36 (h). .. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C.

It is assumed that the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle" performs the operation of pressing the operation button 30.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-sequential characters based on the table of FIG. 36 (d), as shown in FIG. 37 (i), it is "middle". In the decorative symbol display area 5C of the above, the pseudo-continuous symbol composed of the characters "NEXT" is stopped swinging. As a result, a predetermined combination of "left", "middle", and "right" temporary stop symbols is displayed as temporary stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (j), after the temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the decorative symbol changes (for example,) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”. (Scroll display in the vertical direction) is restarted. After the re-variation, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is finally stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The display result of the game will be confirmed.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 has decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-linkage symbol based on the table of FIG. 36 (d), as shown in FIG. 37 (k), the "medium" The "middle" decorative symbol constituting the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) determined in advance in the decorative symbol display area 5C is oscillated and stopped. As a result, the combination of the predetermined "left", "right", and "middle" fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is oscillated and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (l), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed.

The effect control CPU 120 has determined to temporarily stop the pseudo-linkage symbol even if the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 4050. In this case, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the re-variation is executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, even if the operation is not performed, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols is automatically temporarily stopped and the revariation is executed. And.

In this example, when two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the operation suggestion condition that the variable display game is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is satisfied. The operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by a reach state (that is, regardless of the production mode of the specified fluctuation pattern), but the present invention is not limited to such a form. The operation suggestion condition may be that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state. In the case of such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the reach state is a big hit, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is out of order. It is good to set it to.

Further, when the presence / absence of execution of the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is set in advance for each fluctuation pattern determined on the game control microcomputer 100 side, that is, by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. In a case where the pseudo-continuous symbol is specified to be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 120 is designated so that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. The operation suggestion condition may be that the variable pattern specification command is received (the variable display game is executed by the variable pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous notice effect), regardless of the specified variable pattern as in the above-mentioned example. , The operation suggestion condition may be that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or more.

(Chance notice production)
The chance eye notice effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game that is the target of the look-ahead advance notice. By displaying the chance eye, which is the display result, at the final stop, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game, which is the target of the pre-reading notice.

In this example, the same odd number of decorative symbols is finally stopped and displayed in the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and "left" is displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. By displaying an even-numbered decorative symbol that is one larger than the odd-numbered decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the "middle", the "left", "middle", and "middle" that are the chances The combination of the "right" decorative patterns shall be completed.

That is, the combination of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols, which is a chance in this example, is any one of "112", "334", "556", and "778". It is possible to display the final stop display of the combination of decorative symbols that is a chance eye according to the player's operation to stop all the symbols.

As shown in FIG. 34, the chance eye notice effect is (1) in a state where three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is held, and the variable display game is held. When none of the variable display games executed before the display game is accompanied by a reach state, a notification is given to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined all symbol stop operation. It becomes feasible by doing.

Further, in the chance eye notice effect, in one variable display game, the combination of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols swings when the player operates the operation button 30 only once. It will be stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect in which each symbol stop operation for swinging and stopping each of the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols is required three times in one variable display game. The operation (all symbol stop operation) required in one variable display game is only once. A specific mode of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

In FIG. 38 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored in hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 3. At this time, in the start winning prize memory display area 5H, each display part (left end, second from left, and 3 from left) corresponding to 3 variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. It is assumed that each of the second) is displayed in the normal mode.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure and the start winning command determination command for the second special drawing. Checking the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (leftmost display part) for which the start condition is first satisfied among the three pending variable display games. Is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (second display part from the left) where the start condition is satisfied is the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied third. It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (third display portion from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern.

Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won a plurality of times (at least twice or more) in the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, two button icons 4000 are displayed at the left end of the screen, and "predetermined". The character 4000a of "cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the operation suggestion condition is satisfied" and "the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied". The character 4000b of "pseudo-ren" indicating is displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a third button icon 4000 on the left edge of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in any of the first general winning openings 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 38B, the screen is updated from the state in which the two button icons 4000 are displayed to the state in which the three button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, as a total of 3 or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, the character 4000c of "chance eye" indicating that "the chance eye notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition referred to here is (1) a state in which three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game accompanied by a reach state is held, and the variable display game is held. None of the variable display games that run before are accompanied by a reach state.

Then, in FIG. 38 (c), it is assumed that after the third button icon 4000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of “5” on the left, “9” in the middle, and “6” in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120, based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game, the variation pattern of the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state. Of the two pending variable display games, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (leftmost display part) for which the start condition is satisfied first is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display portion from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the chance eye notice effect is satisfied.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 is executed twice before the held variable display game of the reach variation pattern (including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied). For each of the variable display games), it is determined that the player is requested to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. In addition, whether the display result of the held variable display game of the reach variation pattern is a jackpot combination or a loss combination is determined by the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game or the start winning variation pattern. Confirm based on the judgment result specification command.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), when the display result of the held variable display game of the reach variation pattern is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. Depending on the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance eyes at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eyes (missing combinations other than the chance eyes) at a rate of 25%, and the pending reach fluctuation pattern is variable. If the display result of the display game is a lost combination, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% according to the player's operation to stop all symbols. Decide to stop non-chance eyes at a rate of 75%.

When it is decided to stop the chance number, the effect control CPU 120 constitutes the chance number according to the player's operation to stop all the symbols, and the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 5L. And an odd number of decorative symbols to be stopped at 5C, and an even number of decorative symbols to be stopped swinging in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R are determined.

When it is decided not to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 120 has a "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and a "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C according to the player's all symbol stop operation. In the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbols that make up the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance are swung according to the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. Decide to stop. That is, it is decided to swing and stop the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is a non-chance eye, in response to the player's operation to stop all symbols.

In this way, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol when the chance eye stop is performed are determined, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Along with this, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display part from the left is the non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 38 (f), the characters 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" Are displayed in large size in the center of the screen, and the characters "Press!" Are displayed downward in order from the top. The operation suggestion information 4050 composed of the arrow and the image imitating the operation button 30 is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". To do. In the chance eye notice effect, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect described above, by operating the operation button 30 only once, all the decorative symbol display areas 5L of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. The decorative design is stopped at 5C and 5R.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is accompanied by the display of the characters 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 4050, and among the displayed button icons 4000, the three buttons required to execute the chance eye notice effect. Erase icon 4000. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and as there is no specific effect that can be executed, the characters "cut-in" 4000a, "pseudo-ren" characters 4000b, and "chance eyes" Delete the character 4000c from the screen.

Next, it is assumed that the player who recognizes the character 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 4050 performs the operation of pressing the operation button 30.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 120 has decided to stop the non-chance eye based on the table of FIG. 38 (d), as shown in FIG. 38 (g), "left", In the "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) that does not become a chance is shaken according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Stop moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (h), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed. Here, as a non-chance-eye confirmed decorative symbol, a combination of “4” on the left, “9” in the middle, and “7” on the right, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

If the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 is a player. When it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to the stop operation of all the symbols, the fixed decorative symbol that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (final stop symbol) The combination of the above shall be stopped swinging.

Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start condition of the next variable display game based on the determination that the player is required to stop all symbols for the next variable display game. Even when it is established, it is determined whether or not there is a chance stop as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 39 (i), when the display result of the held variable display game of the reach variation pattern is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. Depending on the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance eyes at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eyes at a rate of 25%, and the display result of the variable display game of the held reach fluctuation pattern is a loss combination In the case of, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% and the non-chance eye at a rate of 75% according to the player's operation to stop all symbols. Decide to stop.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates to stop all symbols of the player when it is decided to stop the chance eyes or when it is decided to stop the non-chance eyes, as in the previous variable display game. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped swinging is determined according to the above.

In this way, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol when the chance eye stop is performed are determined, as shown in FIG. 39 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Along with this, there is only one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display portion from the left is the non-display mode. With the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 39 (k), the characters 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 4050 are displayed in the center of the screen. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". To do.

Next, it is assumed that the player who recognizes the character 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 4050 performs the operation of pressing the operation button 30.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 120 has decided to stop the chance eye based on the table of FIG. 39 (i), as shown in FIG. 39 (l), "left", " In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "middle" and "right", the combination of decorative symbols constituting the determined chance eye is oscillated and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (m), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern for the chance eye, a combination of "1" on the left, "1" in the middle, and "2" on the right, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

If the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 is a player. Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye according to the stop operation of all the symbols, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop) that does not become the chance eye according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. The combination of symbols) shall be stopped swinging.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is determined to require the player to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern that is the target of the chance eye advance notice effect. Therefore, when the start condition of the next variable display game is satisfied, whether or not the chance is stopped is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect of displaying the character 4080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 39 (o).

In the 50th effect mode described above, the cut-in advance notice effect, the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, and the chance eye advance notice effect all have a state after the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 4000. In the displayed state, it can be executed by the operation of the player according to each notice effect. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is executed on condition that the player operates the game ball after the game ball has won the general winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

In addition, each time the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the button icon 4000 displayed on the screen increases, so that the player can play the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening. It is possible to recognize that the prize was won.

Further, when the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is satisfied while one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, a notification prompting a continuous hit operation is issued as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 4000 are displayed. If the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is satisfied in the state of being set, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation is sent as an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and a chance eye is displayed when 3 or more button icons 4000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the advance notice effect is satisfied, a notification prompting the stop operation of all symbols is sent as an operation corresponding to the chance eye advance notice effect, so that the player can execute the specific effect by performing any operation. Can be grasped.

Further, according to the number of displayed button icons 4000, the character 4000a of "cut-in" is displayed when the number of displays is 1 or more, and the character 4000b of "pseudo-ream" is displayed when the number of displays is 2 or more. When the value is 3 or more, the character 4000c of the "chance eye" is displayed, so that the player can grasp the type of the specific effect that can be executed according to the number of the displayed button icons 4000. As a result, it is possible to make an interest in the number of winning balls of the game ball to the general winning opening.

It should be noted that the type of specific effect that can be executed and the operation required to execute the specific effect may be notified. For example, according to the number of displayed button icons 4000, when the number of displays is 1 or more, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed next to the character 4000a of "cut-in", and when the number of displays is 2 or more, the character of "pseudo-ream" is displayed. The character "Stop each symbol" is displayed next to the character 4000b, and when the number of displays is 3 or more, the character "Stop all symbols" is displayed next to the character 4000c of "Chance eye", so that the player can It is possible to grasp the operations required according to the type of specific effect that can be executed.

Here, in this embodiment, there is a case where the operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of the plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 8. It may take more than a second. In this case, a notification prompting a continuous hit operation for executing the cut-in notice effect (display of the continuous hit suggestion information 4100) and a stop operation for each symbol for executing the pseudo continuous notice effect are prompted. The question is which of the notifications (display of operation suggestion information 4050 in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R) should be performed. In this embodiment, the one with the larger number of button icons 4000 required to execute the specific effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, the notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo continuous notice effect (requires 2 or more button icons 4000) is the notification prompting the continuous hit operation for executing the cut-in notice effect (1 or more button icon 4000 is required). It shall be given priority over.

Further, in the state where 3 or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and , The pending variable display game may have a reach variation pattern. In this case, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R). Operation suggestion information 4050 display) or notification prompting all symbol stop operation for executing chance eye notice effect (display of character 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And operation suggestion information 4050 in each variable display game) The question is whether to do. In this case, the notification prompting the stop operation of all symbols for executing the chance eye advance notice effect (3 or more button icons 4000 are required) is the notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (button icon 4000). 2 or more is required).

Further, in this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 4000 is the number of button icons 4000 required to execute a specific effect (1 for cut-in notice effect, 2 for pseudo-continuous notice effect). If there are more than 3) in the case of the eye notice effect, the number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 4000 required to execute the specific effect from the number of button icons 4000 initially displayed is the specific. It will continue to be displayed even after the production is executed.

For example, if the chance eye notice effect is executed while four or more button icons 4000 are displayed, one button icon 4000 that is continuously displayed remains even after the chance eye notice effect is executed. The character 4000a of "cut-in" remains displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is satisfied, and the notification for prompting the continuous hit operation is performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is satisfied (the number of the button icons 4000 is confirmed). (I try to check the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game together), but it is not limited to this form, and when the variable display game is being executed, does the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect hold? You may decide whether or not. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 4000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and if it is displayed, the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 for causing repeated hits is provided. It may be displayed. Further, in the effect control CPU 120, whether or not two or more button icons 4000 are displayed at the timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivative display of the display result) reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). If it is displayed, the operation suggestion information 4050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 holds a variable display game (including a variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize) with a reach state at the timing when the effective start prize is generated, and the variable display game thereof. When none of the variable display games executed before is accompanied by a reach state, it is determined whether or not 3 or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and if they are displayed, all the symbols are stopped. The characters 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 4050 may be displayed. That is, in the variable display game executed at the timing when the display number of the button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined predetermined number (without waiting for the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game to be executed next), a predetermined number is specified. Notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed has a reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 for performing the continuous hit may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. Further, the effect control CPU 120 remains until the end of the variable display game being executed (derivative display of the display result) at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is determined whether or not the time is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining), and if it is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivative display of the display result) is the predetermined time (for example). The operation suggestion information 4050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed at the timing when the remaining 10 seconds). Further, the effect control CPU 120 provides a variable display game with a reach state (a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. (Including) is pending, and it is determined whether or not any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is not accompanied by a reach state, and a variable display game with a reach state is determined. Is held and none of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is accompanied by a reach state, the all symbol stop operation is performed in the variable display game being executed. The character 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 4050 may be displayed. That is, in the variable display game executed at the timing when the display number of the button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined predetermined number (without waiting for the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game to be executed next), a predetermined number is specified. Notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

Further, in the 50th effect mode, the operation suggestion conditions for notifying the user to perform a predetermined operation (continuous striking operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) are all conditions related to the variable display game (display mode and (Fluctuating time), and an example in which a specific effect is executed during execution of a variable display game due to a predetermined operation has been described. However, the operation suggestion condition is not limited to such a form, for example, a big hit. It may be a condition related to the game state (for example, whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state, whether or not the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit, and whether or not the number of rounds is more than a predetermined number, etc.), and it may be a big hit. A specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the game state. For example, when the number of displayed button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined number within the period controlled by the jackpot game state, a notification is given to the player to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. Occasionally, an effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot gaming state is a probabilistic jackpot, or whether or not the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state is greater than a predetermined number may be executed. In addition, when the number of displayed button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined number within the period in which the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state (however, the effect mode is set in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game state is the probable change state). A notification may be given to urge the player to perform a predetermined operation, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect of notifying whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state may be executed.

Further, in the 50th effect mode, even when the number of displayed button icons 4000 is 1, a notification for prompting a continuous hit operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hit operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and unless the number of displayed button icons 4000 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), a notification prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example, No notification is performed to prompt any of the continuous hit operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operation), and the specific effect is not executed (for example, cut-in notice effect, pseudo continuous notice effect, or chance eye notice effect). The specific effect of is not executed either).

(Example of one notification)
Further, in the 50th effect mode, in order to stop the temporary stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, three operations are performed for each area, but the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is performed. ) May be stopped in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, so that the operation may be performed three times for each area. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, and the operation button 30 is displayed. The left symbol constituting the final stop symbol is oscillatedly stopped in response to the operation of, then the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R of the "right", and the final stop is made in response to the operation of the operation button 30. The right symbol constituting the symbol is oscillated and stopped, and finally, the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle", and the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol is formed according to the operation of the operation button 30. May be oscillated and stopped. In such a configuration, when the combination of jackpot symbols is the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 5L, 5R, of "left", "right", and "middle" are arranged according to the player's three operations. By sequentially stopping the same decorative symbol in 5C, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player's operation.

In the "left", "right", and "middle" symbol display areas, a combination of special decorative symbols that is different from the combination of normal decorative symbols (for example, images of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8") is placed. By stopping, a notification is given to the player to urge a predetermined operation, and depending on the player's predetermined operation, whether the display result of the variable display game is a big hit or a miss (or a probability variable big hit). It is also possible to execute a specific effect that notifies (whether it becomes a non-probability change jackpot, etc.). For example, a special decorative symbol that is an image imitating the operation button 30 is stopped in the "left" and "right" symbol display areas (or a normal decoration is displayed in the "left" and "right" symbol display areas, respectively. Stop the symbol), and stop the image of the characters "Continuous hit!" In the "Medium" symbol display area. Then, when the player who recognizes the image of the character "continuous hit!" Performs the repeated hit operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the character "big hit!" Or "loss" is displayed on the image display device 5. An image of the characters "" may be displayed.

Further, in such a form, according to the image of the character stopped in the "middle" symbol display area (according to the notification mode suggesting to perform a predetermined operation), the variable display game The rate at which the displayed result becomes a big hit (or the rate at which a probable variable big hit) may be different. For example, in the "middle" symbol display area, the operation button 30 is made longer than when the image of the characters "continuous hit!", Which suggests that the operation button 30 be pressed repeatedly for a short time, is stopped as a special symbol. The rate at which the display result becomes a big hit may be higher when the image of the character "long press!", Which suggests the operation of pressing once, is stopped as a special symbol. In this way, the effect of notifying the display result of the variable display game according to the operation of the player may be executed as a specific effect without going through the reach state. It should be noted that, within the period in which the variable display game of 1 is being executed, the combination of special decorative symbols is stopped multiple times in the "left", "right", and "middle" symbol display areas, so that the special decorative symbol is stopped multiple times. The player may perform a predetermined operation each time the combination of the above is stopped. In this case, a notice effect suggesting a display result may be executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. ..

In the 50th effect mode, each symbol stop operation is effective on condition that the general winning opening is won twice or more, and a pseudo continuous advance notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation to enter the general winning opening. An example is shown in which the all-symbol stop operation is effective on condition that the prize is won three times or more, and the chance eye notice effect is executed according to the all-symbol stop operation, but the notification that the predetermined operation should be performed (predetermined) The condition that the operation is valid) may be a condition that the general winning opening is won four or more times.

[51st production form]
In the 51st effect mode shown in FIG. 34, unlike the 50th effect mode, the specific effect that can be executed differs depending on the gaming state. In the 51st effect mode, the cut-in notice effect that requires a continuous striking operation can be executed in any of the normal state, the probability change state, and the time saving state. On the other hand, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the game state is in the normal state, and the chance eye advance notice effect that requires all symbol stop operations is in a probable change state or a time saving state. It can be executed only when.

In addition, in the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state, but in this case, the pseudo-continuous notice effect requiring a larger number of button icons 4000 is executed. Each symbol stop operation for this is preferentially prompted. On the other hand, since the game states that can be executed differ between the pseudo continuous advance notice effect and the chance eye advance notice effect, the operation suggestion condition is not satisfied at the same time.

Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the normal state is 3 or more, the character 4000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo-ream" are not executed in the normal state because the chance eye notice effect is not executed. Character 4000b is displayed, but the character 4000c of "chance eye" is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state is 3 or more, the character "cut-in" is not executed in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state because the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed. The characters 4000a and the "chance eye" character 4000c are displayed, but the character 4000b of the "pseudo-ren" is not displayed.

In this way, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed differs depending on the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, so that the specific effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state. It is possible to make different interests.

In addition, in this production form, the advance notice effect that requires a larger number of button icons 4000 is preferentially executed, but the advance notice effect is not limited to such a form, and the player has a higher expectation for the advance notice effect. It may be executed with priority. For example, when the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect and the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect are satisfied for the same variable display game, the notice effect with a higher rate of big hit (for example, the pseudo-continuous notice effect) ) Should be prioritized for execution.

[52nd production form]
In the 52nd effect mode shown in FIG. 40, unlike the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 4000 is not displayed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and the game ball to the general winning opening is displayed. Whether or not to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c for each prize, and when displaying, the character 4000a of "cut-in", the character 4000b of "pseudo-ren", and the character 4000c of "chance eye" It determines which of the above is displayed. In FIG. 41 (A), whether to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c according to the winning of each general winning opening, and if displaying, which of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed. The display information judgment table for determining is shown.

When the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A, the effect control CPU 120 decides to display the character 4000a of "cut-in" on the screen at a rate of 25%, and "cut-in" at a rate of 75%. It is decided to display the character 4000b of "pseudo-ream" on the screen. In addition, when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B, it is decided that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and the character 4000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 25%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 4000b of "pseudo-ren" on the screen at a rate of 25%.

In addition, when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 50C, it is decided that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 80%, and the character 4000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 4000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when a game ball wins in the 4th general winning opening 50D, it is decided that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 70%, and the character 4000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 4000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 20%.

Then, as in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect form described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started in the state where the character 4000a of "cut-in" is displayed, the continuous striking operation is performed. A cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation, and a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is started while the character 4000b of "pseudo-ream" is displayed. In that case, the player is notified to perform each symbol stop operation, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation, and the reach fluctuation pattern is variable in the state where the character 4000c of "chance eye" is displayed. If the display game is on hold and all the variable display games executed before that have a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the player is notified to perform the all symbol stop operation, and the all symbol stop operation is performed. Execute a chance eye notice production.

In the example of FIG. 41 (A), when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A, any of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and the game ball is displayed in the second general winning opening 50B. If a prize is won, one of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and if a game ball is won in the third general winning opening 50C, any one of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. Then, when a game ball wins a prize in the fourth general winning opening 50C, any of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

In this way, depending on the general winning opening where the game ball wins, the ratio of notifying the type of the specific effect that can be executed and the ratio of the specific effect that can be executed are different. It is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether the game ball enters the game.

Further, the game ball launched in the left game area 10A is easier to win in the second general winning opening 50B than in the first general winning opening 50A, and the game ball launched in the right game area 10B is easier to win in the fourth general winning opening 50B. Assuming that the third general winning opening 50C is configured to be easier to win than the 50D, it is more difficult to win the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A in the normal state, the probability change state or the time saving state). When the game ball wins the 4th general winning opening 50D), the ratio of the specific effect being executed is high.

In addition, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B, either the character 4000a of "cut-in" or the character 4000b of "pseudo-ren" may be displayed. However, the character 4000c of "chance eye" is not displayed. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the 3rd general winning opening 50C or the 4th general winning opening 50D, either the character "cut-in" 4000a or the character "chance eye" 4000c may be displayed. However, the character 4000b of "pseudo-ren" is not displayed.

In this way, the game ball enters any of the general winning openings because the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different depending on the general winning opening that the game ball has won. You can pay attention to what you do and improve your interest.

Further, when the game state is the normal state, the game ball is fired in the left game area 10A, and when the game state is in the probability change state or the time saving state, the game ball is fired in the right game area 10B, so that the first general winning opening In the normal state in which the game ball wins in the 50A or the second general winning opening 50B, the characters 4000a to 4000c are more than in the probabilistic state or the time saving state in which the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D. The ratio of displaying any of the above is high, and the ratio of executing the specific effect is high.

Since the interest is likely to decline when the game state is the normal state, the decline in interest is prevented by increasing the rate at which characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which a specific effect is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is in a probabilistic state or a time-saving state, the player is interested in the special figure game or the normal figure game. Since there are cases where the characters 4000a to 4000c appear, the ratio at which the specific effect is executed is set to be lower than the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately different the interests of winning a game ball in the general winning opening according to the game state.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 41 (A), when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the ratio of characters 4000a to 4000c appearing and the specific effect are executed as compared with the case where the gaming state is in the normal state. The ratio may be increased, and contrary to the example shown in FIG. 41 (A), when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D, the first general winning opening is won. Characters 4000a to 4000c may be displayed at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the mouth 50A or the second general winning mouth 50B. Further, in FIG. 41 (A), the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed only when the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B is won, but similarly, the third general winning opening 50C Alternatively, a specific effect that can be executed only when the fourth general winning opening 50D is won may be provided.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 41 (A), as shown in FIG. 41 (B), a game ball is won for each winning opening of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the game state at that time is the normal state, the rate at which characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are higher than when the game state when the game ball wins is a probability change state or a time saving state. May be made higher. Contrary to the example shown in FIG. 41 (B), when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the normal state. Characters 4000a to 4000c may be displayed at a higher rate than that. Further, in FIG. 41 (B), a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the normal state may be provided, and a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state may be provided. May be provided.

It should be noted that the rate of displaying characters 4000a to 4000c and the rate of executing a specific effect are not limited to different cases depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probabilistic state, or the time saving state. For example, whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, whether or not the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, and the number of consecutive jackpot game states (consecutive number = end of the jackpot game state). Whether or not the number of consecutive jackpot game states controlled to the probabilistic state or the time saving state +1) has reached a predetermined number of times, and whether or not the variable display game in which the display result is a loss combination has continued for a predetermined number of times, "Non- Variable display of variation pattern of "reach" ("loss without reach") Characters 4000a ~, depending on other conditions such as whether or not the game has continued for a predetermined number of times and whether or not the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined number. The ratio at which 4000c is displayed and the ratio at which the specific effect is executed may be different.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 5]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of the image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is defined as (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is defined as (Y + 1) pixels. Then, the coordinates of the pixels in the upper left corner of the display screen are set to (0,0), and the coordinates of the pixels in the lower right corner of the display screen are set to (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as the first area α, and the coordinates (a + 1,0). The rectangular area defined by the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices is defined as the second area β. There is no overlapping region between the first area α and the second area β. Further, in this example, the second area β is a wider area than the first area α.

In the first area α, the number of prizes related to the number of prizes in each winning slot, such as the number of winnings in the general winning slot, the number of winnings in the first starting winning slot, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning slot, etc. Numerical information can be displayed. In the second area β, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), an error message display area 5E, a fourth symbol display area 5A, 5B, a decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and a start winning memory display area 5H. Is provided. In the examples of FIGS. 42 and 43, the background image is visible in the second area β, but the background image is invisible in the first area α.

In this example, the overall image of the background image stored in the ROM 121 as the effect data has an overall width of (X + 1) pixels as shown in (b) and (c) of FIG. 44, which will be described later. This is an image in which the height is (Y + 1) pixels, the character D is climbing near the top of the mountain, and the character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. In the examples of FIGS. 42 (b) (c) and 43 (e) (f), the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0,0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices]. Of these, only the area corresponding to the second area β [the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is visible to the player. Of the entire area of the background image, the area corresponding to the first area α [the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] is invisible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 42 (b) (c) and 43 (e) (f), the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area is visible, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is invisible.

In the examples of FIGS. 42 (b) (c) and 43 (e) (f), in the first area α, (1) the total number of winnings to the general winning opening on the day, "today's general winnings". And (2) "Today's navel winning number" which is the total number of winnings to the first starting winning opening on the day, and (3) "Today's total number of winnings to the second starting winning opening on the day" Three items of "Electric chew winning number" are displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the effect control CPU 120, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening, the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When a general winning opening designation command is received and a winning entry occurs in the starting winning opening, the starting winning is specified as to which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won. Receive a mouth specification command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can individually total the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) "Today's general prize number" is 70, (2) "Today's navel prize number" is 521, and (3) "Today's electric chew prize number" is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the number of winnings in the starting winning opening in a contrastable manner, it is possible to relatively grasp the winning status of each winning opening.

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 42 (b) and 43 (e), in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 5A, and is decorated. The decorative symbol is variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, in the start winning prize memory display area 5H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one hold information corresponding to one hold of the special figure game. The image of the fourth symbol in the variable display, the image of the decorative symbol in the variable display, and the image of the hold information are all displayed only in the second area β.

It is assumed that the display layer of the fourth symbol, the display layer of the decorative symbol, and the display layer of the pending information are all higher than the display layer of the background image. Here, the fact that the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image means that when a certain image and another image are superimposed and displayed, the visibility of one image is changed to the visibility of another image. This means that display control is prioritized over gender. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 42 (b) (c) and 43 (e) (f), one of the area and the background image in which each image of the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information is displayed. Although the part area overlaps, in this case, regarding the overlapping area, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the reserved information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (on the player side).

Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 43 (f), the area where the decorative symbol is displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap, but in this case, the overlapping area Regarding the above, the display control is performed so that the error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative symbol is easy to see (including visible), while the decorative symbol is difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative pattern (on the player side).

As a display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β visible to the player in the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β in the entire background image is used as the background. It is set as the display layer of the image, and the area corresponding to the first area α in the entire area of the background image is not set as the display layer of the background image (that is, [coordinates (a + 1,0) and coordinates (X,) in the background image). Image data of only [a rectangular area defined with Y) as a vertex] may be used).

Further, as another display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire area of the background image visible to the player, the entire area of the background image is set in the display layer of the background image (that is,). The entire background image [using the image data of the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is the first in the display layer higher than the display layer of the background image. By setting another background image for winning number information (for example, a white and plain image) in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be visually recognized. You can do it. In the case of such a configuration, it is easy to see the image of the display layer lower than the display layer having a predetermined transmittance (for example, a white and plain image) for another background image for winning number information. , It becomes invisible when it is 0%), the image of the lower display layer may be visible, and by setting a predetermined transmittance, the background image of the lower display layer The area corresponding to the first area α becomes visible, and the character E becomes visible.

Further, the display layer of the winning number information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning number information does not deteriorate due to the display of other information in the first area α. Further, the display layer of the winning number information may be the same display layer as the error message in which the display area does not exist in the first area α, or may be a display layer higher than the error message, and may be higher than the error message. May be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer of the winning number information is the highest among all the display layers, and is displayed in the display area of other information (whether it is displayed in the first area α or the second area β). However, the visibility may not be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 42 (b), since the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are all performed in the second area β, these images are displayed. Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 5, the number of prizes to the general prize opening (“today's general prizes”) and the first start prize as the prize number information displayed in the first area α. The visibility of the number of winnings in the mouth ("Today's navel winnings") and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening ("Today's electric chew winnings") is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information.

Then, when the image display device 5 is performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information, if a prize is generated in the general winning opening, FIG. 42 ( As shown in d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command by the effect control CPU 120 (“Today's general winning opening number”). Is updated. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general prize opening while the fourth symbol is variablely displayed, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the hold information is displayed, the general prize displayed in the first area α is displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth is updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information do not hinder the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the general winning opening has been won and that the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol ends and the display result stops. At the same time, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends and the display result is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fourth symbol display area 5A is still lit (displayed) in a display color reminiscent of the detachment (the display result is stopped and displayed), and is used as a fixed decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the out-of-order symbols of "5, 3, 1" are stopped and displayed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the fourth symbol which is stopped and displayed (in the state where the display result is derived and displayed) and the stopped display (the display result is derived and displayed). Since all the decorative symbols (in the state) are displayed in the second area β, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α depending on the images displayed on the image display device 5. As information, the number of winnings to the general winning opening ("Today's general winning number"), the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening ("Today's navel winning number"), and the winning to the second starting winning opening The visibility of the number (“Today's number of winning electric chews”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Then, when the image display device 5 is performing the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol and a prize is generated in the general winning opening, as shown in FIG. 42 (d). Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“today's general winning number”) is updated. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are being performed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is increased. , Updated without hindering visibility. That is, the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol do not hinder the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the general winning opening has been won and that the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

In the example of FIGS. 42 (b), (c), and (d), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, but the first starting winning opening is reached. Even when the prize is generated, the prize is won in the first start prize opening regardless of the variable display and stop display of the 4th symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, as in the case of the general prize opening. The numbers are updated without disturbing visibility. In addition, when a prize is awarded to the second start winning opening, the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol are not applied, as in the case of the general winning opening. The number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (e) and 43 (f), when the effect control CPU 120 receives an abnormality detection designation command that specifies that an abnormality has occurred, an error message (“an error occurs in this example” occurs in the image display device 5. The image of the characters "I did.") Is displayed. As described above, the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the decorative symbol is variably displayed, or when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the abnormality detection designation command, the area where the decorative symbol is displayed and an error occur. With respect to the overlapping range with the area where the message is displayed, the display control is performed so that the error message is easy to see (including visible) and the decorative pattern is difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 43B, when viewed from the player, the error message is in front of (or the player side) the decorative symbol in the variable display (or the decorative symbol in the stopped display state). It looks like it is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 43 (f), since the error message is displayed in the second area β, the error message may be displayed in the image display device 5 in the first area α. The number of winnings to the general winning opening ("Today's general winnings"), the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening ("Today's navel winnings"), and the number of winnings displayed in 2 The visibility of the number of winnings in the starting winning opening (“Today's number of winnings in the electric chew”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

Then, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the error message is being displayed in the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 receives the general winning as shown in FIG. 43 (g). Based on the reception of the mouth designation command, the number of winnings to the general winning mouth displayed in the first area α (“Today's general winning number”) is updated. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the error message is being displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is not hindered in visibility. Will be updated. That is, the display of the error message does not hinder the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the general winning opening has been won and that the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

In the example of FIGS. 43 (f) and 43 (g), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, but the winning in the first starting winning opening is shown. When it occurs, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. Further, even when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening, the visibility of the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is hindered regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. Updated without.

Further, in the example of FIG. 43 (f), the characters "An error has occurred" are displayed, which simply notifies that an error has occurred based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Not limited to this, different error messages may be displayed depending on the type of abnormality specified by the abnormality detection specification command. For example, when an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a magnetic anomaly has occurred is received, the characters "A magnetic error has occurred." Is displayed, and an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a vibration abnormality has occurred has been received. Occasionally, the text "A vibration error has occurred." May be displayed, and when an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a radio error has occurred is received, the text "A radio error has occurred." May be displayed. ..

In this example, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as the first area α, and the coordinates (a + 1). , 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) are defined as the vertices of the rectangular area β, but the first area where the winning number information can be displayed, the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the hold The second area on which information and error messages can be displayed is not limited to the rectangular area, and may be any area on the screen that does not overlap with each other.

(Display / non-display setting of winning number information)
As described with reference to FIG. 4, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 for operating the glass door frame 3a by opening it forward (the clerk at the game hall can operate it but the player cannot operate it) is in the display position (second). Position) is set, and when the player's setting screen (see FIG. 5) is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by the operation of the player, the general winning opening is set. Information on the number of winnings related to the number of winnings in the door is to be displayed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 are display modes of the screen in a state where the setting to display the winning number information is made in this way, and when the setting to display the winning number information is made. In the first area α, not only the number of prizes in the general winning opening, but also the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening (so-called “navel”) and the winning in the second starting winning opening (so-called “electric chew”). The number shall also be displayed. That is, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening according to the operation of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 4, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to be hidden (first position), the winning number information (the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is pressed by the operation button 30. , And, regardless of whether or not the setting for displaying the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is set, the winning number information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Do not show. Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the display setting (second position), when the operation button 30 is not set to display the winning number information (in the case of the non-display setting). ), The winning number information is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

The example shown in FIGS. 44 (b) and 44 (c) is a screen display mode in a state in which the winning number information is not displayed in this way, and the winning number information is not displayed. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed in the first area α, and the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening (so-called "navel") and the second starting winning opening (so-called "electric chew") The number of winnings to is also not displayed.

In this way, by making it possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information according to the setting operation on the amusement park side and according to the setting operation on the player side, it is possible to set according to the convenience of the amusement park side. In addition, the winning number information can be displayed according to the judgment of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 44 (a), (b), and (c), when the winning number information is not displayed, the error message display area 5E is compared with the case where the winning number information is displayed. Each area of the fourth symbol display area 5A, 5B, the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and the start winning prize memory display area 5H is common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number. It does not change with the setting that does not display information. This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change that sets whether or not to display the winning number information.

On the other hand, when the winning number information is not displayed, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a), (b), and (c), the winning number information is displayed (display examples of FIGS. 42 and 43). Unlike, the background image can be visually recognized in the first area α and the second area β. In the example of FIGS. 44 (a), (b), and (c), the first area of the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices]. Area corresponding to α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0,0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] and area corresponding to second area β [coordinates (a + 1,0) and coordinates ( Both of the rectangular areas defined with X and Y) as the vertices], that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

Therefore, in the example of FIGS. 44 (a), (b), and (c), the player is a character included in the rectangular region defined by the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. D is visible, and character E included in a rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is also visible.

In this way, regarding the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. While reducing the control burden by not changing (commoning) with the setting that does not, other images (background images) can be visually recognized by the setting that displays the winning number information and the setting that does not display the winning number information. By making the range different, we are trying to improve the interest when the winning number information is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the image display device 5 is performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information, the general winning opening is won. Even when the above occurs, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed because the information on the number of winnings is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), when the image display device 5 is performing the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol, a prize is also generated in the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 44 (d), since the winning number information is not displayed, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed.

In the example of FIGS. 44 (b), (c), and (d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed even when the winning to the general winning opening occurs. If it is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening will not be displayed even if a winning in the first starting winning opening occurs, and if a winning occurs in the second starting winning opening. However, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in each winning opening according to the operation of the player.

(Each item of prize number information)
FIG. 45 shows an example of items of the winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. It should be noted that FIG. 45 shows items related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening, but similarly to the items related to the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. Items related to the number of winnings can be displayed in the first area α.

It is possible to display "Today's general winning number (referred to as A1)" which is the total value of the winning numbers to each general winning opening from the time when the power of the game machine is turned on. The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and adds the value of the general winning number counter by 1 each time the general winning opening designation command is received. By doing so, A1 can be totaled.

In addition, it is possible to display "Today's general winning ratio (referred to as A2)", which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the power of the game machine is turned on. The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the value of the out number counter every time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. The total number of outs can be totaled by adding one by one, and A2 can be totaled by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs.

In addition, it is possible to display "Today's number of general prize balls (referred to as A3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening from the time when the power of the game machine is turned on. In addition, it is possible to display the "today's general prize ball ratio (referred to as A4)", which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the game machine is turned on.

The ROM 121 stores the number of prize balls defined for each of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, and the large winning opening. .. The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and the general prize opening designation command is designated each time the general winning opening designation command is received. A3 can be totaled by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize balls to the value of the general prize ball counter. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the prize ball counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening. The total number of prize balls can be totaled by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize holes specified by each command to the value of the prize ball counter for each reception of the large prize opening winning command that specifies the winning of the prize. It is possible to total A4 by calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies whether the current game state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the game state by the game state designation command, and wins a prize in the low base state. The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be separately aggregated.

Specifically, it is possible to display the "general winning number in the low base state (referred to as B1)", which is the total number of winnings in each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general winning number in a high base state (referred to as C1)" which is the total value of the winning numbers in.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low-base medium general winning number counter and the value of the high-base medium general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0. .. Then, during the period when the game state specified by the received game state designation command is in the normal state, B1 is added by adding the value of the low-base medium general prize number counter by 1 each time the general prize opening designation command is received. During the period when the game status specified by the received game status specification command is either the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the value of the high-base medium general prize counter is set for each reception of the general prize opening designation command. C1 can be totaled by adding one by one.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general winning ratio in the low base state (referred to as B2)", which is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general winning ratio in a high base state (referred to as C2)".

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low-base medium-out number counter and the value of the high-base medium-out number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0. Then, in the normal state, the number of low-base medium-outs can be totaled by adding the value of the low-base medium-outs counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out-ball detector is received. B2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of low-base medium outs. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the number of high base medium outs can be totaled by adding the value of the high base medium out number counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. It is possible to aggregate C2 by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high-base medium outs.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the low base state (referred to as B3)", which is the total number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the low base state, and the high base state. It is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the high base state (referred to as C3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the state.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low-base medium general prize ball counter and the value of the high-base medium general prize ball counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0. And. Then, during the period when the game state specified by the received game state designation command is in the normal state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening designated by the received general prize opening designation command is set to the low base medium general prize ball number counter. B3 (“general prize ball number in low base state”) can be totaled by adding to the value of, and the game state specified by the received game state specification command is either the probability change state or the time saving state. During the period, C3 (“General prize balls in the high base state” is obtained by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize openings specified by the received general prize opening designation command to the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter. ") Can be aggregated.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio in the low base state (referred to as B4)", which is the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, with respect to the number of prize balls in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio in a high base state (referred to as C4)" which is the ratio of C3.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets both the value of the low-base middle prize ball counter and the value of the high-base middle prize ball counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0. .. Then, in the normal state, each time the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening designated by each command is given to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the ball count counter, it is possible to total the number of low-base middle prize balls, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of low-base middle prize balls, B4 ("low base state" General prize ball ratio ") can be aggregated. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings specified by each command is increased each time the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball count counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be totaled, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls, C4 ("high" It is possible to aggregate the general prize ball ratio in the base state.

In this way, since the information related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be aggregated for each gaming state, the player can grasp the information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), attention is paid to items B1 to B4, and when the gaming state is a high base state (probability change state or time saving state), attention is paid to items C1 to C4. Become.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α when the game state is in the low base state, while does not display the items C1 to C4 when the game state is in the high base state. , C1 to C4 items may be displayed in the first area α, while items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Further, although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the game state, the items B1 to B4 are more visible than the items C1 to C4 in the low base state. The items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner that is easier to see (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4 in a high base state.

(Aggregation of prize number information during the set period)
In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can aggregate information on the number of prizes in the period set by the player, and is the total value of the number of prizes in each general prize opening in the set period. D1) ”can be displayed in the first area α.

When the aggregation period corresponding to the operation of the player shown in FIG. 46, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 during the set period and aggregates. The value of the timer is set in the set period (aggregation period according to the operation of the player), and the aggregation timer is started. Then, each time the general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is added by 1 during the setting period, and when the counting timer times out (when the set counting period has elapsed), the general winning during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

The aggregation timer is updated during the period when the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period after the last reception of the detection signal from the outball detector), while the period during which the number of outs is not increasing (for example,). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last detection signal was received from the out-ball detector), the aggregation timer may be stopped without being updated. In this way, the period during which the game ball is not fired in the game area 10 may be excluded from the aggregation period.

Further, when the aggregation timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the aggregation timer is set again during the set period (player's). The aggregation period is set according to the operation), and the aggregation timer starts again. Then, the value of the general winning number counter is added each time the general winning opening designation command is received, and when the totaling timer times out again (when the set totaling period has elapsed again), the general winning number counter during the set period The value of is displayed as D1 in the first area α. In this way, for each aggregation period set by the player, D1 corresponding to the aggregation period is displayed.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general winning ratio (referred to as D2)", which is the ratio of D1 to the number of outs of the game machine in the set period. When the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 during the set period, the value of the out number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 is set to 0. By adding the value of the out number counter during the set period by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received, the number of outs in the set period can be totaled. D2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls (referred to as D3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the set period. Further, it is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio (referred to as D4)", which is the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period.

When the aggregation period according to the operation of the player shown in FIG. 46, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 to 0, and at the same time, sets it to 0. The value of the counting timer is set in the set period (the counting period according to the operation of the player), and the counting timer is started. Then, each time a general winning slot designation command is received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning slot designated by the general winning slot designation command is added to the value of the general winning slot counter during the set period, and the counting timer is set. The value of the general prize ball counter during the set period when the time-out occurs (when the set aggregation period has elapsed) is displayed in the first area α as D3.

When the aggregation timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the aggregation timer is set again during the set period (player). The aggregation timer is set to the aggregation period according to the operation of, and the aggregation timer starts again. Then, the value of the general prize ball counter is added every time the general winning opening designation command is received, and when the totaling timer times out again (when the set totaling period has elapsed again), the general prize ball during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed as D3 in the first area α. In this way, for each aggregation period set by the player, D3 corresponding to the aggregation period is displayed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball counter value stored in the RAM 122 to 0 during the set period, the effect control CPU 120 also sets the prize ball counter stored in the RAM 122 during the set period. The value of is set to 0, and each time the start winning slot designation command, the general winning slot designation command, and the large winning slot winning command that specifies the winning to the grand winning slot are received, the winning slot specified by each command is received. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to to the value of the prize ball counter during the set period, the number of prize balls in the set period can be totaled, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period. It is possible to total D4 by calculating.

Since the general winning opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 specifies which general winning opening the game ball has won, the effect control CPU 120 has the first general winning openings 50A to the first. 4 The number of winnings to the general winning opening 50D is totaled individually, and the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4 and D1 to D4 are totaled for each general winning opening, and the total value is calculated. It is possible to display in the first area α.

Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and related to the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the items is to be displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the gaming state and the like. For example, items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening It may be possible to select which of the related items to be displayed in the first area α by an operation on the playground side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30), and the player side. (For example, an operation using the operation button 30) may be selected.

In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the aggregated value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the aggregated value has not reached the reference value. As shown in FIG. 46 (4) described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the aggregated value of the item displayed in the first area α does not reach the reference value of the item. .. As a result, the player selects the game machine by grasping whether or not the aggregated value of the items displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value as compared with the reference value of the item. It can be used as a judgment material (whether or not to continue the game in the game machine).

Next, a method of setting the aggregation period will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the aggregation period setting screen of FIG. 46 further sets the aggregation period when the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2) described above is selected to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. A screen that is displayed when a selection screen for selecting whether or not to select is displayed, and when the selection to set the aggregation period is made on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed) And.

On the setting screen of FIG. 46 (1), the message "Please set the aggregation period" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 30 is displayed below it. On the setting screen, an icon containing the characters "10 minutes", an icon containing the characters "30 minutes", and an icon containing the characters "60 minutes" are displayed, and it is called "Enter button after selecting with the jog dial". A message is displayed, and an arrow prompting the user to press the operation button 30 (jog dial) after rotating the operation button 30 is displayed.

To set the aggregation period to 10 minutes, rotate the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the left to select the icon containing the characters "10 minutes", and then press the operation button 30 to "set". The message "The period is 10 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. Further, when the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 46 (1), when the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon including the character "30 minutes" selected, FIG. 46 (2) As shown in, the message "The setting period is 30 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. If the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes, the operation button 30 (jog dial) is rotated to the right to select the icon containing the characters "60 minutes", and then the operation button 30 is pressed. The message "The setting period is 60 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

In this way, it is possible to set a desired aggregation period according to the operation of the player. In the example of FIG. 46, 30 minutes is set as the aggregation period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (3), in the first area α, the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as the “general winning number (D1) during the set period”. In the example of FIG. 46 (3), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is stored. Since it is 37, the aggregated value exceeds the reference value. Therefore, there is no notification that the aggregated value has not reached the reference value.

On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 46 (4), 30 is stored as a reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is totaled. Since the value is 29, the aggregated value has not reached the reference value. Therefore, a notification that the total value has not reached the standard value (display of a message "below the standard value (30 times / 30 minutes)") is given.

(Items related to the number of winnings in the starting winning slot)
In addition, since the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning opening designation command for designating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won when a winning is generated in the starting winning opening. By the same method as the aggregation process when receiving the general winning opening designation command that specifies which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings has been won, "Today's number of winnings to the 1st starting winning opening (A1) "Equivalent)", "Today's first start winning opening ratio (equivalent to A2)", "Today's number of winning balls given based on winning the first starting winning opening (equivalent to A3)", And "The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the prize to today's first start prize opening to today's total prize balls (equivalent to A4)", and "Today's second start prize opening" Number of winnings (equivalent to A1) ”,“ Today's winning ratio to the 2nd starting winning opening (equivalent to A2) ”,“ Number of prize balls awarded based on today's winning to the 2nd starting winning opening (Equivalent to A3) ”and“ Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's second start winning opening to today's total number of prize balls (equivalent to A4) ”. Therefore, it can be displayed in the first area α.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)", "the first in the low base state". The number of prize balls given based on the winning of 1 start winning opening (corresponding to B3), and the first starting winning opening in the low base state with respect to the number of prize balls given in the low base state. The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the prize (corresponding to B4), "the number of prizes to the second start winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)", and "the second start in the low base state". The winning ratio to the winning opening (corresponding to B2), "the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B3)", and "the prize given in the low base state" The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the second starting prize opening in the low base state to the number of prize balls (corresponding to B4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. Is.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)", and "the first in the high base state". The number of prize balls given based on the winning of 1 start winning opening (corresponding to C3), and the first starting winning opening in the high base state with respect to the number of prize balls given in the high base state. The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the prize (corresponding to C4), "the number of prizes to the second start winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)", and "the second start in the high base state". The winning ratio to the winning opening (corresponding to C2), "the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the second starting winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C3)", and "the prize given in the high base state" The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the second starting prize opening in the high base state to the number of prize balls (corresponding to C4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. Is.

In addition, "the number of prizes to the first start winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D2)", "the first starting prize in the set period" The number of prize balls given based on the winning of the mouth (corresponding to D3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the set period is given based on the winning of the first starting winning mouth in the set period. "Ratio of the number of prize balls (corresponding to D4)", "Number of prizes to the second starting prize opening in the set period (corresponding to D1)", "Ratio of winnings to the second starting winning opening in the set period (equivalent to D1)" "Equivalent to D2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on winning the second starting prize opening during the set period (corresponding to D3)", and "Setting for the number of prize balls awarded during the set period" The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the second starting winning opening in the period (corresponding to D4) ”can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α.

(Display of roles and ratios)
Further, in the game machine 1, also in the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11, each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, the following , Also called "entry area"), the number of game balls entering the area is totaled. Further, in the game machine 1, predetermined information such as the winning combination and the winning combination can be displayed on the display monitors 29 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 provided on the main board 11.

As described above, it is usual for the game machine manufacturer to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the game machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game medium enters the general winning area at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the gaming machine having the general winning area. Hereinafter, the display of the accessory ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the totalization of game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 11 will be described.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 49 is a board that controls games. As shown in FIG. 51 (A), the main board 11 is enclosed in a board case 201, and a display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface side of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 is arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the glass door frame 3a is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the game board 2 when the glass door frame 3a is opened. This is the front of the door, which is different from the front of the game machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the game machine 1 may be common.

On the main board 11, information regarding the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the large winning opening ( The number of prize balls by winning the prize to the attacker) and the total number of prize balls are input and totaled, and the display monitor 29 is the ratio of the number of prize balls by the prize to the large winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Ren (%), the role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Denchu) to the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. ) Is displayed. The role-ren is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) by winning a prize in the large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below). Is the ratio. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), and the big winning opening. It is the sum of the number of prize balls due to winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and as the passable width of the game ball fluctuates, the expected winning ratio of the game ball fluctuates. is there. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning rate of the game ball is a certain amount.

As a method of totaling and calculating information on winning a game, the number of prize balls (general prize balls) by winning the first starting port (heso) and the general prize opening (sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls, the first 2 The number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the starting prize opening (Denchu), and the special electric role prize, which is the number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening (attacker). The number of balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and 10 sets, that is, 60,000 winning combinations (%) and winning ratios (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power by winning the first starting port (Heso) and the general prize opening (Sode) The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. Further, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 66000 11 sets are stored, and the cumulative winning combination (%) and winning combination (%) within the range of these numerical values can be calculated. it can.

The display monitor 29 switches and displays 60,000 winning combinations (%), winning ratios (%), and cumulative winning combinations (%) and winning ratios (%) at predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). be able to. That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first starting opening (navel) and the winning to the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning a prize and the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying 60,000 winning roles (%) is reflected in the 60000 winning combination ratio (%) displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 60,000. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the role ream (%) and the role ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the total prize balls Such discrepancies can be prevented by performing input and aggregation of numbers at predetermined timings in the switching display (for example, display timings of 60,000 winning combinations (%)).

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the large winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the prize ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the game machine. In addition, the number of winning balls for a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. Therefore, the role association can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Role Ren = [Number of consecutive winning balls / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (1)
Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive winning balls + Number of winning balls) / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 decimal point rounded down by dividing 42000 by 60,000).
However, since the microcomputer used in the game machine cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. The accessory ratio is calculated as 70% from the 70 obtained here. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. The accessory ratio is calculated as 70% from the 70 obtained here. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, division may be performed by 1000.

In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the game machine can only perform calculations between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is truncated from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used in the game machine can be facilitated, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, a decimal number. Calculate 234 in the notation. Similarly, for 00A410h, which is the number of balls acquired as a character, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down, and the number of balls acquired as a character is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, this 2 is divided by 156 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the game machine becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error will be + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is approximated to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 201 is made of a material having translucency, so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 can be visually recognized. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front of the main board 11. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 29. The "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.

Further, the substrate case 201 is provided with a sticker for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main substrate 11. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 29. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, when the display monitor 29 is arranged in the first part of the main board 11 (for example, the central part of the main board 11), the second part is different from the first part in the main board 11. Even if other electrical components or the like are arranged in a portion (for example, a peripheral portion of the main board 11), a hole portion, a heat radiation hole, or a seal is arranged in a portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11. Good. In particular, the heat dissipation hole is preferably provided in the vicinity of the display monitor 29 in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 29. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiating hole is arranged at a position not directly in front of the display monitor 29. According to this, since the display monitor 29 does not interfere with the visibility, it is easy to confirm the information regarding the winning.

Further, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap the portion of the substrate case 201 corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11. Specifically, the portion of the board case 201 corresponding to the second part of the main board 11 does not overlap with the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. To. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being hindered by the wiring.

Further, the main board 11 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the game machine, but in order to avoid misidentification with the 7-segment display monitor 29, the main board 11 is separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them so as to sandwich the. The other electronic components referred to here are preferably large-scale control components such as a CPU.

In addition, a storage area for storing information about winning a game (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total information about winning a game stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters of up to 2 bytes), a prize ball). The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be described further later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated and initialized when an abnormality is detected, the value of the number of prize balls acquired is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, the abnormality count error display or the warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, the abnormality count error display or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after the initialization process is performed. The abnormal count error display and warning display will be further described later.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1976/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations on the game control microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following formula. In the division of 1976/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100 and the decimal point is rounded down so that 1976/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the part after the decimal point is truncated, it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or combination (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the winning ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) are not displayed on the display monitor 29 until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. Or, even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

Further, the display monitor 29 displays the winning combination (%) and the winning combination (%) on 7 segments, and displays the respective values by switching them every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is calculated after 30 seconds. If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate. For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 29 shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 (A), the numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits.

Further, in the above calculation method, an example of totaling the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls for the bonus, and the number of winning balls for the continuous bonus on the counter is shown, but as the counting method, each of the attacker and the electric chew A sensor provided detects that the game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, each prize ball number is individually totaled, and then a counter for the number of winning balls and a counter for the number of consecutive winning balls. You may calculate the value to be aggregated in. In addition, a sensor individually provided for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chew merge, are used, and based on the detection result. The value to be aggregated in the counter of the number of balls acquired as a bonus and the counter of the number of balls acquired as a continuous bonus may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the winning combination ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which the sensors provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result.

As shown in FIG. 49, a display monitor 29 is connected to the main board 11 of the game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 50, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 1) provided in the game machine frame 3 in the game machine 1. On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided. There is. The main board 11 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. The main board 11 may overlap with each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main substrate 11 may be overlapped so as to be on the upper side of each peripheral substrate.

The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, and a second general winning number counter. A third general prize number counter, a fourth general prize number counter, and a large prize number counter are provided.

The first gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 21A. The second gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 21B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B.

The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 24A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 24B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 24C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. The large prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

A clear switch is connected to the main board 11. The clear switch is arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position where employees and the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the winning combination and the winning combination stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when a situation occurs in which the calculation of the winning combination or the winning combination has to be redone, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the winning combination or the winning combination. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal combination or combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

Further, the main board 11 is provided with an RTC 106. The main board 11 can detect the current time by RTC106. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by making initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 51 (A), the main board 11 is housed in the board case 201. A caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. The sealing sticker 11S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The sealing sticker 11S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. In this way, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker 11S.

The display monitor 29 includes a four-digit display unit of a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. The first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display units 29A to fourth display units 29D can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in a very short cycle.

Each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 51 (B) is displayed on the display monitor 29. The aggregation period is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B of the upper two digits, and the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D of the lower two digits. In the display No. 1, the short-term winning combination is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term winning combination is displayed. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative winning combination, and display No. 2 displays the total cumulative winning combination.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 60,000. The period for calculating the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the combination and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the combination and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the winning combination and the winning ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the role-ren may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls, and the role ratio is the number of prize balls due to winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the big winning opening in the jackpot game state. It may be the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the winning of.

When the short-term combination of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B display "y6." "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the short-term combination of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term combination is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B.

When the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. Further, when the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative combination is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D.

The main board 11 determines the number of game balls that have entered the attacker, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening in calculating the winning combination and the winning ratio. Aggregating. In the main processing, the CPU 103 includes a first gate switch 21A and a second gate switch 21B, a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning port switch 24A to a fourth general. A status confirmation process for confirming the status (presence / absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning port switch 24D is performed.

In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signals are output from the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the values of the first gate pass count counter and the second gate pass count counter are added, and the first start port switch 22A, When the detection signal is output from the second start port switch 22B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the detection signal is output. When the value of the large winning number counter is added and the detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. Is the number of game balls entering each entry area (each prize) by adding the values of the first general prize counter, the second general prize counter, the third general prize counter, and the fourth general prize counter. The number of game balls won in the mouth) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (included in the switch state confirmation process). ) Therefore, it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each approach area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to an increase in the number of execution programs. ..

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening by the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 52, the number of prize balls for each winning opening classified here is the general winning opening prize ball (the winning ball from the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode)). 1st start winning prize ball (prize ball by winning the 1st starting prize opening (heso)), ordinary electric role prize ball (prize ball by winning the electric chew), special electric role prize ball (winning to the attacker) It is the number of prize balls. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls. In the CPU 103, the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first starting opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls to the general winning opening and the first starting opening The number of winning game balls may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting opening prize ball The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of these prize balls. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas including a counter of a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. The number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added to the 0th storage area. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total cumulative total for each winning opening. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of counters of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a combination / combination ratio storage area for storing the combination / combination of 10 sets and the total cumulative combination. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the winning ratio and the winning combination of 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of winning balls based on the number of winning balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And the total cumulative role ratio and the role combination are stored in the combination role ratio storage area. The winning combination ratio storage area for storing the winning combination ratio and the winning combination for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. The winning ratios and winning combinations for 10 sets and the total cumulative total can be stored with a margin at a counter of up to 1 byte, for example, when storing them as integers.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU in the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in registers, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 53, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a built-in ROM area of a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; the same applies hereinafter) in the memory space. Is assigned to. The CPU 103 performs various control processes in the built-in ROM area.

Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the built-in register area of FE00H to FEBFH in the memory space. The CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and writes data to the register via the built-in register area.

Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (built-in RAM area) of F000H to F3FFH in the memory space. The CPU 103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 and write data to the RAM 102. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are unused areas.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, a used area program area, a used area data area, a non-used area program area, and a non-used area data area are assigned to the built-in ROM area. In addition, a free area is allocated between the used area program area and the used area data area. Similarly, free space is allocated between the used area data area and the non-used area program area, and between the non-used area program area and the non-used area data area. The CPU 103 specifies the built-in ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101.

Of these, the used area program area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data of the game-related program related to the progress of the game is stored. The game-related programs stored in the used area program area include a game control program, which is a program for controlling the game, and a special symbol display output program, which is a program for displaying special figures and ordinary figures. There is. These game control programs and special symbol display output programs are stored in the used area program area. The game control program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program that controls the progress of the game, such as a big hit lottery program for lottery for the transition to the big hit game state.

In the unused area program area, the combination and the combination are composed of instruction data (opcode) for the CPU 103 to calculate the combination and the combination ratio, and supplementary data (operator) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data of a program for calculating and displaying the role ratio (hereinafter, may be referred to as a combination combination ratio related program) is stored. The combination-role ratio-related program includes a combination-role ratio calculation program for calculating the combination-role ratio and a combination-role ratio display output program for displaying the combination-role ratio and the combination-role ratio on the display monitor 29. ing. In the unused area program area, a combination combination ratio calculation program and a combination combination ratio display output program are stored. The combination-role ratio calculation program is a program different from the progress of the game.

Here, the used area program area and the non-used area program area will be further described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the configuration of a used area program area and a non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. As shown in FIG. 55, in the used area program area, "switch input processing", "digit output processing 1", "jump processing to the unused area (digit output processing 2)", and "error detection processing" are used as game-related programs. "Random update processing" "Special figure processing" "Public drawing processing" "Information output processing" "Prize ball processing" "Test terminal processing" "Vortex processing" "Memory display processing" "Error notification processing" "Unused area (role) Each program of "jump processing to ratio calculation processing)" is stored. Further, in the non-used program area, each program of the combination "digit output processing 2", "jump processing to the used area (error detection processing)", and "role ratio calculation processing" is stored. In the CPU 103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared and executed by one interrupt process. Further, in the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2, the LEDs on the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the display monitor 29 are displayed by dynamic lighting. However, static lighting may be used instead of dynamic lighting.

Of these processes, the program that performs the "digit output process 1" corresponds to the special symbol display output program, and the program that performs the "digit output process 2" corresponds to the combination combination ratio display output program. Further, a program that performs from "error detection processing" to "error notification processing" (hereinafter, also referred to as "game progress control processing") corresponds to a game control program, and a program that performs "combination ratio calculation processing" is a combination. Corresponds to the role ratio calculation program. In the combination / combination ratio calculation program, the combination / combination ratio is calculated, and the display pattern when the calculated combination / combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, in other words, a plurality of LEDs on the display monitor 29 (FIG. 67). The light emission patterns of the first segment SG1 to the seventh segment SG7 and the dot SG8) shown in the above are determined.

In the used area data area, reference data (for example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) referred to by the control program stored in the used program area is stored. Further, in the unused area data area, data used for displaying the winning combination and the winning combination is temporarily stored. For example, the unused area data area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a combination / combination ratio storage area for the total total. Further, in the unused area data area, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) for each winning opening. A total storage area and a combination combination ratio storage area for 10 sets are provided.

In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

Further, a used area program area in which the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored in the built-in ROM area of the CPU 103, and a non-used area program area in which the combination combination ratio display output program and the combination combination ratio calculation program are stored. Different upper addresses (starting addresses) are set for and.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56, the upper address of the subroutine in the used area program area in which the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored is “00”. The upper address of the subroutine in the unused area program area in which the combination / combination ratio display output program and the combination / combination ratio calculation program are stored is set to "01". As described above, the upper address of the program stored in the unused area program area is different from the upper address of the program stored in the used area program area.

As the call instructions for each of these programs, "CALLF" and "CALLmn" are used for the programs stored in the used area program area. Further, only "CALLmn" is used for the program stored in the unused area program area, and "CALLF" is not used. The special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the used area program area are called by "CALLF" or "CALLMn", but here, they are called by "CALLF". Further, the combination / combination ratio display output program stored in the unused area program area and the combination / combination ratio calculation program are called by "CALLmn" and are not called by "CALLF". Comparing these calling instructions, "CALLF" is a calling instruction having a shorter tone and a lighter capacity than "CALLmn".

Further, the CPU 103 includes a Q register. The Q register is a dedicated register for storing the upper address in the built-in ROM area as a fixed value. By providing the Q register, it is possible to call a program without the upper address. A fixed value corresponding to the upper address is set in the Q register. For example, a fixed value "00" is set when calling a program stored in the used area program area, and a fixed value "01" is set when calling a program stored in the unused area program area. Program. In this way, the Q register can execute the program in the non-used area program area by setting a fixed value in the upper address of the unused area program area after setting a fixed value in the upper address of the used area program area. It is possible.

Next, the execution order of the programs in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 will be described. In principle, the CPU 103 executes the program in the order of the addresses. Therefore, referring to FIG. 55, when executing the program, the CPU 103 first executes the "switch input process" in the used area program area, and then performs the "digit output process 1" according to the special symbol display output program. Execute. When starting interrupt processing, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 103 outputs the digit signals for the special figure and the normal figure obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. Execute the process to output to.

After executing the "digit output process 1", the CPU 103 jumps from the used area program area to the non-used area program area, and executes the "digit output process 2" according to the combination combination ratio display output program. When jumping from the used area program area to the non-used area program area, a fixed value "01" is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal regarding the winning combination and the winning combination obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 29. Therefore, the "digit output process 1" and the "digit output process 2" are continuously executed.

After performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 jumps from the unused area program area to the used area program area, and performs processing according to the game control program. When jumping from the unused area program area to the used area program area, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. The CPU 103 performs "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special drawing processing", "general drawing processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test terminal processing", and "solenoid processing" in the processing according to the game control program. "Memory display processing" and "error notification processing" are executed in sequence. The CPU 103 generates digit signals for special figures, ordinary figures, and the like by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 103 executes the "error notification process", and when the process according to the third program is completed, jumps from the used area program to the unused area program, and "combined combination calculation process" according to the combination combination ratio calculation program. To execute. The CPU 103 calculates the winning combination and the winning combination by the "combination ratio calculation process", and generates a digit signal for the winning combination, the winning combination, and the like. In this way, the interrupt processing in the CPU 103 is completed.

In this way, the CPU 103 executes "digit output process 1" and "digit output process 2" in one interrupt process, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display. The special figure and the general figure are displayed on the device 20, and the combination and the combination ratio are displayed on the display monitor 29.

Next, the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing other configurations of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. In this example, as shown in FIG. 57, in the used area program area, "switch input processing", "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special drawing processing", "general drawing processing", "information output processing", and "award" Each program of "ball processing", "test terminal processing", "solar processing", "memory display processing", "error notification processing", and "digit output processing 1" is stored. Further, each program of "digit output processing 2" and "combination ratio calculation processing" is stored in the unused program area.

Next, the execution order of the programs in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 in this example will be described. Referring to FIG. 57, when executing the program, the CPU 103 first executes the "switch input process" in the used area program area, and then performs the process according to the third program. The CPU 103 performs "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special drawing processing", "general drawing processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test terminal processing", and "solenoid processing" in the processing according to the game control program. "Memory display processing" and "error notification processing" are executed in sequence. The CPU 103 generates digit signals for special figures, ordinary figures, and the like by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 130 subsequently executes the "digit output process 1" according to the special symbol display output program. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 103 outputs the digit signals for the special figure and the normal figure obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. Execute the process to output to. However, a digit signal for a special figure or a general figure obtained in this routine may be output.

Then, the CPU 103 shifts to the unused area program area as it is, and executes the "digit output process 2" according to the combination / combination ratio display output program. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal regarding the winning combination and the winning combination obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 29. Therefore, the "digit output process 1" and the "digit output process 2" are continuously executed.

After that, when the digit output process 2 is performed, the CPU 103 executes the "combination ratio calculation process" according to the combination combination ratio calculation program. The CPU 103 calculates the winning combination and the winning combination by the "combination ratio calculation process", and generates a digit signal for the winning combination, the winning combination, and the like. In this way, the interrupt processing in the CPU 103 is completed.

In this way, the CPU 103 executes "digit output process 1" and "digit output process 2" in one interrupt process, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display. The special figure and the general figure are displayed on the device 20, and the combination and the combination ratio are displayed on the display monitor 29.

For example, regarding the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area, the configuration shown in FIG. 55 is referred to as area configuration pattern A, and the configuration shown in FIG. 57 is referred to as area configuration pattern B. Further, the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area is an area configuration pattern in which the jump processing between the used area program area and the non-used area program area is excluded from the configuration shown in FIG. 55. Let it be C.

In this case, in the area configuration pattern A, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), in one cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 103, a special symbol display output program → a combination combination ratio display output program → a game control program → a combination combination ratio. The processing is executed in the order of the calculation program. Further, in the area configuration pattern B, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), in the interrupt processing in the CPU 103, the game control program → the special symbol display output program → the combination combination ratio display output program → the combination combination ratio calculation program. The processing is executed in order. Further, in the area configuration pattern C, as shown in FIG. 58C, processing is executed in the order of special symbol display output program → game control program → combination combination ratio display output program → combination combination ratio calculation program. .. Hereinafter, the interrupt processing showing the procedure in FIG. 58 (A) is referred to as the first interrupt processing, the interrupt processing showing the procedure in FIG. 58 (B) is referred to as the second interrupt processing, and the interrupt showing the procedure in FIG. 58 (C). The processing is called the third interrupt processing.

Next, the control for displaying the winning combination and the winning combination with respect to the display monitor 29 by the main board 11 will be described. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items related to the winning combination and the winning combination. FIG. 59A is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the display monitor. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), when the display on the display monitor 29 is started, the short-term combination of display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term role series of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term combination of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-1), the character "y" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and the character "6." is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term combination is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "1." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term role series of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-2), the character "y" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "3." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-3), the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and the character "6." is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the total cumulative combination is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative total is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-4), the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (B-5). After that, the display of the short-term combination of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term winning combination of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term winning combination ratio of display No. 2 to the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term combination, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination, and the total cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds.

Further, the content displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the above content and can be appropriately determined. For example, in the above example, characters such as "y" and "A" are displayed on the first display unit 29A, and numerical values are displayed on the second display unit 29B to the fourth display unit 29D. Characters may be displayed on the display unit 29B, and numerical values may be displayed on the first display unit 29A, the third display unit 29C, and the fourth display unit 29D.

Further, a numerical value may be displayed on all of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D, and a predetermined ratio or the like and a classification or the like may be indicated only by the numerical value. Alternatively, characters may be displayed in two places of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D, and numerical values may be displayed in the other two places. Further, a numerical range of characters may be set so that only characters are displayed on the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D. For example, "0" to "30" may be displayed as "P", "31" to "60" may be displayed as "Q", and "61" to "100" may be displayed as "R". The characters to be displayed are not limited to English characters, but may be hiragana, katakana, kanji, or the like. Further, instead of the characters, a symbol having no meaning may be displayed.

Further, when displaying a numerical value or the like on the display monitor 29, the color or display mode may be changed according to the displayed numerical value. For example, when displaying the winning combination ratio, if the winning combination ratio to be displayed is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it may be displayed in "blue", and if it exceeds the predetermined value, it may be displayed in "red". Further, when the displayed combination ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it may be lit and displayed, and when it exceeds the predetermined value, it may be blinked. In the blinking display, any display of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D may be blinked. For example, the entire first display unit 29A to fourth display unit 29D may be blinked, two of the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, or the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. You may make two of them blink. The display unit that is not blinking may be turned on or off.

Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the total sum and the total cumulative total for 10 sets and the combination combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination of the 10 sets and the total total are updated, respectively.

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", and "66", respectively. "117" "45" "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is "27", "81", and "", respectively. Update to 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 shown in FIG. 49 includes a door opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a. The opening of the glass door frame 3a does not correspond to an abnormality when performed by an employee, but often corresponds to an abnormality when performed by a person other than the employee. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a is included in the abnormality detection sensor group 26. When the door opening sensor detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a, the door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 11.

Door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 3a by an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a by a person other than the employee. Here, the door opening is detected on the assumption that the glass door frame 3a is abnormally opened. Further, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 3a normally, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes that the glass door frame 3a is opened. Since there are many, it is possible to prevent a particular problem from occurring.

Subsequently, the control regarding the display of the winning combination and the winning combination executed on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the winning combination and the winning combination stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 102 is maintained without being cleared. The data used for displaying the winning combination and the winning combination stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. In addition, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. After performing the initial settings, the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. The combination / combination-related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing. Further, among the combination / combination ratio related processes, the combination combination ratio display output program is executed in the display switching control process (step S209 in FIG. 64), and the combination combination ratio calculation program is executed in other processes. The winning combination calculation process in the winning combination ratio calculation program includes other processing of the winning combination and the winning combination calculation. However, in the winning combination calculation processing, the winning combination and the winning combination ratio may be calculated, and a program corresponding to other processing in the winning combination / combination ratio calculation program may be separately prepared.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination / combination-related processing. On the main board 11, as shown in FIG. 61, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation is detected in the combination / combination-related processing (step S101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S101; YES), the warning display preparation is performed (step S102), and the process proceeds to step S103. Further, when the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and the abnormal operation is not detected (step S101; NO), the winning information is acquired (step S103). As for the winning information, the game ball is detected by any of the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D. Obtained by.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the business hours (step S104). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured and determined by RTC106. As a result, when the current time is within the business hours (step S104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105). Whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105; YES), the attacker wins more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time. It is determined whether or not the signal is present (step S106). The unit time and the predetermined number of balls here are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a prize cannot be won in a normal game. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls to be fired is 100 per minute, for example, 100 balls per minute can be appropriately determined. More specifically, when the unit time is 1 second, the predetermined number of balls is 5, or when the unit time is 10 seconds, the predetermined number is 30 or the like. The unit time is measured by RTC106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

As a result, when the attacker has not won more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time (step S106; NO), the number of prize balls is added according to the prize information acquired in step S103. Perform the process (step S107). The prize ball number addition process is performed when the warning display is not prepared. Here, if the warning display is being prepared, the combination / role ratio related processing is terminated as it is. In the prize ball number addition process, the general prize opening (sode), the general prize opening (heso), the ordinary electric role prize ball (electric chew), and the special electric role prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. Add the number of prize balls.

Further, in the prize ball number addition process, the general prize opening (sode), the general prize opening (heso), the ordinary electric prize ball (electric chew), and the special electric prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. Calculate the total number of prize balls for each prize ball. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. In addition, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed up (calculation timer = 0) (step S108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not timed up (step S108; NO), the combination / combination-related processing is terminated as it is. When the calculation timer is timed up (step S108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S109).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (total prize balls) obtained by adding in step S107 is the calculated execution number (step S110). The number of calculation executions can be an appropriate number, and is, for example, a reference for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th to 9th storage areas in the ring buffer to the 1st to 10th storage areas, respectively. The number can be slightly less than the total number of prize balls of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the number of calculation executions is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum number of payout balls from 6000.

As a result, if the number of prize balls (total prize balls) is not the calculated execution number (step S110; NO), the combination / combination-related processing is terminated as it is. If the number of prize balls is the calculated execution number (step S110; YES), the winning combination and the winning combination ratio are calculated (step S111). Here, the short-term combination, short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (total cumulative combination), and cumulative combination ratio (total cumulative combination ratio) are calculated respectively. Therefore, the short-term combination, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination, and the cumulative combination ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, preparations for displaying the combination / combination ratio are performed (step S112), and the combination / combination-related processing is completed.

If it is determined in step S104 that it is not within business hours (step S104; NO), or if it is determined in step S105 that the door frame is not closed (step S105; NO), the attacker is made per unit time in step S106. When it is determined that the game balls have won more than a predetermined number of balls (step S106; YES), preparation for displaying an abnormal count error is performed (step S113).

Next, the combination / combination display control process will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination / combination display control process. As shown in FIG. 62, in the combination / combination display control process, it is determined whether or not the combination / combination display is ready (step S201). When it is determined that the combination / combination display preparation process has not been completed (step S201; NO), it is determined whether or not the abnormality count error display preparation has been completed (step S202).

As a result, when it is determined that the preparation for displaying the abnormal count error is completed (step S202; YES), the abnormal count error is displayed (step S203). The abnormal count error display can be appropriately performed. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29, and "0" and "1" can be displayed in the lower two digits. Further, when displaying the abnormality count error, a predetermined abnormality count error display may be performed on another display device, for example, the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the like. Then, the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on the 7-segment display for displaying the error of the game machine provided on the main board 11. Moreover, you may perform these in combination.

When the abnormal count error is displayed, the combination / combination display control process is terminated. Further, in step S202, when it is determined that it is not determined whether or not the abnormality count error display preparation is completed (step S202; NO), it is determined whether or not the warning display preparation is completed (step S204).

As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S204; YES), the warning display is performed (step S205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29, and "0" and "6" can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 29 may be blinked or may be displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 29 in order to indicate that the warning is given. Alternatively, the display may be displayed by increasing the brightness of the display on the display monitor 29. As described above, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays. After displaying the abnormal count error, it may proceed to the determination of whether or not the warning preparation is completed (step S204). Here, when it is determined that the warning preparation is completed (step S204; YES)), the abnormality count error display and the warning display are performed. In order to display the abnormal count error and the warning on the display monitor 29, for example, the abnormal count error display and the warning display may be repeated for several seconds, for example, at intervals of 5 seconds. Further, it may be displayed by another display method.

Further, when displaying a warning, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device, for example, an image display device 5, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, or the like, or a game. The effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on the 7-segment display for displaying the error of the game machine provided on the main board 11. Moreover, you may perform these in combination.

When the warning is displayed, the combination / combination control process is terminated. Also, when it is determined in step S204 that the warning display preparation is not completed (step S204; NO), the combination / combination control process is also terminated.

Further, when it is determined that the combination / combination display preparation is completed (step S201; YES), the display restriction confirmation process is performed (step S206). In the display restriction confirmation process, a process of determining whether or not to restrict the display of the combination / combination ratio is executed. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the display restriction confirmation process.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the display restriction confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not an error requiring door opening is detected (step S301). The door opening required error is an error that requires the gaming machine frame 3 to be opened forward from the outer frame in order to clear the error. Except for the abnormal count error, the errors that occur in the game machine 1 include, for example, various errors shown in FIG. 65. Each of these errors will be briefly described.

Error 1: Magnet error A magnet error (magnetic error) is an error caused by detecting a magnetic abnormality. When a magnet error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The magnet error is canceled by turning off the power switch. In addition, security information is output until the power switch is turned off.
Error 2: Prize ball abnormality error The prize ball abnormality error is an error caused by detecting a predetermined number of abnormal prize balls, for example, 2000 or more. An abnormal prize ball is, for example, a prize ball paid out when a game ball wins a prize in excess of the count number of the large prize opening. The prize ball abnormality error is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 3: Prize ball error The prize ball error is an error that occurs when a prize ball is detected in the winning opening but no prize ball is paid out. The prize ball error is an error that occurs when an abnormality in the payout switch is detected or an abnormality in the payout case is detected. The prize ball error is canceled by eliminating the error that has occurred, such as canceling the error.
Error 4: Ball-out error The ball-out error is an error that occurs when the ball-out is detected and the game ball to be paid out is not on the back side of the game board 2 when the winning of the game ball to the winning opening is detected. The ball-out error is an error that is cleared when the supply of game balls is started.
Error 5: Radio wave abnormality error The radio wave abnormality error is an error caused by detecting a radio wave abnormality. The radio wave abnormality error is an error that is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 6: Main board communication failure error The main board communication failure error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 11 and the payout control board. The main board communication failure error is an error that is canceled when the communication between the main board 11 and the payout control board is restored.
Error 7: Card unit error A card unit error is an error caused by poor communication between the main board 11 and the card unit. The card unit error is an error that is canceled when the communication between the main board 11 and the card unit is restored.
Error 8: Full tank error A full tank error is an error that occurs when the plate (upper plate or lower plate) on which the game ball is to be paid out becomes full and the game ball cannot be paid out. The full tank error is cleared when the game ball is removed from the plate on which the game ball is paid out and the tank is no longer full.
Error 9: Character first start error The character first start error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected when the character is started for the first time. The first-time activation error of the accessory is canceled by pressing the operation button 30.
Error 10: Unauthorized winning error An illegal winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball invades a large winning opening other than during operation. In the game machine 1, since the large winning opening is only the special variable winning ball device 7, an illegal winning error is not detected, and an error occurs in a gaming machine having two or more large winning openings. When an illegal winning error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The fraudulent winning error is cleared after a predetermined time, for example, 3 minutes has elapsed from the output of this security information.
Error 11: RTC-RAM error error The RTC-RAM error error is an error that occurs when the power switch is turned on, an RTC error is detected, and a backup failure is detected. The RTC-SRAM abnormality error is cleared after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds has elapsed from the occurrence.
Error 12: RAM clear error A RAM clear error is an error that causes a cold start when the power is turned on. When a RAM clear error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The time for outputting security information is, for example, 30 seconds. The RAM clear error is cleared after a predetermined time, for example, 31 seconds has elapsed since the error occurred.
Error 13: Vibration detection device abnormality error The vibration detection device abnormality error is an error detected when vibration occurs in the game machine. The vibration detection device abnormality error is cleared after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds has elapsed from the occurrence.
Error 14: Door opening error The door opening error is an error that occurs when the glass door frame 3a is opened from the gaming machine frame 3 or when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. The door opening error is cleared when the opened glass door frame 3a or the game machine frame 3 is closed.

Of these errors, errors 1 to 7 are door opening-required errors that require opening of the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to clear the error. On the other hand, errors 8 to 13 are errors that do not require opening of the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to clear the error, and are not errors requiring door opening. Since the error 14 is a door opening error, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 needs to be opened.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 63, it is determined whether or not the door opening required error is detected, in other words, whether or not any of the door opening required errors 1 to 7 is detected (step S301). If an error requiring door opening is detected (step S301; YES), it is determined whether or not the error requiring opening door flag is set (step S302).

Here, if the door opening required error flag is not set (step S302; NO), the door opening required error flag is set (step S303). If the door opening error flag is set (step S302; YES), the process proceeds to step S304 as it is.

Next, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is set (step S304). The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time for which the limit of the combination / combination ratio display is continued after the error requiring door opening is cleared. The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time in the set state, and does not measure the time in the reset state.

The time required to continue limiting the combination combination ratio display after the door opening required error is released can be, for example, the time required to release the door opening required error or a time somewhat longer than that time. Specifically, it may be 1 minute or 2 minutes, or 5 minutes or 10 minutes. Further, it may be a long time of 30 minutes or more. Further, the time required to release the door opening error may be uniformly fixed, or may be set according to the type of the door opening error. For example, for errors 1, 2, 5, etc. that are cleared by turning off the power switch, the time required to clear the door opening error needs to be shortened, and the error that has occurred needs to be resolved. May increase the time required to clear the door opening error.

If it is determined in step S304 that the measurement timer is set (step S304; YES), the measurement timer is reset (step S305). If it is determined that the measurement timer is not set (step S304; NO), the process proceeds to step S306 as it is. When the door opening required error is detected, the state in which the measurement timer is set is the state in which the door opening required error occurs again after the door opening required error is once released. Therefore, by resetting the measurement timer in step S305, if a door opening required error is detected again during time measurement by the measurement timer, the door opening required error detected later is cleared. The time can be measured with a measurement timer.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S306). As a result, when the door opening required error flag is set (step S306; YES), the combination combination ratio display restriction is executed (step S307), and the display restriction confirmation process ends. If the door opening error flag is not set (step S306; NO), the display restriction confirmation process ends as it is. As a restriction on the display of the combination of roles, for example, the display of the combination of roles is stopped.

If it is determined in step S301 that the door opening required error has not been detected (step S301; NO), it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S308). As a result, if it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S308; NO), the process proceeds to step S306.

When it is determined in step S308 that the door opening required error flag is set (step S308; YES), the door opening required error is once detected and then the door opening required error is cleared. (Step S309). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is set (step S310).

When the measurement timer is not set (step S310; NO), it is immediately after the door opening error is cleared. In other words, this flow flows only after the door opening error is cleared. At this time, the measurement time t (measurement timer = t) is set in the measurement timer (step S311). The measurement time t corresponds to the time for continuing the limitation of the combination / combination ratio display after the error requiring door opening is cleared.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer has timed up (t = 0) (step S312). If the measurement timer is set in step S310 (step S310; YES), it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is timed up (t = 0) as it is (step S312).

When passing through step S311, the measurement timer is not 0 (time is not up) (step S312; NO), so the process proceeds to step S306 as it is. Further, after the measurement timer is set, it is determined in step S310 that the measurement timer is set (step S310; YES). In this case, the measurement time decreases with the loop of the flow, and it is determined that the measurement timer is timed up when the time t elapses after the measurement timer is set.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer has timed up (t = 0) (step S312). Here, when the measurement timer is timed up (step S312; YES), the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag are cleared (step S313). If the measurement timer has not timed up (step S312; NO), the process proceeds to step S306 as it is without clearing the measurement timer and the door opening error flag.

If the vehicle does not go through step S313, the door opening error flag has not been cleared, so it is determined in step S306 that the door opening error flag is set (step S306: YES). Therefore, the combination combination ratio display restriction is executed. Further, when passing through step S313, since the door opening required error flag is cleared, it is determined in step S306 that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S306; NO). Therefore, the combination combination ratio display restriction is not executed. In this way, in the display restriction confirmation process, it is determined whether or not to execute the combination combination ratio display restriction. In summary, in the display restriction confirmation process, the time from the detection of the door opening required error and the time from the cancellation of the door opening required error to the elapse of the measurement time (= the time to continue the restriction of the combination combination ratio display) The combination role ratio display is restricted, and the combination combination ratio display is not restricted at other times.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether or not to execute the display restriction based on the determination performed in the display restriction confirmation process shown in step S206 (step S207). As a result, when the display restriction is executed (step S207; YES), the display restriction is executed (step S208), and the display of the winning combination ratio is restricted. Then, the combination / combination display control process is terminated.

If the display restriction is not executed (step S207; NO), the display switching control process is executed (step S209), and the combination / combination display control process is terminated. The display switching control process is executed in the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the display switching control process. As shown in FIG. 64, in the display switching control process, first, it is determined whether or not the display monitor 29 is performing the short-term combination display (step S401). When the short-term combination display is performed (step S401; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term combination display was started (step S402). The predetermined time here can be set to any time, for example, 30 seconds (30000 ms). Further, the predetermined time may be a time shorter than 30 seconds such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, or a time longer than 30 seconds such as 1 minute (60 seconds) or 10 minutes (600 seconds).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S402; NO), the display switching control process ends. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term combination display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S402; YES), the short-term combination ratio display control is performed (step S403), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term combination ratio display control, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the short-term combination ratio display is set.

Further, in step S401, when it is determined that the short-term combination display is not performed (step S401; NO), it is determined whether or not the short-term combination ratio display is performed (step S404). When the short-term role ratio display is performed (step S404; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term role ratio display was started (step S405).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S405; NO), the display switching control process ends. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term role ratio display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S404; YES), the cumulative combination display control is performed (step S406), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the cumulative winning combination display control, the cumulative winning combination is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the cumulative winning combination display is set.

Further, in step S404, when it is determined that the short-term combination ratio display is not performed (step S404; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative combination display is performed (step S407). When the cumulative combination display is performed (step S407; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative combination display was started (step S408).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S408; NO), the display switching control process ends. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S408; YES), the cumulative combination ratio display control is performed (step S409), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the cumulative combination ratio display control, the cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the cumulative combination ratio display is set.

Further, in step S407, when it is determined that the cumulative combination display is not performed (step S407; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative combination ratio display is performed (step S410). When the cumulative winning combination display is performed (step S410; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative winning combination display was started (step S411).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S411; NO), the display switching control process ends. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S411; YES), the short-term combination display control is performed (step S412), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term combination display control, the short-term combination display is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the short-term combination display is set. In this way, the display switching control process is completed.

In the short-term combination display control in step S403 described above, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed. Similarly, in the cumulative winning combination display control in step S406, the cumulative winning combination display control in step S409, and the short-term winning combination display control in step S412, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed.

In the game machine 1, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared, and the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are executed in one cycle of the interrupt process in the CPU 103. One cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 103 is about 4 ms, and the time required for the game progress control process (game control program) is, for example, about 2 ms.

FIG. 66 (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor or the like, and FIG. 66 (B) is the signal flow when the first interrupt process is executed. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the display state of the monitor and the like. Here, in the first cycle, a symbol (character) corresponding to "0" is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1) and "y" is displayed on the display monitor 29 (SEG2), and the first special symbol is displayed in the second cycle. Assume an example in which a symbol (character) corresponding to "1" is displayed on the symbol display device 4A and "6." is displayed on the display monitor 29.

In the third interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (C), a game progress process (game control program) is performed between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combination / combination ratio display output program). Is executed. Therefore, a difference of about 2 ms occurs between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combination / combination ratio display output program), and as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the digit is present. There is a delay in the output (DG) of.

As a result, in the first cycle, the symbol corresponding to "0" is clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1), but the display monitor 29 (SEG2) has a display problem. Specifically, the problems with respect to the example of trying to display the character corresponding to "y" on the display monitor 29 are as follows. As shown in FIG. 67, the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D of the display monitor 29 include eight LEDs arranged in seven segments and dots at the lower right. Assuming that these LEDs are the first segment SG1, the second segment SG2, the third segment SG3, the fourth segment SG4, the fifth segment SG5, the sixth segment SG6, the seventh segment SG7, and the dot SG8, the second segment SG2 and the second The 3rd segment SG3, the 4th segment SG4, the 6th segment SG6, and the 7th segment SG7 are displayed lightly. This problem occurs, for example, because the control for not lighting the display monitor 29 in the cycle before the first cycle has penetrated to the first cycle. Regarding the characters corresponding to "6." displayed in the second cycle, the second segment SG2, the fourth segment SG4, the sixth segment SG6, and the seventh segment SG7 were clearly displayed, but the first segment. SG1, 5th segment SG5, and dot SG8 are displayed lightly. This problem also occurs because, for example, the control of turning on the LED of the character corresponding to "y" on the display monitor 29 in the first cycle has penetrated to the second cycle.

On the other hand, in the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 66 (B), the digit output process 2 (combination / combination ratio display output program) is executed following the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program). Therefore, there is almost no difference between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combination / combination ratio display output program), as shown in FIG. 66 (B). , There is almost no delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first cycle, the symbol corresponding to "0" was clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1). Further, on the display monitor 29 (SEG2), all the characters corresponding to "y" were clearly displayed. In this way, in the first interrupt process, it is possible to prevent a display defect on the LED of the display monitor 29.

As described above, in the game machine 1, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 displays the short-term combination, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination, and the cumulative combination ratio. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 that controls the game so as not to interfere with the visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and wind turbines provided on the game board.

Further, the display monitor 29 is arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being hindered. Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation holes provided in the board case 201 are not directly in front of the board case 201. Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being obscured by the heat dissipation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being hindered.

Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being obscured by peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being hindered.

In addition, the display monitor 29 can display the winning combination and the winning ratio regarding the relationship between the prize balls paid out by the passage of the electric chew or the attacker and the prize balls paid out by the passage of the general winning opening. .. Further, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term combination and a cumulative combination at predetermined periods. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

Further, since the display monitor 29 displays the winning combination (short-term winning combination) and the winning combination (short-term winning combination) for each 6000 prize balls, the total number of prize balls becomes 6000, and so on. The numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit can be easily recognized. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10000. Alternatively, the unit may be time instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

Further, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the cumulative combination and the cumulative combination ratio in addition to the combination (short-term combination) and the combination ratio (short-term combination ratio) for each 6000 prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term combination or short-term combination ratio for each predetermined unit with the cumulative combination or cumulative combination ratio. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 housed in the crimped board case. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of fraud such as falsifying the display on the display monitor 29.

Further, the game machine 1 is provided with a detection means for detecting and detecting fraud in which appropriate predetermined information cannot be displayed. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours of the game hall, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of prizes. The game machine 1 operates during the business hours of the game hall, and it is highly probable that the counting of prize balls during the hours other than the business hours is a fraudulent act. Further, the game machine 1 plays a game with the door frame closed, and it is highly probable that the counting of prize balls while the door frame is open is a fraudulent act.

Further, during the game of the game machine 1, the game ball cannot be launched beyond a certain speed. For example, the maximum number of launches of a game ball is 100 per minute. Therefore, the maximum number of winning game balls in one minute is almost 100. Therefore, for example, when 100 or more game balls are won in 12 seconds, the probability of cheating is extremely high.

In the game machine 1, in order to detect fraud, a prize ball is obtained when the glass door frame 3a is not closed during business hours, or when the attacker wins more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time. The addition of numbers is excluded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress falsification of information such as role associations and role ratios due to these frauds. In addition, instead of the number of prize balls when the attacker has won more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time, fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time.

Further, in the game machine 1, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 102 reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area of the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

Further, the ring buffer is provided with the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and when the data in the zeroth storage area of the active buffer moves to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the tenth storage area is stored. It will be erased. Therefore, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity. In addition, it is possible to increase the amount of data that remains without being erased.

When moving the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with the data in the ninth storage area. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased in the ring buffer. Therefore, since the amount of data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity, and it is possible to calculate the winning combination and the winning combination with a large amount of data.

When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area is erased, but also all the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area is erased. Good. In this case, it is possible to more preferably prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. Further, a part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all the data in the ring buffer may be erased, and then a part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

Further, in the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer is described, but the data other than the ring buffer, for example, the storage area for storing the total cumulative total is also erased in part or all of the data. You may.

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine 1, each data of the short-term combination, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination, and the cumulative combination ratio is displayed every 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. The cycle for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate cycle. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be performed every hour. Further, the displayed data may be data other than the data of the short-term winning combination, the short-term winning combination, the cumulative winning combination, and the cumulative winning combination ratio, or may be only a part of these data.

In addition, when displaying each data of the short-term role association, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination combination, and the cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds, the short-term combination is displayed differently from other data. Specifically, short-term roles are displayed in red, and other data are displayed in green. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the short-term role association will display new data.

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine 1, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation. The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the winning combination or the winning combination. When this switch is operated, the data of the winning combination and the winning combination can be falsified, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the game machine 1, since this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, fraud such as falsification of data can be suppressed.

Further, in the game machine 1, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, and the third general winning opening switch 24C. , The winning combination and the winning combination ratio are calculated based on the number of winning balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. For example, using a sensor (count switch 23) individually provided for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passages for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chew merge. When the winning combination and the winning ratio are calculated by totaling to the counter of the number of winning balls and the counter of the number of consecutive winning balls based on the detection result, it is difficult to identify from which winning opening the winning combination. There is a risk that the calculation of the ratio and the role will be complicated. In this regard, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, the fourth general winning opening. By detecting that the game medium has won a prize with the switch 24D and calculating the winning combination and the winning ratio based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result, the number of winning balls is determined based on the winning of each winning opening. it can. Therefore, the winning combination and the winning ratio can be easily calculated and can be calculated accurately.

Further, when an error requiring door opening occurs, it becomes necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to clear the error. When the game machine frame 3 is opened, the main board 11 provided on the game machine frame 3 becomes visible from the outside of the game machine 1. Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be visually recognized by, for example, a player located outside the game machine 1.

Here, in the above-mentioned game machine 1, when an error requiring door opening occurs, the display of the winning combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 29 is restricted. Therefore, even if an error requiring door opening occurs and the display monitor 29 can be visually recognized from the outside of the game machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the combination / combination ratio.

Further, the restriction on the display of the combination / combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 29 is executed when an error requiring door opening occurs. Therefore, due to the occurrence of an error requiring opening of the door, it is necessary to open the frame 3 for the game machine, so that even when the player can see the display monitor 29 from the outside of the game machine 1, the player can see it. It is possible to prevent the display of the role-link ratio from being seen.

In the game machine 1 described above, the display of the combination / combination ratio to the display monitor 29 is restricted when an error requiring door opening occurs, but after the error requiring door opening occurs, the frame 3 for the game machine 3 The display restriction of the combination / combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 29 may be executed when is released. Even if the restriction on the display of the combination / combination ratio on the display monitor 29 is executed when the frame 3 for the game machine is opened after the error requiring door opening occurs, the player sees the display of the combination / combination ratio. It can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, the limitation of the display of the combination / combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 29 is a predetermined time after the error requiring door opening is canceled, specifically, the duration measured by the measurement timer after the error requiring door opening is released. Will be executed until. Therefore, immediately after the door opening required error is cleared, the game machine frame 3 is in a state of being opened even though the door opening required error is cleared. At this time, the display monitor 29 can be visually recognized by a player or the like from the outside of the game machine 1. In this regard, by continuing to limit the combination / combination ratio display from the time when the door opening error is cleared until the duration measured by the measurement timer elapses, the combination / combination ratio is given to the player from the outside of the game machine 1. It is possible to prevent the display of.

Further, in the game machine 1 described above, the duration is measured after the door opening error is cleared, but the duration is measured after the door opening error is cleared and the game machine frame 3 is closed. You may measure. In this case, the duration may be set uniformly regardless of the type of the door opening required error, or may be set according to the type of the door opening required error. Further, the time may be shorter than the duration measured after the door opening error is cleared.

The above error requiring door opening is an example, and may be another mode. For example, if the error clearing method is different and the errors can be cleared without opening the gaming machine frame 3 for the errors 1 to 7, these may be errors other than the door opening required error. On the contrary, if the errors 8 to 13 are errors in which the error cannot be cleared unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, these may be regarded as door opening required errors. Further, an error other than the error shown in FIG. 65, for example, an error that the game ball cannot be launched from the hitting ball launching device, an error that the ball lending cannot be performed, an error that the game board moves, and the like can be released by the release procedure and the like. It may be an error required. Further, even if it is necessary to open the frame 3 for the game machine in order to clear the error, the detection of the error is often found outside the business hours of the game hall, for example, a display abnormality of the image display device 5. In the case of an error that normally requires repair outside business hours, such as an error that results in a ROM check screen, an electric chew or a large winning opening, it may be treated as an error other than an error that requires opening the door.

Further, in the game machine 1 described above, the display restriction mode is the discontinuation of the display, but the display restriction may be another mode. For example, the display of the combination / combination ratio may be made lighter or smaller, or the display monitor 29 may display a display different from the combination / combination ratio. As a display different from the combination / combination ratio, an error display may be displayed, or for example, a display such as turning on all the segments may be displayed.

In the above-mentioned game machine 1, since the main board 11 and the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 are provided on the back surface side of the game machine frame 3, when the game machine frame 3 is opened, the roles are combined. Although the display of the ratio is limited, other aspects may be used. For example, the main substrate 11 may be provided on the surface of the game board 2 at a position where the glass door frame 3a cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the game machine 1 when the glass door frame 3a is closed. In this case, the display monitor 29 may also be provided on the surface of the game board 2 at a position where the glass door frame 3a cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the game machine 1 when the glass door frame 3a is closed. In the gaming machine of such a mode, instead of limiting the display of the combination / combination ratio when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the combination / combination ratio is displayed when the glass door frame 3a is opened. You may want to limit it. Further, regarding the continuation of the restriction on the display of the winning combination ratio, the opening / closing of the glass door frame 3a may be a condition instead of the opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 3.

Further, in the game machine 1, the CPU 103 stores a special symbol display output program and a game control program in the used area program area in the built-in ROM area, and the combination / combination ratio display output program and the combination / combination combination in the non-used area program area. The ratio display program is stored. In this way, the program related to the game is tested by storing the special symbol display output program and the game control program, the combination combination ratio display output program, and the combination combination ratio display program in different areas. It can be made easier. Further, in the CPU 103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared and executed by one interrupt process. Therefore, the digit output processing can be simplified.

Further, in order to standardize the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are continuously executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), in the first interrupt processing, the program is executed in the order of special symbol display output program → combination combination ratio display output program → game control program → combination combination ratio calculation program. doing. Further, in the second interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the program is executed in the order of the game control program → the special symbol display output program → the combination combination ratio display output program → the combination combination ratio calculation program. There is. Therefore, in both the first interrupt processing and the second interrupt processing, the game control program (second interrupt processing) is performed between the special symbol display output program (first interrupt processing) and the combination combination ratio display output program (second interrupt processing). The game progress control process) and the combination combination ratio calculation program (role combination ratio calculation process) are not inserted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the digit output process 2 and the like from being delayed, so that the LED display defects in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the display monitor 29 can be prevented. It can be prevented, and patterns and characters can be clearly displayed.

When the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared, the execution procedure of the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (A) or the second interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (B) is included. Just do it. For example, any program may be executed before or after the execution order of the first interrupt processing or the second interrupt processing.

Further, in the first interrupt processing and the second interrupt processing, the winning combination ratio calculation program is executed after the game control program is executed. Therefore, before calculating the winning combination ratio, the processing related to the main part of the game such as the lottery for the transition to the big hit game state is executed. Therefore, the delay of the game can be suppressed.

Further, in the first interrupt processing and the second interrupt processing, the combination combination ratio display output program is executed after the special symbol display output program is executed. Further, after the special symbol display output program is executed, a specific program such as a game control program or a combination combination ratio calculation program is not executed until the combination combination ratio display output program is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED display malfunction on the display monitor 29.

Further, the special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the used area are called by using "CALLF" having a short tone. On the other hand, the combination combination ratio display output program and the combination combination ratio calculation program stored in the unused area are called using "CALLmn", and the call using "CALLF", which has a short tone, is used. Will never be done. Therefore, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Further, the combination / combination ratio displayed on the display monitor 29 is determined by the combination / combination ratio calculation process in the unused area. The combination-role ratio calculation program and the combination-role ratio display output program are programs that are not related to the progress of the game. Since "CALLmn", which has a relatively long tone, is used for a program that is not related to the progress of the game, waste in the processing of the program can be reduced.

Further, in the non-used area, the call is made by "CALLmn", which has a relatively long tone, so that in the used area, the call can be made by "CALLF", which has a short tone. Therefore, it is possible to use a short-term and highly versatile instruction such as "CALLF" for a program related to game control executed in the used area.

Further, since the CPU 103 includes the Q register and calls the program by the Q register, the program can be called without specifying the upper address. However, since the upper address is set as a fixed value, for example, even if it can be used in the used area program area, it may not be used in the non-used area program area, and the versatility may be lowered.

In this regard, the upper address of the used area program area in the CPU 103 is "00", the upper address of the non-used area program area is "01", and the upper address of the non-used area program area is the upper address of the used area program area. It is different from the address. Further, when calling the program stored in the used area program area, the Q register is set to a fixed value "00". Therefore, since the Q register can be used when calling the program stored in the used area program area, the program stored in the used area program area can be called only by specifying the lower address. Further, since the upper address of the unused area program area is different from the upper address of the used area program area, the call of the program stored in the unused area program area by the Q register is prevented. Further, when calling the program stored in the unused area program area, the Q register is set to the fixed value "01". Therefore, since the Q register can be used even in the unused area program area, the Q register can be used also in the unused area program area while ensuring the versatility of the Q register.

Further, in the game machine 1 described above, the display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface side of the main board 11 in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized, but the display monitor is easy to see from an oblique direction. May be arranged. Hereinafter, a plurality of examples will be specifically described with respect to a mode in which the display monitor is arranged so as to be easily visible from an oblique direction (hereinafter referred to as “display monitor arrangement mode”).

The first display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a first display monitor arrangement mode, the second display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a second display monitor arrangement mode, and the nth display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as an nth display monitor arrangement mode. A main board 11 similar to the main board 11 shown in FIG. 51 (A) is used in each display monitor arrangement mode, and the main boards 11 all have the same structure. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 51 (A), the main substrate 11 is housed in the substrate case 202. Further, in the description of the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the left and right sides are based on the direction in which the main board 11 is viewed from the front. Therefore, the side where the game machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame is on the left side.

[First display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 68, in the first display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 129A is provided on the back surface side of the main board 11, and the display monitor 130A is provided on the base member 129A. The display monitor 130A is housed in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129A and the main substrate 11.

The base member 129A has a triangular columnar shape whose bottom surface is a right triangle, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the vertical direction. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side forming the right-angled portion of the right triangle on the bottom surface of the triangular prism having the shape formed by the base member 129A is overlapped with the back surface of the main substrate 11, and the other side forming the right-angled portion in the right triangle. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side extends in a direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main substrate 11. The side surface of the triangular prism (hereinafter referred to as “inclined surface”) including the side facing the right-angled portion in the right triangle is arranged in an inclined direction with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 11.

The display monitor 130A is provided on an inclined surface of the base member 129A. The display monitor 130A is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main board 11. FIG. 69 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game machine frame to which the main board is attached is opened from the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 69, in the display monitor 130A, when the gaming machine frame 3 to which the main board 11 is attached is opened from the outer frame 3A, the display monitor 130A is between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is arranged so that it faces the front when viewed from the open part.

When the display monitor 130A arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 130A faces the front when viewed from the open portion between the game machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is located in. For this reason, when a clerk or the like confirms the role-joint role ratio, the clerk or the like may perform the role-joint role ratio confirmation work only by slightly opening the frame 3 for the game machine without opening it widely. it can. Therefore, the work of confirming the winning combination ratio can be easily performed.

[Second display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 70A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 70A, in the second display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 129B is provided on the back surface side of the main board 11, and the display monitor 130B is provided on the base member 129B. The display monitor 130B is housed in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129B and the main substrate 11.

As shown in FIG. 50, the main board 11 is attached to the back surface of the game board 2 (see FIG. 2) provided in the game machine frame 3. The base member 129B has a plate shape and is erected on the back surface of the main substrate 11. Further, the main substrate 11 and the base member 129B are substantially orthogonal to each other. The display monitor 130B is provided on the side surface of the base member 129B. Therefore, in the display monitor 130B, the surface of the standing portion erected on the main board 11 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 on the open portion side of the door frame faces the open portion of the door frame. Have been placed. Further, the display monitor 130B is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main board 11.

The display monitor 130B arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main board 11 so as to face a direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main board 11. Further, the main board 11 is attached to the back surface of the game board 2 provided in the game machine frame 3. For this reason, when a clerk or the like confirms the role-joint role ratio, the clerk or the like may perform the role-joint role ratio confirmation work only by slightly opening the frame 3 for the game machine without opening it widely. it can. Therefore, the work of confirming the winning combination ratio can be easily performed.

In the first and second display monitor arrangement modes, the base members 129A and 129B are housed in the substrate case 202, but even if the base members 129A and 129B are formed so as to project to the outside of the substrate case 202. Good.

[Third display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 70B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 70B, in the third display monitor arrangement mode, the embedded inclined surface 11K is formed on the back surface of the main substrate 11. The buried inclined surface 11K is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 11.

The buried inclined surface 11K is formed as a part of the printed base material in the main substrate 11. A display monitor 130C is provided on the buried inclined surface 11K of the main board 11. Since the display monitor 130C is provided on the buried inclined surface 11K, when the game machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the front surface is viewed from the open portion between the game machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is arranged so that it faces. Further, the main board 11 and the display monitor 130C are housed in the case 202.

When the display monitor 130C arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 130C faces the front when viewed from the open portion between the game machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is located in. For this reason, when a clerk or the like confirms the role-joint role ratio, the clerk or the like may perform the role-joint role ratio confirmation work only by slightly opening the frame 3 for the game machine without opening it widely. it can. Therefore, the work of confirming the winning combination ratio can be easily performed.

[4th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 71 (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 71 (A), in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 129D from the first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 are provided on the back surface of the main substrate 11. A first display monitor 130D1 to a fourth display monitor 130D4 are provided on each of the first base members 129D1 to 129D4. The display monitor 130D is formed by the first display monitor 130D1 to the fourth display monitor 130D4. The display monitor 130D is housed in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129 and the main substrate 11.

The first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 all have a common shape. This shape will be described with reference to the first base member 129D1. The first base member 129D1 has a triangular columnar shape whose bottom surface is a right triangle. The first base member 129D1 has the same shape as the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode, but is smaller than the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode.

Specifically, the inclined surface of the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode is the same size as the size of the four 7 segments and the lower right dot (see FIG. 51 (A)). On the other hand, the inclined surface of the first base member 129D1 has a size equivalent to the size of one 7-segment and the lower right dot. The first display monitor 130D1 provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 129D1 can display one 7 segment and a dot at the lower right.

The first base member 129D1 is arranged at a position slightly to the left of the substantially center position in the height direction of the back surface of the main substrate 11. The second base member 129D2 is arranged on the right side of the first base member 129D1, and the third base member 129D3 is on the right side opposite to the left side on which the first base member 129D1 is arranged in the second base member 129D2. Is located in. The fourth base member 129D4 is arranged on the right side of the third base member 129D3, which is opposite to the left side on which the second base member 129D2 is arranged. In this way, the first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 are arranged side by side in the substantially horizontal direction.

A second display monitor 130D2 is provided on the inclined surface of the second base member 129D2. Similarly, a third display monitor 130D3 and a fourth display monitor 130D4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the third base member 129D3 and the fourth base member 129D4. The first display monitor 130D1 provided on the first base member 129D1 displays the contents corresponding to the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51 (A).

The second display monitor 130D2 provided on the second base member 129D2 displays the contents corresponding to the second display unit 29B of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51 (A). The third display monitor 130D3 provided on the third base member 129D3 displays the contents corresponding to the third display unit 29C of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51 (A). The fourth display monitor 130D4 provided on the fourth base member 129D4 displays the contents corresponding to the fourth display unit 29D of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51 (A).

When the display monitor 130D arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 130D faces the front when viewed from the open portion between the game machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is located in. For this reason, when a clerk or the like confirms the role-joint role ratio, the clerk or the like may perform the role-joint role ratio confirmation work only by slightly opening the frame 3 for the game machine without opening it widely. it can. Therefore, the work of confirming the winning combination ratio can be easily performed.

[Fifth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 71B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 71 (B), in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 129E from the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are provided on the back surface of the main substrate 11. The first display monitors 130E1 to the fourth display monitors 130E4 are provided on each of the first base members 129E1 to 129E4. The display monitor 130E is formed by the first display monitors 130E1 to the fourth display monitors 130E4. The display monitor 130E is housed in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129 and the main substrate 11.

The first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 all have the same shape as the first base member 129D1 to 1 fourth base member 129D4 in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. Further, the first display monitors 130E1 to the fourth display monitors 130E4 are the first bases in the same manner as the first display monitors 130D1 to the fourth display monitors 130D4 provided on the first base members 129D1 to 1 fourth base members 129D4. The members 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are provided, respectively.

The first base member 129E1 is arranged above the back surface of the main substrate 11 at a substantially central position in the width direction. The second base member 129E2 is arranged below the first base member 129E1, and the third base member 129E3 is arranged below the second base member 129E2. The fourth base member 129E4 is arranged below the third base member 129E3. In this way, the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged side by side in the substantially vertical direction. In this way, the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction.

A first display monitor 130E1 is provided on an inclined surface of the first base member 129E1. Similarly, the second display monitor 130E2, the third display monitor 130E3, and the fourth display monitor 130E4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the second base member 129E2, the third base member 129E3, and the fourth base member 129E4, respectively. There is. The first display monitors 130E1 to the fourth display monitors 130E4 provided on the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 include the first display units 29A to the fourth display units of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51 (A). The contents corresponding to 29D are displayed respectively. Further, since the first base members 129E1 to the fourth base members 129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction, the first display monitors 130E1 to the fourth display monitors 130E4 are also arranged in the vertical direction. Therefore, the four-digit displays on the first display monitors 130E1 to the fourth display monitors 130E4 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit displays on the first display monitors 130E1 to the fourth display monitors 130E4 may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

When the display monitor 130E arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 130E faces the front when viewed from the open portion between the game machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is located in. For this reason, when a clerk or the like confirms the role-joint role ratio, the clerk or the like may perform the role-joint role ratio confirmation work only by slightly opening the frame 3 for the game machine without opening it widely. it can. Therefore, the work of confirming the winning combination ratio can be easily performed.

[6th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 72 (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 72 (A), in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 129F is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 accommodating the main substrate 11, and the display monitor 130F is provided on the upper surface of the base member 129F. There is. The four-digit displays on the display monitor 130F are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130F may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

The base member 129F has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Further, the display monitor 130F provided on the upper surface of the base member 129F includes four 7 segments and a dot at the lower right (see FIG. 51 (A)). The board case 202 includes a board case main body 202A and a lid body 202B. The base member 129F is provided on the substrate case 202 so as to straddle the substrate case main body 202A and the lid body 202B of the substrate case 202.

The display monitor 130F arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 and is arranged along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the game machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the entire game machine frame 3 can be visually recognized from the outside of the game machine 1 only by slightly opening the game machine frame 3. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like performs the work of confirming the role-joint role ratio, the store clerk or the like can perform the work of confirming the role-joint role ratio only by slightly opening the frame 3 for the game machine without opening it greatly. .. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the winning combination ratio.

[7th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 72 (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 72B, in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 129G is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 accommodating the main substrate 11, and the display monitor 130G is provided on the upper surface of the base member 129G. There is. The four-digit displays on the display monitor 130G are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130G may be arranged in the horizontal direction. The base member 129G is provided on the board case 202 so as to straddle the board case main body 202A and the lid body 202B of the board case 202, similarly to the base member 129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode.

The base member 129G has a triangular columnar shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the depth direction of the game machine 1. The right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle forming the bottom surface of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side opposite to the left side on which the game machine frame 3 opens. Therefore, the upper surface of the base member 129G is an inclined surface that descends from the opposite side (right side) of the side (left side) where the game machine frame 3 opens toward the side where the game machine frame 3 opens. A display monitor 130G is provided on this inclined surface.

The display monitor 130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 and is arranged along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the game machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the entire game machine frame 3 can be visually recognized from the outside of the game machine 1 only by slightly opening the game machine frame 3. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like performs the work of confirming the role-joint role ratio, the store clerk or the like can perform the work of confirming the role-joint role ratio only by slightly opening the frame 3 for the game machine without opening it greatly. .. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the winning combination ratio.

Further, the upper surface of the base member 129G provided with the display monitor 130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode faces the side where the game machine frame 3 opens from the side opposite to the side where the game machine frame 3 opens. It is an inclined surface that descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 130G is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the display monitor 130G can be easily seen. Therefore, the work of confirming the winning combination ratio can be performed more easily.

[8th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 73 (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 73A, in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 129H is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 202 accommodating the main substrate 11, and the display monitor 130H is provided on the left side surface of the base member 129H. Has been done. The four-digit displays on the display monitor 130H are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130H may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

The base member 129H has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Further, the display monitor 130H provided on the left side surface of the base member 129H includes four 7 segments and a dot at the lower right (see FIG. 51 (A)). The board case 202 includes a board case main body 202A and a lid body 202B. The base member 129H is provided on the substrate case 202 so as to straddle the substrate case main body 202A and the lid body 202B of the substrate case 202.

The display monitor 130H arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 202 and is arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 130H can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like performs the work of confirming the role-joint role ratio, the store clerk or the like can perform the work of confirming the role-joint role ratio only by slightly opening the frame 3 for the game machine without opening it greatly. .. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the winning combination ratio.

[9th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 73B, in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 129I is provided on the right-hand surface of the substrate case 202 accommodating the main board 11, and the display monitor 130I is provided on the right side surface of the base member 129I. It is provided. The base member 129I is provided on the substrate case 202 so as to straddle the substrate case main body 202A and the lid 202B of the substrate case 202, similarly to the base member 129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode.

The base member 129I has a triangular columnar shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the depth direction of the game machine 1. The right-angled portion of the right triangle that forms the bottom of the triangular prism is located on the right side. Therefore, the left side surface of the base member 129I is an inclined surface that moves toward the right side from the upper side to the lower side. A display monitor 130I is provided on this inclined surface. The four-digit displays on the display monitor 130I are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130I may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

The display monitor 130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 202 and is arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 130I can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like performs the work of confirming the role-joint role ratio, the store clerk or the like can perform the work of confirming the role-joint role ratio only by slightly opening the frame 3 for the game machine without opening it greatly. .. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the winning combination ratio.

Further, the left side surface of the base member 129I provided with the display monitor 130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is an inclined surface that moves to the right side as it descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 130I is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the display monitor 130I can be easily seen. Therefore, the work of confirming the winning combination ratio can be performed more easily.

Further, the display monitors 130A to 130I arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode all set the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It may be provided in the adjusting means which makes it adjustable. The adjusting means includes, for example, a fixing portion fixed to the base members 129A to 129I or the buried inclined surface 11K, and a mounting portion movable with respect to the fixing portion, and the display monitors 130A to 130I are provided on the mounting portion. Either one should be installed. The adjusting means may be a manual type that can be manually operated by a store clerk or the like by opening the gaming machine frame 3, or an electric type that operates a motor or actuator provided in the adjusting means. It may be. Further, in the case of an electric type, a person who can operate from an office or the like via a communication device or the like may be used.

The range in which the mounting portion can be moved may be, for example, a movement range associated with movement in the up, down, left, and right directions, or a movement range associated with rotational movement around an arbitrary rotation axis. Further, the movement range may be a combination of the movement ranges associated with these movements. A game hall where the game machine 1 is installed because the display monitors 130A to 130I are provided as adjusting means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening portion between the game machine frame 3 and the outer frame. Can be adjusted according to the wishes of.

Although the arrangement of the display monitors is shown in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode described above, these arrangement modes may be combined. For example, the display monitor may be arranged from the upper surface to the left side of the substrate case 202 by combining the eighth display monitor arrangement mode and the ninth display monitor arrangement mode.

[A game machine equipped with a blade-type variable winning ball device]
In the above example, a variable display game (special figure game) that performs variable display is executed, and when the display result of the variable display in the variable display game (special figure game) becomes a big hit, the big hit game state is controlled. I explained about the Digipachi type game machine. On the other hand, as a so-called honey-type game machine in which the jackpot game state is controlled by the game ball passing through a specific area (V area) provided inside the blade-type variable winning ball device that can be opened and closed. Good. Hereinafter, an example in which the present invention is applied to a splash-type game machine will be described. Hereinafter, the honeymono type will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned game machine 1, and the common explanation may be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a front view of a game machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device, and FIG. 75 is a front view of the variable winning ball device provided on the game board as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 74, the pachinko gaming machine 501 has a glass door frame 502 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 502, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 503. At the bottom of the hit ball supply plate 3, there is a surplus ball receiver 504 that stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 503, and the speed at which the hit ball launcher launches the game ball (that is, the strength of the spring that plays the game ball). A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 505 for adjusting the ball is provided.

The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher by rotating the operation knob 505. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 505 to the right, the speed of the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device gradually increases, and when the speed exceeds a predetermined speed, the launched game ball Enters the left side area of the game area 507 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 505 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 507 from above. Therefore, by changing the amount of rotation while the operation knob 505 is rotated to the right, the momentum of the game ball launched from the ball launching device can be adjusted, and the area where the game ball is driven can be adjusted. ..

A game board is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 502. The game board is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, a game area 507 defined by a guide rail is formed on the front surface of the game board.

A blade-type variable winning ball device 520 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 507. Below the blade-type variable winning ball device 520, a first starting winning opening 511, a second starting winning opening 512, and a variable winning ball device 515 forming the third starting winning opening 513 are provided. The winning ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 511 is detected by the first starting opening switch 511a, and the winning ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 512 is detected by the second starting opening switch 512a, respectively, on the back surface of the game board. Guided to. Further, the winning ball that has entered the third starting winning opening 513, which becomes possible to win when the variable winning ball device 515 is opened, is detected by the third starting opening switch 513a and guided to the back surface of the game board. The variable winning ball device 515 is opened by the solenoid 515a. Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 511, the second starting winning opening 512, and the third starting winning opening 513 may be collectively referred to as the "starting winning opening" or may be referred to as the starting winning opening 511, 512, 513. .. Further, the first start port switch 511a, the second start port switch 512a, and the third start port switch 513a may be collectively referred to as "start port switch" or may be referred to as start port switches 511a, 512a, 513a. .. When a game ball wins a prize at the starting prize opening, a predetermined number, for example, five game balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening may be the same, or may be different for each starting winning opening. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 511 and the second starting winning opening 512 is set to 5, and the number of prize balls when the game ball wins in the third starting winning opening 513 is set to 5. The number of payouts may be two.

When the game ball wins the start winning opening and is detected by the starting opening switch, the blade type variable winning ball device 520 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By opening / closing control, the left open door 576A on the left side moves from the initial position to the left, and the right open door 576B on the right side moves from the initial position to the right, so that the blade type variable winning ball device 520 is opened. When the left open door 576A and the right open door 576B return to the initial positions, the blade type variable winning ball device 520 is closed. The state in which the blade-type variable winning ball device 520 opens in response to the winning detection of the starting port switch is called the starting operation state. Hereinafter, the blade type variable winning ball device 520 may be referred to as an accessory. In addition, although various accessories are provided on the game board, the term "accessories" below means a blade-type variable winning ball device 520.

On the back side inside the blade-type variable winning ball device 520, an effect display device 509 using an LCD or the like for displaying the effect is provided. The effect display device 509 variably displays (variably displays) the effect symbol as the identification information. In this embodiment, the effect display device 509 has, for example, three variable display units (design display areas) of "left", "middle", and "right".

On the right side of the blade-type variable winning ball device 520, a special symbol display 508 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided. The special symbol display 508 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.

Above the special symbol display 508, a special symbol start memory display 518 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls having a game ball in the starting winning opening, that is, the number of starting memories is provided. The special symbol start memory display 518 displays up to four start memory numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol start memory display 518 increases the number of lit LEDs by 1 each time there is a valid start prize at the start winning openings 511, 512, 513. Then, each time the variable display is started on the special symbol display 508, the number of LEDs in the lit state is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol start storage display 518 shifts the lighting state every time the variable display is started by the special symbol display 508. As will be described later, since the start memory number is also displayed on the effect display device 509, it is not necessary to provide the special symbol start memory display 518.

On the left side of the blade-type variable winning ball device 520, a normal symbol display 510 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. When the game ball passes through the gate 532 provided on the right side of the game area 507 and is detected by the gate switch 532a, the normal symbol (in this example, the number display by the 7-segment LED) is displayed on the normal symbol display 510. The variable display is started. In this embodiment, in the case of a hit, "7" is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, and in the case of a miss, a stop display other than "7" is displayed. In the case of a hit, the variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. The probability of hitting a normal symbol is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 510, a normal symbol start memory display 541 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of passing balls that have passed through the gate 532 is provided. Each time the gate 532 is passed, the normal symbol start memory display 541 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 510 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

On the right side of the variable winning ball device 515, a large winning opening is provided in which the opening / closing plate 516 is opened by the solenoid 521 in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The opening / closing plate 516 is a means for opening / closing the large winning opening. The winning ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 523. When a game ball wins a prize at the large prize opening, a predetermined number, for example, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Decorative lamps that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 507, and an out port 526 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize is provided at the lower part.

Further, two speakers 527 that emit sound effects are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 507. A top frame lamp 528a, a left frame lamp 528b, and a right frame lamp 528c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 507. Further, decorative LEDs are installed around each structure (blade type variable winning ball device 520, etc.) in the game area 507. The top frame lamp 528a, the left frame lamp 528b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of decorative light emitters provided in the game machine.

The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 507 through the hit ball rail, and then falls in the game area 507. When the hit ball enters the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, if the variable display of the symbol can be started, the special symbol starts to be variablely displayed on the special symbol display 508 and the effect symbol is displayed on the effect display device 509. Starts variable display. If the variable display of the symbol is not in a state where the variable display can be started, and the start winning memory number, which is the reserved memory for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 508, is not the upper limit number, the starting winning memory number is incremented by 1. That is, the number of lit LEDs on the special symbol start memory display 518 is increased by 1.

The variable display of the special symbols ("0" to "9") on the special symbol display 508 is stopped when a predetermined time elapses. If the special symbol at the time of stopping is a jackpot symbol (specific display result: specifically, for example, "3", "7"), the first jackpot gaming state (without going through the starting operation state) of the jackpot gaming states It shifts to the big hit game state to be started). In addition, when it is a small hit symbol (specifically, "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", "9"), it shifts to the starting operation state. To do. In the starting operation state, when the game ball wins a prize in the special area provided inside the blade type variable winning ball device 520, the state shifts to the second big hit game state (the big hit game state started after the starting operation state). .. The gaming state before shifting to the jackpot gaming state is the normal state. In addition, after the jackpot game state is completed, the state shifts to the normal state or the time saving state (the state in which the variable winning ball device 515 is easily opened by shortening the average fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol). To do. The time saving state can be continued until the variable winning ball device 515 is opened a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, and when the transition condition to the jackpot gaming state is satisfied before the variable winning ball device 515 is opened 100 times. The game state shifts from the time saving state to the big hit game state. Further, when the variable winning ball device 515 is opened 100 times without satisfying the transition condition to the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the gate 532 is provided on the right side of the game area 507. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the time is controlled to be shortened, it is better to launch the game ball aiming at the right side of the game area 507 (so-called right-handed hit) in order to allow the game ball to pass through the gate 532. It will be advantageous. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 507. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game ball is launched (so-called right-handed) aiming at the right side of the game area in order to win the game ball in the big winning opening during the big hit game. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if neither the time saving state nor the big hit game is in progress (in the normal state), the game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 507.

A left gate 517 is provided on the left side of the game area 507, and a game ball that has passed through the left gate 517 is detected by the left gate switch 517a. A right gate 519 is provided on the right side of the game area 507, and a game ball that has passed through the right gate 519 is detected by the right gate switch 519a.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined game state shift is performed, control is performed to shift the game state based on the passage of the game ball through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519. Specifically, in this embodiment, the jackpot game is started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, or when the game ball wins the specific winning opening 566 in the blade type variable winning ball device 520. Instead, the jackpot game is started based on the passing of the game ball through the gate. In this embodiment, since the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 507 (it is hit right during the big hit game), the big hit is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the right gate 519. The game is started. It should be noted that the big hit game is not started based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519, but when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, or when the special prize in the blade type variable winning ball device 520 is specified. The jackpot game may be started immediately when the game ball is won in the mouth 566, or the jackpot game may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, in this embodiment, even when the jackpot game is completed, a new variation display can be started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519. Specifically, in this embodiment, since the ball is hit left in the normal state and hit right in the time saving state, the game ball has passed through the left gate 517 when it is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game is completed. Based on this, a new variation display can be started, and if it is controlled to a time saving state after the big hit game is completed, it is shifted to a time saving state based on the passing of the game ball through the right gate 519, and a new variation. The display shifts to a state where it can be started. It should be noted that, instead of shifting to a state in which a new variable display can be started based on the passage of the game ball through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519, when the big hit game is finished or the big hit game is finished. It is also possible to shift to a state in which a new variable display can be started when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Next, the blade type variable winning ball device 520 will be described. The blade-type variable winning ball device (accessory) 520 is in a state in which a game ball can enter when the left open door 576A and the right open door 576B are opened by driving the opening / closing motor 575. The game ball that has entered the accessory 520 passes through the passage port 57 and the like and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 520. In addition, in FIG. 75, the state in which the left open door 576A and the right open door 576B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 520 (difficult to enter) is shown by a solid line, and the left open door 576A and the right open door are shown. The state in which the 576B is opened and the game ball can enter the accessory 520 (easy to enter) is shown by a virtual line.

A left movable member 577 and a right movable member 578 are provided on both the left and right sides of the accessory 520, respectively. The moving portion of the left movable member 577 is the left movable portion 577A, and the moving portion of the right movable member 578 is the right movable portion 578A. The left movable part 577A is moved by the left movable part drive solenoid 577B, and the right movable part 578A is moved by the right movable part drive solenoid 578B. The left movable portion 577A and the right movable portion 78A move in the vertical direction, respectively.

At the bottom of the accessory 520, a specific winning opening 566 forming a specific area is provided. Further, an outlet is provided at the back of the position where the specific winning opening 566 is provided in the accessory 520, and inside the accessory 520, there is a passage for distributing the game ball to the specific winning opening 566 or the exit. It is provided. The specific winning opening 566 is provided with a specific area switch 566A, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 566 is detected by the specific area switch 566A, and the game ball that has won the outlier is detected by the outlier area switch. Will be done. When a game ball wins in the specific winning opening 566 and the outlier, a predetermined number, for example, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball at the specific winning opening 566 and the exit opening may be the same or different. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the specific winning opening 566 may be 10, and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the outlier may be 3. Further, when a game ball enters the outlet, the prize ball may not be paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

On condition that the game ball that has entered the accessory 520 wins the specific winning opening 566 and is detected by the specific area switch 566A, it is possible to shift to the second big hit game state. Further, when the game ball that has entered the accessory 520 wins a prize at the outlet, it is not possible to shift to the second big hit game state.

An example of how the game proceeds in this game machine 501 will be described. In the game machine 501, when a game ball wins in any of the first start winning opening 511, the second starting winning opening 512, and the third starting winning opening 513 in the normal state, it is either a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. A lottery to determine the above (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "big hit lottery") is executed. As a result of the big hit lottery, it is decided as a big hit, a small hit or a miss. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 508.

When the result of the big hit lottery is decided to be a big hit, after the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the big hit) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 508, the game state is changed from the normal state to the big hit game state (first). It shifts to the jackpot game state). In the big hit game state, the opening and closing of the big winning opening by the opening and closing plate 16 is controlled 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening allowable time is 29 seconds). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, any of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, and 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like. If the result of the big hit lottery is decided to be a big hit, the accessory 520 is not controlled to the open state. Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is decided as a big hit, the accessory 520 may be controlled to the open state.

When the result of the big hit lottery is decided to be a small hit, after the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the small hit) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 508, the accessory 520 is controlled to be in the open state. The starting operation is started. In the starting operation state, the accessory 520 is in the open state for 0.9 seconds. The number of times of opening (opening number) is 1, 2, or 3 times. In the starting operation state, when the game ball wins the accessory 520, and the game ball wins the specific winning opening 566 and is detected by the specific area switch 566A, a V winning occurs. When the V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state (second jackpot gaming state). If the game ball enters the exit and no V prize is generated, the game does not shift to the second big hit game state. That is, it becomes out of place and maintains a normal state.

If the result of the big hit lottery is decided to be out of order, the special symbol display 508 may stop and display the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the out of place), and then the accessory 520 may be controlled to the open state. Absent. In this case, the gaming state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state, and the normal state is maintained.

The jackpot includes a non-time-saving jackpot and a time-saving jackpot. In either case, when the change of the special symbol is completed, the game directly shifts to the 16-round jackpot game state (first jackpot game state) without going through the starting operation state, but in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the jackpot game ends. Later, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving state (on the other hand, in the case of a non-time-saving jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is the normal state).

There are three types of small hits, from the first small hit to the third small hit. The first small hit is a small hit that the accessory 520 opens once in the starting operation state, the second small hit is a small hit that the accessory 520 opens twice, and the third small hit is the accessory. 520 is a small hit that opens three times. Further, in the case of disengagement, the accessory 520 does not perform the opening operation.

In addition, when the accessory 520 performs the opening operation in the first small hit or the second small hit, the second big hit when the V prize is won becomes a non-time saving big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state is finished, it is normal. Move to the state. In addition, the second big hit when a V prize is won when the accessory 520 performs the opening operation in the third small hit becomes a time saving big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state ends, it shifts to the time saving state.

Further, the game machine 501 is provided with a main board and a display monitor similar to the main board 11 and the display monitor 29 provided in the game machine 1, and the main board calculates the winning combination and the winning ratio. , The calculated combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor. The display monitor is arranged in front of the main board on the main board when the main board is visually recognized so as not to interfere with the visibility. This point is the same as that of the game machine 1 described above. Further, the procedure for calculating the combination and the combination ratio, the display procedure, and the like are the same as those for the game machine 1 described above.

The winning combination and the winning ratio in the game machine 501 can be obtained by the above equations (1) and (2). The number of prize balls acquired in the game machine 501 is determined by winning a game ball for a variable winning ball device 515, a specific winning opening 566 and an exit opening in the blade type variable winning ball device 520, and a large winning opening provided with an opening / closing plate 516. The total number of game balls to be paid out.

In addition, the number of consecutive winning prize balls in the game machine 501 is the number of game balls paid out by winning a game ball for a large prize opening provided with an opening / closing plate 516 when the first big hit game state is executed. Refers to the total number. In addition, when the second big hit game state is executed, the game ball paid out by winning the game ball to the big winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 516 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "big winning opening winning"). The total number may be the total number, or the game balls paid out by the big prize opening prize, and the specific winning opening 566 and the deviation in the blade type variable winning ball device 520 at the time of V winning which triggered the transition to the second big hit game state. It may be the total number of game balls paid out by winning a game ball for the mouth (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "trigger prize").

The "at the time of V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state" in the opportunity winning may be at the time of opening the blade type variable winning ball device 520 in which the V winning occurred, or the V winning occurred. A series of opening by winning a prize at the starting winning opening that triggered the opening of the blade type variable winning ball device may be included. For example, when the blade-type variable winning ball device 520 is opened by winning a game ball into the third starting winning opening 513, which is opened three times, and the blade-type variable winning ball device 520 is opened, and there is a V prize at the time of opening. The opportunity winning prize may be a winning of a game ball for the specific winning opening 566 and the outlier of the blade type variable winning ball device 520 at the time of opening the three times.

Further, when the number of consecutive winning prize balls is the total number of game balls paid out by the large winning opening prize and the opportunity winning, the winning of the specific winning opening 566 and the outlier of the blade type variable winning ball device 520 becomes the opportunity winning. Whether or not it depends on whether or not the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big hit game state occurs. For this reason, the total number of game balls paid out by winning a prize for the specific winning opening 566 and the outlier of the blade type variable winning ball device 520 (hereinafter, "the number of winning prize balls of the temporary memory opportunity") is temporarily stored, and the second big hit game Even if the number of temporary memory trigger prize balls is added to the number of consecutive bonus winning prize balls as the total number of game balls paid out by the trigger prize when the V prize that triggered the transition to the state occurs. Good. The timing of adding the temporary memory opportunity winning prize balls to the number of consecutive winning prize balls may be an appropriate timing. For example, it may be the timing to shift to the second big hit game state and count the number of prize balls of the game balls paid out by the big prize opening prize, or the count of the number of prize balls of the game balls paid out by the big winning opening prize. At the time of starting, the timing may be set during or after counting the number of prize balls of the game balls paid out by the big prize opening prize, and immediately before displaying the winning combination on the display monitor 29.

Further, after the temporary memory opportunity winning prize ball is memorized, when the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big hit game state does not occur, the temporary memory opportunity winning prize ball may be deleted. When the game ball wins in the specific winning opening 566, the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit game state is generated, so that the blade type variable winning ball device 520 is substantially removed. The total number of game balls paid out by winning a prize in the mouth may be temporarily stored. The judgment that the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big hit game state does not occur is that, for example, the V prize does not occur after a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the blade type variable winning ball device 520. can do.

Further, the winning combination and the winning combination display on the display monitor may be the short-term winning combination, the short-term winning combination, the cumulative winning combination, the cumulative winning combination, and the like, as in the game machine 1. Further, the display monitor may be attached to the main board in the same manner as in the game machine 1 described above. Further, as the arrangement mode of the display monitor, various arrangement modes described in the attachment mode to the game machine 1 may be used.

The game machine 501 is a game machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device 520. In a game machine provided with such a blade-type variable winning ball device 520, the winning combination and the winning ratio are displayed on the main board. Further, the display monitor is provided on the main board that controls the game so as not to interfere with the visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and wind turbines provided on the game board.

Further, in the game machine 501 provided with the blade type variable winning ball device 520, the winning combination and the winning ratio are calculated in a mode different from that of the game machine 1. Even in the game machine 501 provided with such a blade-type variable winning ball device 520, the winning combination and the winning combination ratio can be calculated and displayed on a display monitor mounted on the main board.

Further, in the game machine 501, among the start winning openings for opening and closing the blade type variable winning ball device 520, the variable winning ball device 515 is used as the third starting winning opening 513, but the starting winning opening is the first starting winning opening. Only those that are not provided with a variable winning ball device such as the opening 511 and the second starting winning opening 512 may be used. Further, the starting winning opening may be only a variable winning ball device such as the third starting winning opening 513.

The number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the third start winning opening 513 is added to the number of winning prize balls used for calculating the winning combination, but the first starting winning opening 511 and the second The number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the starting winning opening 512 is not added to the number of prize balls for winning the character and the number of prize balls for winning the continuous character.

Further, in the game machine 501, a big hit lottery is executed by winning a game ball in the starting winning opening, but the big hit lottery is not executed even if the starting winning opening is won, and the variable winning ball device 520 is always opened. It may be a mode in which the operation is performed. Further, instead of the big hit lottery, the lottery for the number of times the variable winning ball device 520 is opened may be performed, or both the big hit lottery and the lottery for the number of times the variable winning ball device 520 is opened may be performed. .. Further, in the lottery for the number of openings, the number of times such as once, twice, three times, etc. may be drawn, and 0 times may be included as the target of the number of openings.

Further, the game machine 501 is set to a big hit game state (first big hit game state and second big hit game state), and the game machine 501 includes a blade type variable winning ball device 520 and an opening / closing plate 516. There is a winning opening. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state may be set, and only the blade-type variable winning ball device may be provided without providing the jackpot. In this case, in the big hit game state, the blade-type variable winning ball device may open / close or open for a certain period of time.

Further, in the embodiment in which only the blade type variable winning ball device is provided, V winning may be set as a continuation condition of the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game shifts to the jackpot game state, the maximum continuation round may be set so that the continuation of the next round may be determined when a V prize is won in one round.

(Modification example of display control and display items of prize number information)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α has been described. For example, items related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 41A and 41B, a passing gate designation command for specifying which gate the game ball has passed through is issued from the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) to the effect control board 12 (effect). By transmitting to the control CPU 120), the effect control CPU 120 can total the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B and display it in the first area α.

For example, the number of times of passing through the gate (corresponding to A1) of today and today's gate can be determined by the same method as the aggregation process when the general winning opening designation command for specifying which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings has been won is received. Gate passage ratio (corresponding to A2), number of gate passages in low base state (corresponding to B1), gate passage ratio in low base state (corresponding to B2), number of gate passages in high base state (corresponding to C1), high base The gate passage ratio of the state (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages during the set period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passage ratio during the set period (corresponding to D2) can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. .. Further, these items can be aggregated for each gate (for each of the gates 41A and 41B) and displayed in the first area α.

(2) Further, since the effect control CPU 120 receives the big prize opening winning command from the game control microcomputer 100, the number of winnings to the big winning opening can be totaled, and the winning to the big winning opening can be counted. The number of prize balls given based on the total can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

For example, by the same method as the aggregation process when a general prize opening designation command for specifying which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings has been won is received, "Today's large winning openings (A1) "Equivalent)", "Today's prize-winning ratio (equivalent to A2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize-winning mouth (equivalent to A3)", "Today's total The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on today's prizes to the prizeballs to the number of prizeballs (equivalent to A4), "the number of prizes to the prizeballs during the set period (equivalent to D1)" , "Ratio of prizes to the big prize opening in the set period (corresponding to D2)", "Number of prize balls given based on winning the prize to the big winning mouth in the set period (equivalent to D3)", and "In the set period The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the prizes to the large prize opening in the set period to the number of prize balls given (corresponding to D4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. is there.

Here, "the ratio of the number of prize balls given based on today's prize-winning opening to today's total number of prize balls (equivalent to A4)" and "the prize balls given during the set period" When the ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the large winning opening in the set period to the number (corresponding to D4) is higher than the predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), a notification to that effect is given. You may try to do it. For example, the message "The ratio of prize balls for the big prize opening exceeds the reference value (60%)" may be displayed in the first area α.

Further, the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, which is controlled to open and close by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, and the opening and closing control of the special variable winning ball device 7 with respect to the total number of winning balls. When the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the large winning opening is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), a notification to that effect may be given. For example, a message such as "The prize ball ratio of the prize ball exceeds the reference value (70%)" may be displayed in the first area α.

(3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side, the effect control CPU 120 sends each command received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the game ball enters each approach area. An example of totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area has been described based on the above, but in the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side of the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side, each approach area is entered. The number of entry of the game ball is totaled, or the effect control CPU 120 enters each approach area based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the game ball enters each approach area. It is also possible to aggregate the numbers.

The number of game balls entering each approach area (counter value corresponding to each switch) totaled by the game control microcomputer 100 or the effect control CPU 120 on the main board 11 side is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, it can be displayed on the image display device 5. For example, by outputting a command for designating the total number of approaches to each approach area from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 enters each approach area based on the command. It is possible to specify the number of entries and display them in the first area α.

It should be noted that the number of entries into each approach area calculated by the game control microcomputer 100 is displayed on the main board 11 such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be displayed in. Further, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is used. It is also possible to notify the fact by performing a specific display different from the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The display device provided on the main board 11 on which the aggregated results are displayed is not limited to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc., in order to display the aggregated results. It may be a display device provided exclusively for the device. Further, the display device may have any form such as a lamp, an LED, a 7-segment display, a liquid crystal display device, an EL panel, and a light guide plate.

The value of each counter (the number of entries into each approach area) stored in the RAM 102 can be, for example, the game state flag (probability change state, time saving state, etc.) stored in the RAM 102 can be specified by the game control microcomputer 100. When the reset operation for resetting (flag according to the game state) etc. is performed by the game hall side (for example, a clerk), it is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, it may be output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12 and displayed on the image display device 5 for a certain period of time. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 11. The reset button is provided on the back surface side (game island side) of the game board 2, and the game board 2 is rotated forward with respect to the game machine frame 3 by using the hinge mechanism of the game machine frame 3. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 can be operated.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example in which the winning number information (D1 to D4) in the aggregation period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α has been described, but the example is described in advance regardless of the operation of the player. The totaling period is set in the game machine (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored or set by the operation of the game hall side), and the number of prizes in the set totaling period. The information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes). In that case, it may be notified to that effect.

(5) Further, when the winning of a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the first area α may be notified to that effect. For example, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening has not been generated for 10 minutes, the message "No general winning for 10 minutes" may be displayed in the first area α. This predetermined period may be set by an operation on the playground side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30), and an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 30). It may be possible to set by.

(6) The above embodiment is also applied to a game machine provided with a distribution device such that the winning ratios to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening are a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). , The winning number information related to the winning number to each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 has a configuration in which game balls accepted by the sorting device are alternately distributed to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. By providing the sorting device, it is also possible to alternately sort the game balls received by the sorting device into the starting winning opening and the general winning opening. The above embodiment is also applied to a game machine having a configuration in which the distribution device alternately distributes the game balls to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening, and the winning number information related to the winning number to each winning opening is first. It can be displayed in the area α. However, since the number of winnings to the general winning opening is naturally determined according to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening is displayed as described above. There is no need to let it.

(7) In FIG. 46, the aggregation period can be set according to the operation of the player, but the winning number information is reset according to the operation of the player, and the aggregation of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do so. For example, when the player performs an operation to start counting, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and then the effect control CPU 120 issues a general winning opening designation command. Each time a command is received, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by one.

Further, the aggregation period once set may be changed according to the operation of the player before the elapse of the set period. For example, although the totaling period is initially set to 30 minutes, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses to shorten the totaling period to 10 minutes in order to know the totaling result quickly. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation result for a longer period, the player performs a reset operation before the set period elapses to extend the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Is also good. Further, the aggregation period once set may be extended according to the operation of the player after the set period has elapsed. For example, after 10 minutes, which is the set totaling period, has passed and the totaling result for that 10 minutes has been displayed, the player performs an extension operation in order to grasp the totaling result for a longer totaling period. The aggregation period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both the aggregation result of 10 minutes and the aggregation result of 60 minutes including the 10 minutes can be obtained).

(8) In the demo screen displayed on the image display device 5, or in the first area α in the state where the game is being performed (the state in which the game end determination is not made and the demo screen is not displayed). , An image explaining which of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening is the winning opening provided on the game board surface may be displayed. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in each winning opening may be notified.

(9) In the above embodiment, the game field setting is prioritized over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may be prioritized over the game field setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) are displayed. When the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon including the characters "display" selected on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2) so that the image can be displayed on the image display device 5, the winning number information is displayed on the image display device 5. (Display control of FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed), and when the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon including the character "not displayed" selected on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2), the winning number information is displayed as an image. It may not be displayed on the device 5 (the display control of FIG. 44 is executed).

Further, the game hall setting and the player setting may be given the same priority, and it may be determined whether or not to display the winning number information according to the order of the received setting operations. That is, it may be decided whether or not to display the winning number information with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) thereafter. When set, the winning number information is displayed (display control of FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) are set not to display the winning number information, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is subsequently moved to the second position (display position). In the case of, the winning number information is displayed (display control of FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the setting for not displaying the winning number information on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) thereafter. If is, the winning number information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 44 is executed). Further, even when the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) are set to display the winning number information, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is subsequently moved to the first position (non-display position). ), The winning number information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 44 is executed).

Further, in this embodiment, the clerk of the amusement park can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by operating the display changeover switch 32, and the player can set the operation button 30. It is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by operating the above, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a clerk at the amusement park can operate the display changeover switch 32 to operate the display changeover switch 32. While it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5, the player cannot set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 (for example, FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (1) to 5). The setting screen on the player side as shown in (3) may not be provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 only on the amusement park side.

On the contrary, the player (and the clerk of the game hall) can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by operating the operation button 30, while the game hall. It is also possible not to provide a means that allows only the side to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 (for example, the display changeover switch 32 is not provided). In such a configuration, the player and the clerk of the game hall can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 30). .. In this way, it may be possible for the player and the playground to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation.

(10) Note that the number of winning information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 45 and the like can be obtained from the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31. Is displayed on the image display device 5 only in the maintenance mode in which is the display position (second position), and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the non-display position (first position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 5. That is, it may be treated in the same manner as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG. 3A.

As described above, the clerk of the amusement park performs a predetermined operation for the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 45 and the like. Information that can be displayed on the image display device 5 only when it is performed may be information that the player cannot normally see. For example, a state in which a player can play a game (for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed), a state in which a game end determination is not performed (a state in which a special figure game is being executed, a normal figure game). Is the information that is not displayed on the image display device 5 in the state in which is being executed and the jackpot game state), and is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute, and the demo screen is displayed) from the start of power supply of the game machine. It may be possible to display only (before), or it may be possible to display only for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when an operation for stopping the power supply of the game machine is performed. good.

(11) Further, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 45 or the like can be obtained in either maintenance mode or game mode. In this mode, the image display device 5 may be able to display the image. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only in the first area α. The information on the number of winnings may be displayed. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be different depending on the period during which the game is not performed and the period during which the game may be performed.

In addition, in the maintenance mode, the information on the number of winnings of all the items that have been aggregated is displayed, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the game hall side or the operation of the player) or Information on the number of winnings of (predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the item of the winning number information to be displayed may be different depending on the period during which the game is not performed and the period during which the game may be performed.

(12) Further, in the game mode, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the game end determination, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β. On the other hand, during the period when the game end determination is not performed and it is determined that the game is in progress, the winning number information may be displayed only in the first area α. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not being performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

In addition, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the game end judgment, the winning number information of all the aggregated items is displayed, but the game end judgment is not performed and the game is played. During the period determined to be medium, the winning number information of some items (items set by the operation of the game hall side or the player or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the item of the winning number information to be displayed may be different depending on the period in which it is determined that the game is not being performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

(13) In the above embodiment, the winning number information is displayed with respect to the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information) (setting to display the winning number information (image size). The setting for displaying the number of winnings information and the number of winnings are not changed (common) between FIG. 42 and FIG. 43) and the setting for not displaying the number of winnings information (FIG. 44), while the other images (background images) are set to display the number of winnings information. The visible range is different depending on the setting that does not display the information, but the setting is not limited to such a form, and as shown in FIG. 47, the setting that displays the winning number information (FIG. 47 (a)) With the setting of not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 47 (b)), the display position and display range (image size) of all images including the background image other than the winning number information may be shared. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control burden due to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information.

(14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (image size) of the decorative symbol are set to display the winning number information (FIGS. 42 and 43) and not to display the winning number information (FIG. 44). ), But the display position and display range of the decorative pattern may be different depending on the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 48 (a)), the setting for displaying the winning number information is not displayed rather than the interval of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (FIG. 48 (FIG. 48). The intervals of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in b)) may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, the decorative pattern display area 5L when the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. In this way, when the winning number information is not displayed, the variable display or the stop display of the decorative symbol in the first area α may be allowed. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest by executing the production using the entire screen.

(15) In the above embodiment, magnetic anomaly, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality are exemplified as the error of the gaming machine, but the error of the gaming machine is not limited to these, and the error of the gaming machine is an abnormality of opening the front door and an abnormality of the payout mechanism. (Abnormality of prize balls, etc.), Abnormal winning of the large winning opening (abnormality of detecting winning of the large winning opening even though the large winning opening is not open), or malfunction of various members of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Etc. may be used.

[Other variants]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In addition, the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-mentioned production forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-mentioned production forms and the following modification are shown. The control and configuration of the game machine may be arbitrarily combined.

In the above embodiment, the game balls that do not pass through the gate 41B due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the members that define the flow direction of the game balls are the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. It is possible to win one of them. With such a configuration, even if the game ball does not pass through the gate 41B in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, it is possible to expect a prize in the general winning opening provided on the downstream side of the gate 41B, which is a hobby of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, the game ball that has not passed through the gate 41B may win a prize in either the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D at a higher rate than the game ball that has passed through the gate 41B. .. With such a configuration, even if the game ball passes through the gate 41B infrequently in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, it is possible to expect a prize in the general winning opening provided on the downstream side. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Furthermore, by executing a specific effect based on the winning of the general winning opening, the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

In the above embodiment, executing the specific effect at different ratios according to the game state includes that the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game state and the specific effect is not executed in another game state. .. Further, in the above embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect at different ratios according to the game period, the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game period, and the specific effect may not be executed in another game period. included.

In the above embodiment, in order to execute the effect at a higher rate in the first state than in the second state different from the first state, the effect can be executed only in the first state. In the second state, the effect is not executed. Here, the classification of the first state and the second state is, in addition to the above-mentioned classification according to the game state, the classification according to the number of reserved memories, and the classification according to the execution period of the special figure game (special figure game). Classification according to the type of variation pattern (for example, whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect), or , Classification according to the specific effect timing (for example, before the establishment of the reach state in the variation pattern with reach effect), whether or not the variable display variation pattern being executed is a variation pattern accompanied by pseudo continuous effect. There are classifications such as whether it is before or after the establishment of the pseudo-continuous production, or whether it is before or after the execution of the pseudo-continuous production in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous production).

In the first effect mode to the twelfth effect form, the specific effect may be executed only in one of (1) a normal state and (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state. For example, (1) the specific effect may be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state. Further, in the 13th to 24th production forms, either (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation and (2) the period outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation. The specific effect may be executed only in one case. For example, (1) the specific effect can be executed only in the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, and (2) the specific effect is specified in the case of the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. You may not execute the production.

In the first effect mode to the twelfth effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the execution state is executed depending on whether the game state is (1) a normal state, or (2) a probability variation state or a time saving state. Although the types of specific effects are different, when the jackpot game state is controlled, whether or not the specific effect is executed and the specific effect to be executed are based on the same effect execution conditions as when the game state is the normal state. The type may be determined, or whether or not the specific effect is executed and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the effect execution conditions common to those in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. .. Further, the classification of the gaming state is not limited to (1) a normal state, (2) a probabilistic state or a time saving state, and for example, (1) a high base state or (2). It may be classified as whether it is in a high base state, or it may be classified as (1) a jackpot game state or (2) a jackpot game state.

In the thirteenth effect mode to the twenty-fourth effect form, the game period is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, or (2) outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation. Whether or not the specific effect is executed and the type of the specific effect to be executed are determined according to the period, but the game period is not limited to such a division, and for example, (1) the number of reserved memories. May be a period of 1 or less, or (2) a period in which the number of reserved memories is 2 or more, and (1) a period in which variable display of decorative symbols is executed. (2) It may be a division as to whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed.

Also, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is being executed. It may be classified as. Further, it may be classified into (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good.

In the first to fourth effect forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect forms, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect, but both the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed. May be executable. That is, when the winning condition is satisfied, one of the variation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect that meets the predetermined condition is executed (for example, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less, the change result advance notice effect is executed. However, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or more, the look-ahead notice effect may be executed), or both of them may be executed at the same time. For example, when the look-ahead notice effect is an effect that changes the mode of the display information (display part) corresponding to the hold memory, it is referred to as the above-mentioned fluctuation result advance notice effect (audio effect only, or audio effect and accessory effect). The look-ahead notice effect can be executed at the same time, and the player can grasp that both the change result notice effect and the look-ahead notice effect have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, if the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, the variable display notice effect is executed with priority, and the variable display display result executed when the winning condition is satisfied is executed. If there is a hold memory that is determined to be a big hit in the start winning determination, although it is an out-of-order symbol, it is preferable to give priority to the pre-reading advance notice effect.

In the above embodiment, it is set whether or not to display the number of winnings by the operation button 30 only during the period determined by the effect control CPU 120 to be in the non-gaming state (only when the demo screen is displayed). Although the possible examples have been described, the execution status of the special figure game (special symbol) is not limited to such a form, regardless of the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state). Whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the special figure game), the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the normal figure game ), It may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings by the operation button 30. That is, whether or not to display the number of winnings by the operation button 30 even during the period in which the game is being played, for example, the period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed or the period in which the jackpot game state is controlled. It may be settable. In such a configuration, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is set to be displayed, it does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state), and a special figure. The execution status of the game (whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game), the execution status of the normal diagram game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, etc.) The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of reserved memories of the normal game.

In the above embodiment, there is no limit on the period during which the display changeover switch 32 can be operated. Therefore, if the glass door frame 3a can be opened on the playground side, the display changeover switch 32 is operated. , It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. Not limited to such a form, the period during which the setting operation can be performed on the playground side may be limited. For example, in a configuration in which the display changeover switch 32 is not provided, even when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the amusement park side, the setting screens shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3) are displayed. Selection and determination shall be made by the operation button 30. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state), or the execution status of the special figure game (whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed). , The number of reserved memories of the special figure game) and the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the normal figure game), from FIG. 5 (1) The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period controlled to the jackpot game state, the period controlled to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the period during which the special figure game is executed, the period during which the reserved memory number of the special figure game is not 0, etc. are shown in the figure. 5 (1) to (3) may not be displayed, and the setting operation on the game hall side may be prohibited.

In the above embodiment, only when the player is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by switching the display changeover switch 32 which cannot be operated (the operation unit is set to the second position). , The setting screen (FIGS. 5 (1) to (3)) for allowing the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed. Regardless of the form, it is possible for both the player side and the game hall side to set whether or not to display the number of prizes to the general winning opening as a configuration that does not provide the display changeover switch 32 that can be operated only by the game hall side. This is a common setting screen (similar to FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3), and is used to select and determine whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by operating the operation button 30. The screen) may be displayed. In the configuration for displaying such a common setting screen, even if the clerk of the amusement park is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the player subsequently determines the number of winnings in the general winning opening. When the setting is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 5 by applying the setting received later.

Further, when the display changeover switch 32 which can be operated only on the playground side is switched to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening (the operation unit is set to the second position), and when the operation button 30 is operated, it is general. The image display device 5 displays common information (for example, the number of winnings in each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table) in the case where the number of winnings in the winning openings is set to be displayed. You may let it. In such a configuration, even if the setting is such that the common information is not displayed by switching the display changeover switch 32, if the setting is made so that the common information is displayed by operating the operation button 30 thereafter, By applying the later accepted settings, common information may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the above embodiment, a limit may be provided for a period (game state) in which the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, in the period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from the establishment of the reach state to the derivation display of the confirmed decorative symbol. .. Further, in a predetermined gaming state such as a probability change state or a time saving state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the game hall side determines in which period (game state) the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed or not displayed. It may be possible to set it, or it may be possible to set it by a setting means (for example, an operation button 30) on the player side.

In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player inputs a player ID (for example, an ID of a recording medium owned by the player or an ID for personal identification registered on the website) by the operation button 30. By doing so, it is possible to aggregate game data including the number of winnings in the general winning opening after the player ID is input, and the operation button 30 is operated when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. Then, the game data aggregated after the player ID input may be output to the image display device 5 as a two-dimensional code. The player captures a two-dimensional code (information that can identify the player ID and game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, so that the information terminal and an information management server connected to the Internet are connected. Communication is performed with, and the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code, and the information management server The game data managed by is updated. The player can access the information management server from the information terminal and check the stored game data (game data associated with the player ID), and as a result, the general winning opening is won. It becomes possible to grasp the number. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 5 may be set by the setting means on the game hall side (for example, the display changeover switch 32), and the setting means on the player side. It may be possible to set by (for example, the operation button 30).

In such a form, a privilege may be given to the player according to the number of prizes to the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening exceeds a predetermined number, the player with the player ID is given a background image, application software, etc. that can be used on the information terminal as a privilege. Is also good. Further, points corresponding to the number of winning points to the general winning opening may be given to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. Then, the player may be able to exchange a part or all of the owned points for a privilege.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been described, but it does not display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, and the game ball wins in the general winning opening. It may be a notification of what has been done. For example, the winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and the sound effect and voice of the winning notification may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. You can do it. In such a configuration, as in the above embodiment, whether or not to notify the general winning opening that the game ball has won is set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the game hall side. It may be possible, or it may be possible to set it by a setting means (for example, an operation button 30) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning status to the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 5 has the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the winning frequency (the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls fired into the game area, or the general winning per hour. The number of winnings in the mouth) may be displayed, or the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the frequency of winning. Further, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening, the winning in the general winning opening may be notified by voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. By using such voice notification, it becomes easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning a prize in the general winning opening. Further, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the hitting ball operation handle, the operation button 30, or the like may be vibrated. By providing such a bodily sensation notification, it becomes easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning the general winning opening.

The number of winnings and the frequency of winning each general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 5, and are also output to a management device such as a hall computer that is communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to manage the number of prizes to each general prize opening for each machine. This information can be useful, for example, for maintenance of the gaming machine.

(2) In the pachinko game machine 1, a sound effect may be output when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and a sound effect different from that when winning in another winning opening such as a starting winning opening. It is good to output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be different for each of the general winning openings. Further, in such a configuration, the sound effect may not be output when a specific general winning opening is won.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode may be changed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the execution ratio and the effect mode of the advance notice effect change, and a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable Until the number of impressions is executed, it is preferable that the execution ratio and the effect mode after the change are continued.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first variable display of the decorative symbol executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening, and a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable display number is executed. Until then, it is better to continue the music after the change. Further, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined value, a specific music (for example, a music during a big hit) may be output. In addition, the player plays the music (BGM) from a plurality of songs (BGM) based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening or the number of winning balls in the general winning opening has reached a predetermined number. Music (BGM) may be selectable.

Further, the music being played may be continuously output based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the music during the jackpot may be continuously output even after the jackpot gaming state ends, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. Further, the stage change that changes the background image of the decorative pattern and the music (BGM) may be executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It should be noted that the stage (background image and music) of the transition destination may be different depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the specific effects executed based on the winning of the general winning opening are the fluctuation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect related to the display result of the special figure game. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, a general winning opening in which a game ball has not won may be displayed among a plurality of general winning openings, and a character may appear when the game ball wins in the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko game machine 1, even though the game ball is launched into the game area, the game ball does not win in the general winning opening for a predetermined period, or the winning frequency in the general winning opening is less than the threshold value. In some cases, the image display device 5 may be made to execute a specific notification such as displaying that the general winning opening has not been won. In addition, even though the game ball is fired in the game area, if the game ball does not win only in a specific general winning opening among a plurality of general winning openings for a predetermined period, or a winning in a specific general winning opening. If the frequency is less than the threshold value, the image display device 5 may be made to execute a specific notification such as displaying that a prize has not been generated in the specific general winning opening.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the simultaneous production is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening until the simultaneous production is executed, or all at once. A specific production may be executed according to the winning of the general winning opening during the production period. Further, the decorative symbol may be changed, the stop symbol may be changed, or the sliding effect may be executed according to the winning of the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the object displayed on the image display device 5 is increased by one, and the winning and winning times in the general winning opening are recognized. It may be easier. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, only the number of prize balls paid out based on the prizes in the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning in the general winning opening. When the number reaches a predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying "100 shots exceeded!" On the image display device 5 may be executed. If the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number is the period during which the game machine error is notified based on fraud detection or failure detection. It is assumed that the notification of the game machine error is displayed with priority over the specific effect, and the specific effect held after the notification of the game machine error is completed is executed.

(9) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, a winning sound is output, and during the notification of the gaming machine error, the notification sound of the gaming machine error is output rather than the winning sound. You may give priority to output. In addition, every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the image display device 5 is set to display the winning, and during the notification of the gaming machine error, the display of the gaming machine error is prioritized over the winning display and output. You may let it.

(10) In the pachinko game machine 1, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening when controlled to the big hit game state. The number of prize balls paid out based on the above may be added and displayed on the image display device 5 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state]. In such a configuration, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is added to the displayed [Number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state]. Occasionally, it is preferable to add the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the general winning opening. That is, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be apparently increased. In addition, the [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball to the big winning opening, and the [in the big hit game state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball to the general winning opening. The display may be updated according to the individual winning timing, such as updating the number of prize balls paid out.

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of prize balls may be different depending on the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B in the left game area 10A, 10 prize balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening in the right game area 10B. When a game ball wins in the 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D, five prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect of inciting a game ball to be won in the general winning opening may be executed. For example, in a form in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings, such as the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the fourteenth effect form, the plurality of effect forms are present. The image display device 5 notifies the general winning opening in which the game ball has not won among the general winning openings, and executes an effect suggesting to the player to aim at the general winning opening in which the game ball has not won. It is good to set it to. In addition, in a form such as the 8th effect mode and the 16th effect form, in which a specific effect is executed based on a game ball winning in a specific order in a plurality of winning openings, the winning openings and the winning openings to be won It is preferable that the image display device 5 notifies the order in which the prizes should be awarded so that the player can grasp the order. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, "Aim for the first general winning opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning of the first general winning opening 50A is confirmed, the next "Aim for the 1st start winning opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning of the 1st starting winning opening is confirmed, finally, "Aim for the 2nd general winning opening!" Is displayed and the second After the winning of the general winning opening 50B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) Further, when the game area 10 is provided with a guidance path for the game ball toward the general winning opening, and the entry sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guidance path. , Based on the detection of the game ball by the approach sensor, an effect of notifying in advance that the game ball will win the general winning opening may be executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In addition, a certain period is secured from the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening to the execution of the payout of the winning ball, and the production based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed within that period. You may do so.

(14) When a stage on which the game ball can roll is provided below the image display device 5, a general winning opening and an entrance to a guidance path connected to the general winning opening are provided on the stage. The configuration may be set so that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening and the entrance to the guidance route.

(15) It is also possible to execute an effect in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display device 5 is updated every time the general winning opening is won. For example, the character grows each time the general winning opening is won, and when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (when the character grows to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege, etc.) is executed. You may do so. In addition, each time a prize is entered in the general winning opening, an effect that increases the gauge is executed, and when the predetermined number of prizes is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (granting a privilege) is performed. Etc.) may be executed. In such a form of production, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. It may be done.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of specific effect to be executed (variation result notice effect, look-ahead notice effect) differs depending on the game state when the winning condition is satisfied, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although an example in which the sounds are different has been described, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be different depending on the game state, not limited to such a form. In addition, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, there are many cases where the production by the game effect lamp 9 and the music to be played are more flashy than in the normal state, so that the specific production mode is also more suitable. The mode may be easy to understand for the player and flashy.

(17) If the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency are less than the standard values even though a certain number of game balls are fired in the game area 10, the player usually knows. Information on a game machine that is difficult to perform, such as a latent probability change state or a limiter, may be notified.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is satisfied has been described, but tentatively, the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory). If the winning condition is satisfied while the number and the total number of the second reserved memories are also 0, neither the fluctuation result advance notice effect nor the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game (for example, appearance of a specific character or reproduction of a specific song) as a specific effect.

(19) Further, when the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the winning condition is satisfied when the number of reserved storage (the total number of the first reserved storage and the second reserved storage) is 0. , The execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and then the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed or at the timing when the number of reserved storages becomes 2 or more. That is, the specific effect that was suspended based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game was satisfied or the start condition of the special figure game was satisfied without immediately executing the specific effect based on the establishment of the winning condition. You may try to do it.

(20) In the above embodiment, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the game ball does not win in the general winning opening (for example, "the number of winnings in the general winning opening is small". The message "It's too much.") May be displayed on the image display device 5. Here, it is general only during the maintenance mode in which the information for the clerk (the prize number information stored in the prize number management table) based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31 is displayed on the image display device 5. It is preferable to display on the image display device 5 that the game ball does not win in the winning opening. The clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. In addition, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the image display device 5 displays that the game ball does not win in the general winning opening. You can do it. Further, similarly to the display control of the number of winnings in the general winning opening, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number based on the setting by the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30, it is general. The image display device 5 may display that the game ball does not win in the winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, it means that the game ball is excessively winning in the general winning opening (for example, "to the general winning opening". The message "The number of winnings is too large.") May be displayed on the image display device 5. Here, it is general only during the maintenance mode in which the information for the clerk (the prize number information stored in the prize number management table) based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31 is displayed on the image display device 5. It is preferable to display on the image display device 5 that the game ball has won an excessive prize at the winning opening. The clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 transmits the prize number information stored in the prize number management table of the effect control board 12 to the game information management device that manages the game information, and the game information is transmitted. The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 outputs a general winning signal when it detects that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening (for example, outputs a one-pulse signal for each winning. By doing so, the game information management device may manage the number of winnings to the general winning opening for each game machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. Further, the game information management device uses the game information as the number of winnings in the general winning opening per predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) and the number of winnings in the general winning opening per predetermined number of balls (for example, 6000 shots). Or, the winning rate to the general winning opening (the number of winnings to the general winning opening ÷ the number of balls to be driven) may be calculated and managed for each game machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has described an example in which the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 5 is increased for each prize in the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The mode of the object displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed each time the winning opening is won. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 5 may change according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, in the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 as information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning opening). The example of notifying is described in the above, but the notification is not limited to such a form, and the notification is made by voice notification using the speakers 8L / 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, and the 7-segment lighting / extinguishing control. You may. In addition, it is not limited to the form of notifying all the information of the winning number management table, and only the information of the winning openings whose payout number, winning ratio, etc. are not within the predetermined standard range (or within the standard range) is notified. You may do so.

(25) In the above embodiment, in the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed as information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings to each winning opening, the number of payouts, etc.) as shown in FIG. Although an example of notifying (displaying) in a mode unrelated to the effect executed in the game has been described, the notification is not limited to such a form, and may be notified in a mode corresponding to the mode of the effect executed in the game. good. By notifying in a mode according to the mode of the effect, it is only necessary to confirm the notification mode of which type of model the information is compared to the case where the information is notified only by the table data as shown in FIG. It will be easy to grasp with. The effect executed in the game may be any effect such as a demo screen effect, a notice effect, a reach effect, a big hit effect, etc., and is not limited to the effect displayed on the image display device 5, but the sound. Or a lamp may be used. In addition, notifying in a mode according to the mode of the production means, for example, displaying or outputting a voice so that the character appearing during the advance notice production or the reach production reads out the information of the winning number management table, or whether or not there is a change. Regardless of this, the resident character displayed on the image display device 5 and giving a notice, explaining the game, or the like may read out the information in the winning number management table and output the sound. Further, the information is not limited to the character image, and the information of the winning number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game.

(26) In the above embodiment, the operating means such as the mode changeover switch 31 operated to display the information of the winning number management table as the information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning opening). However, an example has been described in which the player is inoperable and is provided in a position where only the clerk of the game hall can operate, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the player and the clerk of the game hall cannot operate. Therefore, the game machine may be provided at a position where it can be operated only by the inspector, the inspector, the manufacturer, or the like. Further, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated by a person other than the above-mentioned player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information related to winning a game, but a counter having a maximum of 3 bytes and a counter having a maximum of 4 bytes have been used. Can also be provided. At this time, the calculation for displaying the above-mentioned two types of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) on the above-mentioned display monitor 29 from the total number of acquired balls of the game medium (prize ball) paid out from the game machine. The method is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 76, when the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls for a bonus, and the number of consecutive winning balls are totaled by a counter composed of a maximum of 4 bytes, the upper 16 bits are used for calculation. You may go. By the way, assuming that the number of acquired balls is 30,000 per day by the 4-byte counter, 4294863225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of acquired balls per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days. = Approximately 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), an example in which the display monitor 29 is provided in the central portion on the main board 11 housed in the board case 201 has been described, but the display monitor 29 has been described. May be provided at other positions.

For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), a main board 11C without a display monitor and a display board 11D are provided separately from the main board 11C, and the main board 11C and the display board 11D are connected by a harness 11E. The display monitor 29 may be provided on the display board 11D. In this case, the main board 11C performs the calculation of the winning combination and the winning combination displayed on the display monitor 29 and the reception of data to be used for these calculations. The main board 11C transmits the calculated combination and combination ratio, and information on the control for displaying these to the display board 11D via the harness 11E. In the display board 11D, the winning combination and the winning combination may be displayed on the display monitor 29 based on the data transmitted from the main board 11C.

Further, the main board 11C and the display board 11D are housed in a board case 201A which is a caulking board case. The caulking pin 11B is attached to the substrate case 201A as in the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 51 (A). By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11C and the display board 11D are completely enclosed in the board case 201A, and fraudulent acts against the main board 11C are prevented. Further, also in the substrate case 201A, as in the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 51 (A), holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 29.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the display board 11D may be provided outside the board case 201B which is a caulking board case, and the main board 11C may be enclosed in the board case 201B. In this example, the display board 11D is connected to the main board 11C by a harness 11E.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the display substrate 11D may be enclosed in the substrate case 201C, and the main substrate 11C may be enclosed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display board 11D is connected to the main board 11C by a harness 11E. Further, also in the substrate case 201C, as in the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 51 (A), holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 29. The substrate case 201C that encloses the display substrate 11D does not have to be a caulking substrate case, or may be a caulking substrate case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 50 (A), and a crimping use record is written on the label 11R. May be good. Here, the label 11R may be arranged at a position where a part of the display monitor 29 is hidden. By hiding a part of the display monitor 29 by the label 11R in this way, for example, when the glass door frame 3a is opened, the player can easily prevent the player from visually recognizing the winning combination and the winning combination. Further, even when the label 11R is attached, the display monitor 29 may be attached at a position where it is not hidden.

Further, in the above embodiment, electric accessories such as a large winning opening (attacker) opened and closed by a solenoid and a second starting winning opening (electric chew) are used as movable accessories, and these electric accessories are used. Alternatively, a so-called mechanical solenoid that opens and closes according to the weight of the game ball may be used as a movable solenoid. Further, although the 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 29, a dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7-segment LED. Further, instead of the LED, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided with a 4-digit display unit of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D, but the number of digits is not limited to four and may be another number of digits. For example, it may be 2 digits, 8 digits or 10 digits.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the contents displayed on the display monitor 29, for example, the glass door frame 3a or the game machine frame 3 is opened regardless of the display of the winning combination or the winning combination, and the error is cleared. We may take action. For example, in order to pay out the game balls, a replenishment mechanism for replenishing the game balls (replenishment balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 2. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball clogging occurs, the glass door frame 3a or the game machine frame 3 may be opened to clear the ball clogging and release the error. When the glass door frame 3a or the game machine frame 3 is opened to clear the error regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the display such as the combination and the combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29. You may not do it.

Further, in order not to display the winning combination, the winning combination, etc. on the display monitor 29 at this time, it may be a condition that no error has occurred in displaying the winning combination, the winning combination, and the like. The errors in the display of the winning combination and the winning combination here are, for example, the detection of an abnormal operation determined in step S101 shown in FIG. 63, the acquisition of winning information during business hours determined in step S104, and step S106. It may be the detection of a predetermined number or more of prizes for the attacker per unit time determined by. By providing the condition that such an error in the display of the combination and the combination ratio does not occur, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player sees the information such as the combination and the combination ratio.

In addition, regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the glass door frame 3a or the game machine frame 3 is opened to clear the error, and after the error clearing is completed, the winning combination and the winning ratio with respect to the display monitor 29, etc. May be displayed after waiting for a predetermined period of time, for example, 1 minute, and after the predetermined time has elapsed. After the error occurrence is cleared, the cause of the error occurrence cannot be completely eliminated, and the same error often occurs continuously. By displaying the combination and the combination ratio on the display monitor 29 after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the information such as the combination and the combination ratio even when such an error occurs. .. The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be a time longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or a time shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, a predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of failure of the image display device 5, the predetermined period of the ball clogging of the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

Further, the main board 11 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 29, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as "error display") for displaying an error. It is preferable that the error indicator is arranged at a position away from the display monitor 29. Specifically, the display monitor 29 may be arranged at the position of the right 1/3 of the main board 11, and the error indicator may be arranged at the position of the left 1/3 of the main board 11. Further, in order to make the display monitor 29 easy to understand, the location of the display monitor 29 on the main board 11 may be printed in characters on the board case 201, or a sticker may be attached to the board case 201. You may keep it. Further, the display monitor 29 may be provided on the payout control board which is a part of the main board 11.

(29) In the above embodiment
It was explained that the winning ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) are calculated using the pachinko gaming machine as an example and displayed on the display monitor, but the winning combination (%) and the winning combination (%) in the pachinko gaming machine in the slot machine You may calculate the values corresponding to and display these values on the display monitor provided in the slot machine. The display monitor can be provided on the main board of the slot machine, for example, like the above-mentioned gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1.

As for the role ratio and the role ream in the slot machine, for example, the payout of the game value (game value, hereinafter also referred to as "medal") accompanying the progress of the game of the slot machine is during the operation of the character mounted on the slot machine. It is calculated based on whether or not the slot machine is equipped with an accessory other than the first-class special accessory as an accessory.

For example, a type 1 special character, a type 2 special character, and a normal character are set as the character, and the slot machine is not equipped with the type 1 special character as the character, and the normal character is not installed. When only other accessories such as objects are mounted, the combination ratio is calculated by the number of medals paid out during operation of the accessory to the total number of medals paid out. In addition, if the slot machine is equipped with only the first-class special bonuses as the bonuses and no bonuses other than the first-class special bonuses, the role ream will be the bonuses for the total number of medals paid out. It is calculated by the number of medals paid out during the operation of.

An example of the calculation method of the winning combination (%) in the slot machine will be described below. Here, an example will be described in which the first-class special accessory is set to the special gaming state and only the first-class special accessory is mounted as the accessory. In the slot machine, the fluctuation of the symbol can be started by setting the number of bets, and a prize is generated according to the result of the fluctuation of the symbol. For the winning in the slot machine, the bonus is given with the value for the game, the re-game winning that allows the symbol to start changing without setting the number of bets, and the special game state in which the probability of occurrence of the given winning is improved. There is a bonus prize. Here, the winning combination (%) in the slot machine is the cumulative total of the gaming value (the above-mentioned pachinko game) obtained by the award winning as a result of the symbol fluctuation during the period in which the symbol is changed a predetermined number of times. Cumulative total of game value (corresponding to the total number of balls acquired in the machine) obtained by giving a prize as a result of fluctuations in the symbol during the period of transition to the special game state (in the above-mentioned pachinko machine) It is expressed as a ratio of (corresponding to the number of consecutive winning balls). For example, in a period in which the symbol is changed 6000 times, when the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained in the period, is 16000, a prize is awarded during the period of transition to the special gaming state. When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is the winning combination (%).

Further, the main board in the slot machine is provided, for example, in the back of the outer frame. Therefore, when the door frame (front door) of the slot machine is opened, the appearance of the main board when the main board is viewed from the outside of the slot machine is different from that of the game machine 1. Since reels and the like are stored in the outer frame of the slot machine, the outer frame of the slot machine is often larger than that of the pachinko gaming machine. Further, due to its structure, the main board in the slot machine is often attached to the inner side of the outer frame (the inner side surface of the plate material on the back side). For this reason, when the door frame of the slot machine is opened, it is possible that the light does not reach the main board sufficiently. Therefore, when the display monitor is attached to the main board, the information displayed on the display monitor ( Numerical values, characters, etc.) are preferably displayed brightly with a large amount of light.

Further, in the slot machine, a display monitor is arranged so that it can be easily visually recognized from an oblique direction with respect to the main board provided at the back of the outer frame. An arrangement that makes it easy to see from an oblique direction is, for example, an arrangement that faces the front when the door frame is opened from the outer frame when viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By arranging the display monitor in this way, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-linking ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the frame 3 for the game machine greatly, but only slightly opens it. It is possible to confirm the continuous role ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the winning combination ratio can be easily performed.

When the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the arrangement facing the front when viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame has an inclined surface like the base member 129A shown in FIG. 68 and is inclined. The display monitor may be attached to the inclined surface of the base member whose surface faces the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. Alternatively, the inclined surface may be a buried inclined surface formed on the main substrate. In addition to these, the display monitor may be provided on a base member such as any of the base members 129A to 129I on which the display monitors 130A to 130I are provided. Further, when the display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor may be provided directly on the main board and the main board and the display monitor may be housed in the board case, or the display monitor may be housed on the outside of the board case containing the main board. May be provided.

Further, these display monitors may be provided in an adjusting means capable of adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By providing a display monitor as an adjustment means that makes it possible to adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame, adjustments can be made according to the wishes of the playground where the slot machine is installed. It can be carried out. Further, the adjusting means may be a manual type or an electric type.

Although the main board of the slot machine is provided at the back of the outer frame, it may be provided at another position. For example, it may be provided on the right side surface when viewed from the player side inside the outer frame, or may be provided on the left side surface. If it is provided on the right side of the outer frame, it is provided on the side corresponding to the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. Therefore, when the display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor is easy to see. be able to.

Further, in the slot machine as well, the main board may be provided on the back surface side of the door frame as in the pachinko gaming machine. However, in slot machines, there is no equivalent to the game board of pachinko game machines, and the door frame is provided with a viewing window for visually recognizing the reels. Therefore, the main board is placed at a position avoiding this viewing window. It may be provided. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine as well, instead of providing the main board on the back surface side of the game board, the main board may be provided on the back side of the outer frame or on the left and right sides like a slot machine.

An example of displaying the calculated winning ratio (%) and winning combination (%) on a display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided on the main board is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other than the payout control board and the like. A display monitor may be provided on the substrate, the game board surface, the game machine frame (underframe), or the like. Further, the present invention is not limited to the one provided with a dedicated display monitor for displaying the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%), and is not limited to the existing display device (for example, the image display device 5, 7-segment display for displaying an error). A device, a credit display in a slot machine, a payout number display, etc.) may be used to display predetermined information such as a winning combination (%) and a winning combination (%).

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine, the predetermined information is the combination and the combination ratio (cumulative combination and the cumulative combination ratio), but other information may be used. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the predetermined information may be the number of payouts of game balls (= number of prize balls). Further, in the slot machine, the machine discount (= (number of medals paid out / number of medals inserted) × 100) or the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out may be used. Further, these numerical values may be used as information calculated for each predetermined number of games and for each predetermined number of medals inserted. Further, predetermined information such as the winning combination, the winning ratio, and the machine allocation may be calculated for a predetermined period, for example, 400 games or 6000 games, and the predetermined information for each number of these games may be displayed. In this case, the predetermined period may be displayed together.

In addition, some slot machines are provided with so-called settings. The setting means a numerical value obtained by dividing the probability in the slot machine into stages, and for example, six stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided. Information such as the winning combination and the winning combination displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each setting, or may be displayed together with the setting when displaying for each setting.

In addition, some slot machines can execute one game with different numbers of medals inserted (number of bets). For example, one game can be executed by selecting the number of inserted medals (number of bets) for executing one game from one to three and inserting the selected number of medals. In such a slot machine, information such as the winning combination and the winning combination displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each number of inserted sheets (number of bets). In addition, there are slot machines in which the required number of slots (number of bets) differs depending on the game state. For example, there is a slot machine in which the required number of inserts is two when the game state is in the bonus, and the required number of inserts is three when the game state is not in the bonus. In such a slot machine, it may be possible to display information such as a winning combination and a winning combination displayed on a display monitor as predetermined information for each relationship between the game state and the number of inserted sheets.

Further, in the slot machine, as predetermined information, in addition to the winning combination and the winning ratio calculated based on the ordinary role and the special role, for example, the game state of the slot machine is not advantageous with the advantageous section other than during the bonus. When the section is set, the ratio of the number of medals paid out in these advantageous sections to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section may be displayed. Further, on the display monitor, as predetermined information, in addition to the winning combination ratio, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as "the number of advantageous section games") and the ratio of the number of games between the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section (hereinafter "" "Advantageous / non-advantageous ratio") may be displayed. The number of continuous games in the advantageous section and the advantageous / non-advantage ratio may be displayed on a dedicated display monitor different from the combination / combination ratio, or may be displayed with a time lag using a common display monitor. For example, using a common display monitor, the number of advantageous section games → advantageous / non-advantageous ratio → short-term combination → short-term combination ratio → cumulative combination → cumulative combination ratio → number of advantageous section games → ... You may.

Further, the number of advantageous section games may be the number of games in the ongoing advantageous section during the continuation of the advantageous section, or may be the number of predetermined games, for example, the number of games per 3000 G in the past. Alternatively, it may be the number of games in an advantageous section executed for a predetermined period, for example, on the day. The advantageous / non-advantageous ratio may be the number of games between a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000G in the past, or may be the advantageous / non-advantageous ratio for a predetermined period, for example, the day.

Further, the ratio of the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in the non-advantageous section may be displayed. The point is that the ratio of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section and medals to be paid out in the non-advantageous section should be calculated and displayed. There are various ways of thinking about the relationship between the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section. By lowering the medal payout ratio in the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce the fluctuation of the increase / decrease of medals. Further, in order to prevent the advantageous section from being too long, a predetermined limit may be set on the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined number of games, an upper limit of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section, a machine discount in the advantageous section, and the like. ..

The advantageous section is a section in which the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted (machine discount) is higher than that of the non-advantageous section. This is a section that is advantageous for players because the machine rate is high. Advantageous sections include during the bonus when normal and special characters are operating, during replay time (RT), during assist time (AT), during assist replay time (ART), etc. Can be done. The machine percentage in the advantageous section often exceeds 100%, but may be less than 100% (so-called reduced RT, etc.). If the machine percentage in the advantageous section is less than 100%, the more the game is continued, the more medals will be consumed, but in that the consumption ratio of medals will be lower, the player will consume the non-advantageous section. It will be advantageous.

The term “during replay time” means, for example, a state in which the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay is higher than that during the state other than during the replay time. During the replay time, the replay probability is higher than during the non-replay time, so that the consumption of medals can be reduced, so that the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

The term “during assist time” means, for example, a state in which the operation procedure is navigated when a condition device for displaying a winning combination on the valid line is established when a predetermined condition such as a predetermined operation procedure is satisfied. .. Navigating the operation procedure is, for example, navigating the stop order when stopping three reels in a predetermined stop order, or navigating the symbol when stopping and displaying a predetermined symbol. There is. During the assist time, the operation procedure is not navigated except during the assist time, so it is uncertain whether or not the operation procedure is executed. However, during the assist time, the operation procedure is navigated. Therefore, as long as the player follows the navigation, the winning combination can be aligned with the effective line. Therefore, the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

The assist replay time is a state in which the replay time and the assist time are executed at the same time. The slot machine is designed so that the game progresses by increasing or decreasing medals by combining these advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections. Here, each advantageous section such as during bonus, replay time, assist time, and assist replay time is more advantageous than the non-advantageous section, but the degree of advantage may be smaller.

The advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be all or a part of them. For example, in a slot machine in which a plurality of advantageous sections are provided as advantageous sections, the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information may be only the advantageous section in which the machine percentage exceeds 100%. Further, even if it is an advantageous section of the same type, it may be changed whether or not it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information depending on the transition condition. For example, in a slot machine that shifts to a predetermined number of games immediately after the end of the bonus and after the end of the bonus, for example, after 1000 games have passed, the replay that shifts immediately after the end of the bonus The ratio displayed as predetermined information is calculated during the replay time, which is the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information during the time, and after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus. It may not be an advantageous section for the purpose.

During the replay time that shifts immediately after the end of the bonus, it is a so-called chance replay time that gives the player who has won many medals in the bonus a chance to win more medals. On the other hand, during the replay time, which is shifted after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus, the player who has lost many medals is in a so-called relief replay time in which the lost medals are relieved. During such a chance replay time, it is used as an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information, and during a salvage replay time, it is used as an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information. You may not do it.

In addition, in calculating other numerical values such as the winning combination, the winning combination, or the machine discount in the slot machine, for the replay, a predetermined number of medals, for example, three medals are inserted, one game is executed, and three cards are played. The calculation may be performed assuming that the medal has been paid out. Alternatively, for the re-game, it may be considered that the game has not been played, and other numerical values such as the winning combination, the winning ratio, or the machine allocation in the slot machine may be performed.

In addition, the ring buffer provided in the RAM 102 of the pachinko gaming machine stores the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening. On the other hand, in the ring buffer in the slot machine, for example, the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section for each number of medals paid out may be stored, and the number of medals paid out for each predetermined number of games may be stored. The number of medals paid out for the section and the non-advantageous section may be stored. The predetermined number of sheets here may be, for example, 500 sheets or 1000 sheets. Other appropriate number of sheets may be used. Further, the predetermined number of games may be 100 games or 400 games. Assuming that the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game is 15, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in 400 games is 6000. Therefore, the maximum number of payouts in 400 games can be stored with a margin in a 2-byte storage area.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub side) of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, etc., one variation is made when the variation is started. An example of transmitting a pattern specification command is shown, but the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) has the presence or absence of pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of slipping effect, etc. in the first command before reaching (so-called when not reaching). A command (for example, a pre-variation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (for example, a pre-variation pattern) of the second stop is transmitted, and the second command determines the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (for example, the post-variation pattern) after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. ..

In this case, the effect control board may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board may select the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Only one type of off symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. .. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, etc., the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the game medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that grants.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 ... Pachinko game machine
2 ... Game board
3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device
5 ... Image display device
6A ... Ordinary winning ball device
6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device
7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker
9 ... Game effect lamp
11 ... Main board
12 ... Production control board
13 ... Voice control board
14 ... Lamp control board
15 ... Relay board
20 ... Ordinary symbol display
21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch
23 ... Count switch
29 ... Display monitor
30 ... Operation button 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit 1000… Movable accessory

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of special symbols and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player.
It is provided with a first light emitting means composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies and a second light emitting means composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies and different from the first light emitting means.
Each of the plurality of light emitting bodies constituting the first light emitting means has a first program for causing the display result of a special symbol relating to the progress of the game to emit light according to a predetermined light emitting pattern, and a plurality of light emitting means constituting the second light emitting means. Each of the light emitters of the above includes a second program for emitting light according to a light emission pattern determined for a number of game values different from the progress of the game .
The second program is configured to be executed after the execution of the first program, and the first light emission is emitted by the first program by the time the second program is executed after the first program. A game characterized in that a specific program, which is at least one of a program for determining a light emitting pattern for causing the means to emit light and a program for determining a light emitting pattern for causing the second light emitting means to emit light in the second program, is not executed. Machine.

Images